Ibm 3592-c06

IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives
and TS1120 Controller
Introduction and Planning Guide

3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6, E07,
J70 and C06
GA32-0555-05
IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives

and TS1120 Controller
Introduction and Planning Guide

3592 Models J1A, E05, E06, EU6, E07,
J70 and C06
GA32-0555-05
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in Safety and environmental notices on
page xiii and Notices on page 163.
Edition notice
This edition applies to the sixth release of the IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives and TS1120 Controller Introduction
and Planning Guide and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2011.
US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Read this first

This is the sixth edition of the IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives and TS1120
Controller Introduction and Planning Guide (July 2011).
What's new in this edition (July 2011)

Revision bars (|) appear next to information that was added or changed since the
release of the last edition (GA32-0555-04). Changes include:
v Addition of the TS1140 (3592 Model E07) Tape Drive.
v Introduction of the IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Advanced Data (type JC), the IBM
Tape Cartridge 3592 Advanced Economy (type JK), and the IBM Tape Cartridge
3592 Advanced WORM (type JY). Refer to Cartridge types and characteristics
on page 100 for more information.
v Support of Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager and IBM Security Key Lifecycle
Manager for z/OS for encryption. See Tape encryption overview on page 11
for more information.
v Miscellaneous editorial changes.
Fifth Edition
The following information was added in the fifth edition:
v 3592 Model E06 and Model EU6 tape drives.
v Support for IPv6.
v This publication has also been updated for compliance with the International
System of Units (SI) measurements.
Fourth Edition
In the fourth edition, the following information was added or enhanced to support
the following:
v TS3400 Tape Library connection to TS1120 Tape Controller. See TS3400 Tape
Library installation on page 24 for more information.
v Library-managed encryption support for TS1120 tape drives in 3494 L22, D22, or
D24 frames in Open Systems environments. See Managing encryption on page
12.
v CCC, BSMI, and IRAM agency certified power cords are now available for 3952
Model F05 tape frames. See Chapter 2, Standard Features, on page 31.
v 3592 tape drive features on page 31 was reorganized for improved ease of use.
v Miscellaneous editorial changes.
Third Edition
This edition introduces two new 700 GB (651.93 GiB) tape cartridges, the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended, and the IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended WORM, media types JB and JX. Refer to
Cartridge types and characteristics on page 100 for more information.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011
iii
Second Edition
In the second edition, additional feature codes and modification of existing feature
codes were incorporated. These changes are related to new encryption support on
the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller (3592 E05 tape drive). See Tape encryption
overview on page 11 for more information.
iv
3592 Introduction and Planning Guide
Contents
Read this first . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Safety and environmental notices . . . xiii
About this publication . . . . . . . . xv
|
Related information . . . . . . . . . . . xv
IBM 3953 Tape System publications . . . . . xv
IBM System Storage 3592 tape drives and
controller publications . . . . . . . . . . xv
IBM Encryption key management publications
xv
IBM 3590 TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System
publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library
publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library
publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Automated Tape
Library (3494) publications . . . . . . . . xvi
IBM System z publications . . . . . . . . xvi
IBM Fibre Channel publications . . . . . . xvi
IBM FICON and Fibre Channel publications . . xvi
Related software publications . . . . . . . xvii
Other publications . . . . . . . . . . xvii
IBM online access . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
IBM System z (zSeries) information . . . . . xvii
IBM pSeries-RS/6000, AIX information . . . . xvii
IBM iSeries and AS/400 information . . . . xvii
IBM Storage media support . . . . . . . xviii
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3592
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Non-IBM support . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Brocade information . . . . . . . . . . xix
Cisco information . . . . . . . . . . . xix
HP information . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Linux information . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Microsoft Windows information . . . . . . xx
SGI information . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Oracle SUN information . . . . . . . . . xx
Data storage values . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Send us your feedback . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . 1
3592 tape drives . . . . .
Drive attachments . . .
Characteristics . . . . .
Operator controls . . . .
Drive compatibility . . .
Tape drive emulation mode
Tape encryption overview
. . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . . 4
. . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . 7
support . . . . . 9
. . . . . . . . 11
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and 3592 J70

Controller . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel switches for the C06 and
controllers . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and indicators . . . . .
Compatibility. . . . . . . . .
Call Home. . . . . . . . . .
3952 Tape Frame installation. . . . .
3953 Frame installation . . . . . .
TS3400 Tape Library installation . . .
TS3500 Tape Library installation . . .
3494 Frame installation . . . . . .
3590 Model A14 Frame installation . .
Rack installation . . . . . . . . .
Hardware and software support . . .
Device drivers . . . . . . . .
Application software . . . . . .
Media . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data cartridges . . . . . . . .
Cleaning cartridges . . . . . . .
. .
J70
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. 21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
27
27
28
28
28
28
29
Chapter 2. Standard Features . . . . . 31

3592 tape drive features . . . . . . . . . .
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in TS3400
Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in TS3500
library frames . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in 3494
Tape Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tape Frame Model C20 . . . . . . . . .
Feature descriptions3592 tape drive
installations in racks . . . . . . . . . .
Feature descriptions3592 tape drive standard
features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
library frames . . . . . . . . . . . .
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and associated frame
features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3592 C06 and associated frame feature
descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service/Call Home features . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel environments and their feature
codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3592 Model J70 Controller and associated frame
features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J70 and associated frame feature descriptions . .
Service/Call Home features . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel environments and their feature
codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J70 controller and 3590 SCSI tape drive
attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J70 controller dual path attachment . . . . .
3952 F05 Frame and associated features . . . . .
3952 F05 and associated feature descriptions . .
31
31
32
35
38
41
43
46
48
50
56
58
60
63
74
77
84
85
86
87
Controller cable features . . . . . .

Host system attachment cables . . .
2109 switch attachment cable features
SCSI drive cables . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel drive cables . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
90
91
95
95
96
Chapter 3. Media . . . . . . . . . . 99
IBM 3592 tape cartridge . . . . . . . . . . 99
Cartridge types and characteristics . . . . . 100
Cartridge external components . . . . . . 102
Cartridge memory. . . . . . . . . . . 104
Write-once, read-many . . . . . . . . . 104
Capacity scaling and segmentation . . . . . 106
Cleaning cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cartridge care and handling . . . . . . . . 108
Handling the cartridges . . . . . . . . . 108
Environmental specifications for tape cartridges 110
Cartridge quality and library maintenance . . . 110
Media supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Feature Code descriptions ("pack-in") . . . . 111
Feature Code definitions . . . . . . . . . 111
3599 media supplies . . . . . . . . . . 112
Ordering media supplies by part number . . . 115
Chapter 4. Site planning . . . . . . . 119

Environmental specifications . . . . .
Cooling requirements. . . . . . .
Acoustic specifications . . . . . . .
Cabling information . . . . . . . .
3592 power characteristics . . . . . .
Power specifications . . . . . . . .
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . .
3592 tape drive specifications . . . . .
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller specifications
3592 Model J70 controller specifications .
3952 F05 Tape Frame specifications . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Planning considerations
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129
Host configuration for the TS1120 (3592 C06)

Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning for the nondisruptive addition of drives
Planning for data encryption on TS1120 and later
tape drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encryption Key Manager Setup Tasks . . . .
Planning for Application-Managed Tape
Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning for System-Managed Tape Encryption
Planning for Library-Managed Tape Encryption
Tape Drive Installation Process for Encryption
Planning for supplies and equipment . . . . .
3592 supplies . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridge weights . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning for operator training . . . . . . . .
Planning for drive cleaning. . . . . . . . .
Planning for applications programming . . . .
Data Security Erase . . . . . . . . . .
Missing Interrupt Handler . . . . . . . .
Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other considerations . . . . . . . . . .
Planning for data migration . . . . . . . .
vi
119
119
119
120
120
120
121
122
122
124
125
129
130
130
131
131
132
134
134
135
136
136
136
136
137
137
137
138
139
141
Managing multiple tape formats and lengths

Hardware configuration definitions (HCD) .
JES3 considerations . . . . . . . . .
SMS definitions. . . . . . . . . . .
StorageTek ACS-compatible frame
considerations . . . . . . . . . . .
Other migration considerations . . . . .
142
. 143
. 143
. 143
. 143
. 144
Chapter 6. Device attachment

planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fibre Channel attachment planning . . . . .
Host hardware and software considerations .
SAN attachment . . . . . . . . . .
FICON attachment planning . . . . . .
FICON and ESCON attachment . . . . .
3592 and 3590 tape control unit native FICON
support . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel attachment planning . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
145
145
145
146
148
. 149
. 149
Chapter 7. Controller-attached
emulation mode operational
considerations . . . . . . . . . . . 153
General considerations for controller-attached
emulation mode operation . . . . . . .
Library maintenance . . . . . . . . .
Drive allocation/selection . . . . . . .
z/OS considerations (MVS/ESA) . . . .
VM/ESA and z/VM considerations . . .
VSE/ESA considerations . . . . . .
Media capacity exploitation . . . . . .
MVS/ESA considerations . . . . . .
VM/ESA and z/VM considerations . . .
VSE/ESA considerations . . . . . .
Catalog considerations . . . . . . . .
Emulated device types . . . . . . .
z/OS considerations (MVS/ESA) . . . .
Media interchangeability . . . . . . .
3490E-emulation compared to actual 3490E .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153
154
154
154
155
155
155
156
156
156
156
156
156
156
157
Appendix A. Host reporting . . . . . 159

Statistical Analysis and Reporting System . . .
Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs
and MIMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIM/MIM presentation . . . . . . . . .
. 159
. 159
. 160
Appendix B. Accessibility . . . . . . 161

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission statement
Industry Canada compliance statement . . . .
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic
Emission statement . . . . . . . . . .
Taiwan Class A compliance statement . . . .
Taiwan contact information. . . . . . . .
164
165
165
165
166
167
167
168
Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference

(VCCI) Class A Statement . . . . . . . . 168
Japan Electronics and Information Technology
Industries Association (JEITA) Statement (less
than or equal to 20 A per phase) . . . . . . 168
Korean Communications Commission (KCC)
Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class

A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Contents
vii
viii
Figures
1.
2.
|
|
3.
4.
5.
6.
3592 tape drive. . . . . . . . . . .

Three possible locations for encryption policy
engine and key management. . . . . .
In-band encryption key flow . . . . . .
Out-of-band encryption key flow . . . .
Encryption using both symmetric and
asymmetric encryption keys . . . . . .
Encryption using only symmetric encryption
keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 4
. 14
. 17
. 18
. 20
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
3592 tape cartridge. . . . . . . . .

Write-protect selector . . . . . . . .
Data cartridge door . . . . . . . .
Cleaning cartridge identifying characteristics
Cleaning cartridge door . . . . . . .
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller back panel
Top View of 3952 Model F05 Frame Layout
. 103
. 104
. 104
108
. 108
124
127
. 21
ix
Tables
|
|
|
|
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
| 18.
|
19.
20.
21.
Comparison of decimal and binary units and

values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Percentage difference between decimal and
binary units . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Maximum 3592 tape drive attachments in
environments without a tape controller . . . 4
Maximum 3592 tape drive attachments in
environments with a tape controller . . . . 5
3592 tape drives characteristics with 3592 tape
cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3592 Tape drive front panel component
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3592 Drive Emulation . . . . . . . . . 10
Descriptions of the 3592 Models C06 and J70
controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . 22
TS1120 (C06) controllers in 3952 F05 frames
23
TS1120 (C06) Controller and 3592 J70
Controller in 3953 F05 frames . . . . . . 24
TS1120 and TS1130 tape drives in TS3400 Tape
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3592 tape drives in TS3500 Tape Library (3584)
Frames L22/L23 and D22/D23 . . . . . . 25
L22, D14, D22, and D24 maximum frame
capacities for drives and controllers . . . . 25
3590 Model A14 maximum frame capacity for
drives and controllers . . . . . . . . . 26
Maximum number of 3592 tape drives or 3590
drives installed in racks with or without the
TS1120 (C06) Controller, 3592 J70 Controller, or
the 3590 A60 Controller . . . . . . . . 27
3577 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3577
Model L5U. . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3584 feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3584
frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3592 feature codes for tape drives in 3584
frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3494 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3494 35
3592 C20 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in
Tape Frame Model C20 . . . . . . . . 38
Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in rack
installations . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
| 33.
34.
35.
| 36.
|
|
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
Common feature codes for 3592 tape drives

43
Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3494 L22,
D22, and D24 library frame installations . . . 47
Feature codes for Model C06 controllers and
associated features . . . . . . . . . . 48
C06 Feature codes for Service/Call Home
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Feature codes for Model J70 control units and
Feature codes for Service/Call Home Features 74
Feature codes for 3952 F05 Frame and
Dual ESCON attachment cables . . . . . . 91
2 Gb FICON long-wavelength attachment
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2 Gb FICON short-wavelength attachment
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Supported 3592 read (R) and write (W)
formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Types of IBM 3592 tape cartridges . . . . 100
Environment for operating and storing the
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Cartridge . 110
Media features ("pack-in") . . . . . . . 111
Descriptions of 3599 tape media features
113
3592 media supplies for the 3592 tape drive
116
Supplies for 3592 cartridge maintenance
116
Authorized suppliers of custom bar code
labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3592 tape drive environmental specifications 119
3592 Model J70 controller environmental
specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Acoustic specifications . . . . . . . . 120
Input voltages . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3592 tape drive specifications . . . . . . 122
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Specifications
123
3592 Model J70 controller specifications
125
Cleaning times for 3592 drives . . . . . . 137
Missing Interrupt Handler (MIH) Values
137
Tape characteristics by tape usage category
141
Permitted combinations of FICON/ESCON
attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
xi
xii
Safety and environmental notices

This section contains information about safety notices that are used in this guide
and environmental notices for this product.
Safety notices
Observe the safety notices when using this product. These safety notices contain
danger and caution notices. These notices are sometimes accompanied by symbols
that represent the severity of the safety condition.
Most danger or caution notices contain a reference number (Dxxx or Cxxx). Use
the reference number to check the translation in the IBM Systems Safety Notices,
G2299054 manual.
The sections that follow define each type of safety notice and give examples.
Danger notice
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol always accompanies a danger notice
to represent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows:
DANGER: An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place
hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices that
attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure
that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to prevent an electrical
shock. (D004)
Caution notice
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to
people because of some existing condition, or to a potentially dangerous situation
that might develop because of some unsafe practice. A caution notice can be
accompanied by one of several symbols:
If the symbol is...
It means...
A generally hazardous condition not represented by other
safety symbols.
This product contains a Class II laser. Do not stare into the

beam. (C029) Laser symbols are always accompanied by the
classification of the laser as defined by the U. S.
Department of Health and Human Services (for example,
Class I, Class II, and so forth).
A hazardous condition due to mechanical movement in or
around the product.
xiii
If the symbol is...
It means...
This part or unit is heavy but has a weight smaller than 18
kg (39.7 lb). Use care when lifting, removing, or installing
this part or unit. (C008)
Sample caution notices follow:

Caution
The battery is a lithium ion battery. To avoid possible explosion, do not
burn. Exchange only with the IBM-approved part. Recycle or discard the
battery as instructed by local regulations. In the United States, IBM has a
process for the collection of this battery. For information, call
1-800-426-4333. Have the IBM part number for the battery unit available
when you call. (C007)
Caution
The system contains circuit cards, assemblies, or both that contain lead
solder. To avoid the release of lead (Pb) into the environment, do not burn.
Discard the circuit card as instructed by local regulations. (C014)
Caution
When removing the Modular Refrigeration Unit (MRU), immediately
remove any oil residue from the MRU support shelf, floor, and any other
area to prevent injuries because of slips or falls. Do not use refrigerant
lines or connectors to lift, move, or remove the MRU. Use handholds as
instructed by service procedures. (C016)
Caution
This product may not be certified in your country for connection by any
means whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks.
Further certification may be required by law prior to making any such
connection. Please contact IBM for information.
|
|
|
|
Environmental notices
The environmental notices that apply to this product are provided in the
Environmental Notices and User Guide, Z125-5823-xx manual. A copy of this manual
is located on the publications CD.
xiv
About this publication

|
|
This publication contains information about the IBM System Storage 3592 tape
drives and TS1120 Controller.
Related information
|
Refer to the following publications and sources for additional information about
the IBM System Storage 3592 tape drives and TS1120 Controller. To ensure that
you have the latest publications, visit the web at http://www.ibm.com/support/
us/en/.
IBM 3953 Tape System publications

v IBM 3953 Library Manager Model L05 Operator Guide, GA32-0558
v IBM 3953 Tape System Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0557
|
|
|
|
|
|
IBM System Storage 3592 tape drives and controller

publications
v IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives and TS1120 Controller Operator Guide,
GA32-0556
v IBM System Storage 3592 SCSI Reference, GA32-0562
v IBM System Storage TS1120, TS1130, and TS1140 Tape Drives Maintenance
Information, PN 46X9804
v IBM 3592 Model E07 Tape Drive Customer Information Center, available at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/jagdrive/cust/index.jsp
IBM Encryption key management publications

v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Introduction, Planning,
and User's Guide, GA76-0418
|
|
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Quick Start Guide for
TS1120 Tape Drives, GA76-0421
v IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Quick Start Guide, GI11-8744
v IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager for z/OS Planning and User's Guide, SC14-7628
IBM 3590 TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System publications

v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0329
v IBM TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Frame 3590 Introduction, Planning, and User's
Guide, GA32-0366
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Operator Guide, GA32-0330
v IBM TotalStorage 3590 Tape Subsystem Hardware Reference Guide, GA32-0331
IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library publication

v IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library Planning and Operator Guide, GC27-2107
xv
IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library publications

Note: There are two versions of the TS3500 Tape Library Introduction and Planning
Guide, as well as two versions of the TS3500 Tape Library Operator Guide. One
version of each document is specific to the TS3500 Tape Library with the Advanced
Library Management System (ALMS), and provides details about features and
functions that are only available for libraries with ALMS installed and enabled.
Refer to the title of each guide in order to determine which version you need.
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library with ALMS Introduction and Planning
Guide, GA32-0593
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library with ALMS Operator Guide, GA32-0594
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0559
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Operator Guide, GA32-0560
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Maintenance Information (provided with
the 3584 Tape Library)
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library with ALMS Tape System Reporter User's
Guide, GA32-0589
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library SCSI Reference, GA32-0561
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Information Center, available at:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/ts3500tl/v1r0/index.jsp
|
|
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Automated Tape Library (3494)

publications
v IBM TotalStorage Automated Tape Library (3494) Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0448
v IBM TotalStorage Automated Tape Library (3494) Operator Guide, GA32-0449
IBM System z publications

v IBM z/OS DFSMS OAM Planning, Installation, and Storage Administration Guide for
Tape Libraries, SC35-0427
v IBM z/VM DFSMS/VM Removable Media Services, SC24-6185
|
|
|
IBM Fibre Channel publications

v IBM TotalStorage SAN Switch 2109 Model F16 Installation and Service Guide,
SY27-7623
v IBM Fiber-Optic Channel Link Planning and Installation, GA32-0367
IBM FICON and Fibre Channel publications

|
|
|
v FICON Planning and Implementation Guide, SG24-6497, IBM Redbooks

publication
v IBM System z Connectivity Handbook, SC24-5444, Redbooks publication
|
|
|
|
v IBM Tape Solutions for Storage Area Networks and FICON, SG24-5474, Redbooks
publication
v IBM System z Planning for Fiber Optic Links (ESCON, FICON, InfiniBand, Coupling
Links, and Open System Adapters), GA23-0367
v IBM System z Maintenance Information for Fiber Optic Links (ESCON, FICON,
Coupling Links, and Open System Adapters), SY27-2597
xvi
v IBM System z Fibre Channel Connection (FICON) I/O Interface Physical Layer,
SA24-7172
Related software publications

|
|
|
For information regarding software related to the IBM 3592 Tape System, refer to:
v IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide, GC27-2130
v IBM Tape Device Drivers Programing Reference, GA32-0566
v IBM Tape Device Drivers Encryption Support, GA32-0565
v Basic Tape Library Support User's Guide and Reference, SC26-7016
v Environmental Record Editing and Printing (EREP) Program User's Guide and
Reference, GC35-0151
v z/OS DFSMS: Introduction, SC26-7397

v z/OS DFSMS: Object Access Method Planning, Installation, and Storage
Administration Guide for Tape Libraries, SC35-0427
v z/OS DFSMS Software Support for IBM System Storage TS1140, TS1130, and TS1120
Tape Drives (3592), SC26-7514
v z/VM General Information, GC24-5991
Other publications
v American National Standard Institute Small Computer System Interface X3T9.2/86-109
X3.180, X3B5/91-173C, X3B5/91-305, X3.131-199X Revision 10H, and
X3T9.9/91-11 Revision 1
IBM online access

IBM System z (zSeries) information
|
|
|
|
|
|
For additional information about IBM System z, see:

v IBM web portal for System z at http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/z
v IBM System z Redbooks, available at http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/portals/
systemz, including these titles:
DFSMS V1.10 and EAV Technical Guide, IBM Redbooks publication
IBM zEnterprise System Technical Guide, Redbooks publication
v z/OS Internet Library at http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/z/os/zos/bkserv
IBM pSeries-RS/6000, AIX information

For additional information about the IBM eServer pSeries servers, including the
RS/6000, see the information center at:
v http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/powersys/v3r1m5/index.jsp
For additional information about AIX, see:
v http://publib16.boulder.ibm.com/pseries/en_US/infocenter/base/
v http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/pseries/v5r3/index.jsp
IBM iSeries and AS/400 information

For additional information about iSeries and AS/400 systems, visit the
information center at:
v http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/iseries/
xvii
IBM Storage media support

The following website provides access to current regional and country-specific IBM
addresses and telephone numbers:
v http://www.storage.ibm.com/media/distributors
IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3592 support

For general information about the Enterprise class tape systems, see:
v http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/enterprise/index.html
For general information about the TS1120 Tape Drive, see:
v http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/tape/ts1120/index.html
|
|
For a list of compatible software, operating systems, and servers for TS1120 and
later tape drives, see the web page listed below. Select your tape drive, select
Product details, then select Independent Software Vendor (ISV) matrix.
v http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/drives/
Device driver support

To access the 3592 Firmware and Device Driver Matrix, visit the web at:
v http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/tape/3592/downloading.html
To access the TS1120 Firmware and Device Driver Matrix, visit the web at:
v http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/tape/ts1120/downloading.html
You can download device driver software and read documentation about various
device drivers at:
v http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/
Encryption management support

For the latest version of IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java
platform and supporting documentation, visit the web at:
v http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000504
For more information about the Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager, visit the web at:
v http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/key-lifecycle-mgr/
|
|
|
|
To search the IBM Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager Information Center, visit the web
at:
v http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/tivihelp/v2r1/index.jsp?topic=/
com.ibm.tklm.doc/welcome.htm
|
|
|
For more information about the IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager for z/OS,
visit the web at:
v http://www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/security-key-lifecycle-mgr-z/
xviii
IBM Network Integration and Deployment Services

The following website provides information about connectivity and the integration
of cabling systems:
v http://www.ibm.com/services/networking/integration
IBM Tape Storage publications

Refer to the following website for IBM hardware product documents in a PDF
format for viewing and printing:
v http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/tape/resource-library.html#publications
Storage Area Network Fabric

For information on high-performance switches and gateways, visit the web at:
v www.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/san
I/O connectivity
For updated information regarding FICON and fibre channel connectivity, visit
the web at:
v http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/zseries/connectivity
Redbooks
To access the IBM Redbooks, visit the web at:
v http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
Vendor support
This website provides compatibility information in PDF format for implementing
software, servers, and operating systems with IBM tape drives and libraries:
v http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/tape/compatibility/pdf/
ts1120_isv_matrix.pdf
Non-IBM support
Brocade information
For information on Brocade products and support, visit the web at:
v http://www.brocade.com/
Cisco information
For information on Cisco products and support, visit the web at:
v http://www.cisco.com/
HP information
The following publications and website relate to HP-UX systems:
v HP-UX Reference for HP-UX 10.20, 11.00, and 11i, Hewlett-Packard Company
v System Administration Tasks, HP-UX Release 10.20, 11.00, and 11i, Hewlett-Packard
Company
v Additional HP information can be found on the web at: http://docs.hp.com/
Linux information
Red Hat information
The following website relates to Red Hat Linux systems:
v http://www.redhat.com
xix
SuSE information
The following website relates to SuSE Linux systems:
v http://www.suse.com
Microsoft Windows information

The following website provides access to information about Microsoft Windows
systems:
v http://www.microsoft.com
SGI information
The following website provides access to information about SGI systems:
v http://techpubs.sgi.com/library
Oracle SUN information

The following website provides access to information about Oracle (Sun) systems:
v http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/indexes/documentation/index.html
xx
Data storage values
|
|
This documentation displays data storage values using both decimal (base-10) and
binary (base-2) units of measurement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Decimal units such as KB, MB, GB, and TB have commonly been used to express
data storage values, though these values are more accurately expressed using
binary units such as KiB, MiB, GiB, and TiB. At the kilobyte level, the difference
between decimal and binary units of measurement is relatively small (2.4%). This
difference grows as data storage values increase, and when values reach terabyte
levels the difference between decimal and binary units approaches 10%.
|
|
|
|
To reduce the possibility of confusion, this documentation represents data storage

using both decimal and binary units. Data storage values are displayed using the
following format:
|
|
By this example, the value 512 terabytes is displayed as:
|
|
|
Table 1 compares the names, symbols, and values of the decimal and binary units.
Table 2 shows the increasing percentage of difference between decimal and binary
units.
Table 1. Comparison of decimal and binary units and values
#### decimal unit (binary unit)
512 TB (465.6 TiB)
Decimal
Binary
|
|
Name
Symbol
Value
(base-10)
Name
Symbol
Value
(base-2)
kilo
103
kibi
Ki
210
mega
106
mebi
Mi
220
giga
109
gibi
Gi
230
tera
1012
tebi
Ti
240
peta
1015
pebi
Pi
250
|
|
exa
1018
exbi
Ei
260
Table 2. Percentage difference between decimal and binary units
Decimal Value
Binary Value
Percentage Difference
100 kilobytes (KB)
97.65 kibibytes (KiB)
2.35%
100 megabytes (MB)
95.36 mebibytes (MiB)
4.64%
100 gigabytes (GB)
93.13 gibibytes (GiB)
6.87%
100 terabytes (TB)
90.94 tebibytes (TiB)
9.06%
100 petabytes (PB)
88.81 pebibytes (PiB)
11.19%
|
|
100 exabytes (EB)
86.73 exbibytes (EiB)
13.27%
xxi
Send us your feedback

Your feedback is important in helping to provide the most accurate and
high-quality information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this
publication, you can send us comments by e-mail to starpubs@us.ibm.com or use
the Readers' Comments form at the back of this publication. Be sure to include the
following information in your correspondence:
v Exact publication title
v Form number (for example, GA32068900), part number, or EC level (located
on the back cover)
v Page numbers to which you are referring
Note: For suggestions on operating enhancements or improvements, please contact
your IBM Sales team.
xxii
Chapter 1. Introduction
|
The IBM System Storage 3592 tape drives and TS1120 Controller provide
significantly higher levels of performance, functionality, reliability, and cartridge
capacity, and a smaller size than the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590
product offerings. These improvements are available to tape customers across a
broad range of computing environments, including selected servers among the
following:
v IBM System i, System p, System x, and System z
v IBM AS/400 and RS/6000
v Oracle Sun
v Hewlett Packard (HP)
Also included are servers running Microsoft Windows NT, Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003, and Linux.
|
|
For the latest details on 3592 tape drives, visit http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/

storage/tape/drives/index.html.
|
|
|
|
This document provides introductory and planning information for the 3592 E07,
3592 E06/EU6, 3592 E05 tape drives, and TS1120 (C06) Controller. The 3592 J1A
tape drive and 3592 J70 Controller are no longer available for ordering but are
covered for existing product support.
|
|
Note: Not all 3592 tape drives or controllers are supported in the following tape
systems.
v 3952 F05 Tape Frame (see 3952 Tape Frame installation on page 23)
v 3953 F05 Tape Frame (see IBM 3953 Tape System Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0557)
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library (see IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape
Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0559)
v IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library (see IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape
Library Planning and Operator Guide, GC27-2107)
v IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library (see the IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library
Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448)
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive Frame 3590 Model A14 (see the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0329)
v Stand-alone racks
The 3592 tape drives use a tape cartridge with a form factor similar to the 3590
tape cartridges, which allows them to be used in automated environments, such as
the ones listed above and also in StorageTek Automated Cartridge System (ACS)
solutions (see the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Silo Compatible Tape Frame 3592
Introduction, Planning, and User's Guide Model C20, GA32-0463 or the IBM
TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Frame 3590 Introduction, Planning, and User's Guide,
GA32-0366).
3592 tape drives

The topics in this section provide general reference information for the 3592 tape
drives.
With their higher performance, reliability, and cartridge capacity, and a smaller size
as compared to the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise tape drive 3590 models
(withdrawn), the 3592 tape drives might allow you to reduce your number of tape
drives and cartridges, and the associated floor space while achieving greater
overall storage capacity.
Enhancements include:
v AES 256-bit data encryption capability increases security with minimal
performance impact.
v Up to 250 MB/s native data rate for the Model E07, six times faster than the
Model J1A at 40 MB/s.
v Up to 160 MB/s native data rate for the Models E06 and EU6, four times faster
than the Model J1A at 40 MB/s and up to 100 MB/s for the Model E05.
v Up to 4000 GB (3725.29 GiB1 native cartridge capacity for Model E07 on the IBM
Tape Cartridge 3592 Advanced Data, more than a tenfold increase over the
maximum 300 GB (279.39 GiB) native cartridge capacity of Model J1A on the
3592 Standard Data cartridge.
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Up to 1600 GB (1490.12 GiB) native cartridge capacity for the Model E07 and
1000 GB (931.32 GiB) for Models E06 and EU6 using the IBM Tape Cartridge
3592 Extended Data. Using the E07 tape drive at 3:1 compression, the maximum
capacity is 4800 GB (4470.35 GiB), more than a fivefold increase over the
maximum 300 GB (279.39 GiB) native tape cartridge capacity (900 GB [838.19
GiB] at 3:1 compression) of Model J1A using the Standard Data cartridge.
v Up to 640 GB (596.04 GiB) native cartridge capacity for the Models E06 and EU6
using the IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Standard Data (1920 GB [1788.14 GiB] at 3:1
compression), more than a twofold increase over the maximum 300 GB (279.39
GiB) native tape cartridge capacity (900 GB [838.19 GiB] at 3:1 compression) of
Model J1A.
v Up to 500 GB (465.66 GiB) for Model E07 on the Advanced Economy cartridge
with very fast read and write access.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
v Up to 128 GB (119.21 GiB) for Models E06 and EU6 on the Economy Data and
Economy WORM (write-once, read-many) cartridges, 100 GB (93.13 GiB) for
Model E05, and 60 GB (55.88 GiB) for Model J1A.
v Up to 4000 GB (3725.29 GiB) cartridge capacity for Model E07 on the Advanced
WORM cartridge for increased security of data. This is a fourfold increase over
the maximum WORM capacities for Models E06 and EU6 on the Extended
WORM cartridge, 1000 GB (931.32 GiB) on the Model E06, 700 GB (651.93 GiB)
on the Model E05.
|
|
|
v Up to 640 GB (596.04 GiB) cartridge capacity on the Model E06 on the Standard
WORM cartridge, 500 GB (465.66 GiB) on the Model E05, and 300 GB (279.39
GiB) on the Model J1A.
v Scaling capability to optimize fast access, storage capacity, or a combination of
both.
v Dual ported switched fabric Fibre Channel attachments.
1. One gibibyte (GiB) = 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 mebibytes (MiB). See Data storage values on page xxi) for more
information.
v High reliability and availability design.

v Additional performance and access improvements.
v Smaller form factor that allows double the number of drives, compared to the
3590 tape drives, in a single 3494 frame or stand-alone rack.
Additional enhancements over the 3590 drives to improve availability,

performance, and capacity include:
v Redundant power supplies
v Larger, 1.07 GB (1 GiB) internal buffer on Models E07, E06, and EU6, 536.9 MB
(512 MiB) for Model E05, and 134.2 MB (128 MiB) for Model J1A
v Dynamic digital speed matching
v Individual read and write data channel calibration
v Increased search speed
v Streaming Lossless Data Compression (SLDC) algorithm
|
|
|
|
Note: The actual throughput a customer may achieve is a function of many

components, such as system processor, disk data rate, data block size, data
compressibility, input/output (I/O) attachments, storage area network (SAN), and
the system or application software used. Although the drives are capable of a 250
MB/s (Model E07), 160 MB/s (Model E06 and EU6), 100 MB/s (Model E05) and 40
MB/s (Model J1A) native data rate, other components may limit the actual
effective data rate.
The 3592 tape drives come with dual ported, switched Fibre Channel attachments,
2 Gb/s (Model J1A) and 4 Gb/s (Models E06/EU6, and E05) and 8 Gb/s (Model
E07), for attachment to multiple servers or a single server with redundancy. The
E07 can attach to the TS1120 (C06) controller. The E06, EU6, E05, and J1A tape
drives can attach to the TS1120 (C06) controller and the 3592 J70 controller. The J1A
tape drive can also attach to the 3590 Model A60 controller. These tape drives use
ESCON or FICON channels for attachment to System z servers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 3592 Model E06 and E07 tape drives come with an Ethernet port for use by an
IBM Service Support Representative (SSR) for procedures such as updating
microcode or viewing drive status. Though uncommon, some Model EU6 drives
might have an Ethernet port. The Ethernet port on the 3592 E07 can also be used
by the customer for remote monitoring by attaching an Ethernet cable from the
drive to the customers network.
|
|
|
|
Note: This product may not be certified in your country for connection by any
means whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks. Further
certification may be required by law prior to making any such connection. Please
contact IBM for information.
Figure 1 on page 4 illustrates the 3592 tape drive.
Figure 1. 3592 tape drive
A note on terminology and model names

Throughout the remainder of this publication, the 3592 models E07, E06, EU6, E05,
and J1A tape drives are all referred to collectively as the 3592 tape drive unless a
specific model is being discussed. The 3592 models E07 (TS1140), E06 and EU6
(TS1130), and E05 (TS1120) tape drives are all referred to collectively as the TS1120
and later tape drives.
|
|
|
|
The 3592 EU6 tape drive is a 3592 E05 tape drive canister upgraded to contain a
Model E06 drive through the MES (Miscellaneous Equipment Specification) process
and is therefore the functional equivalent of the E06. The EU6 model name is only
used when information specific to the Model EU6 is discussed.
Drive attachments
This topic provides the maximum number of 3592 tape drive attachments in
environments with and without a tape controller.
Table 3 summarizes the maximum number of 3592 tape drive attachments in
environments without a tape controller.
Note: The 3592 E07 drive is not supported in 3494 or TS3400 tape libraries.
Table 3. Maximum 3592 tape drive attachments in environments without a tape controller
Environment
Number of 3592 drives
2.0 meter rack (IBM Model 7014-T42)
Up to 16
1.6 meter rack (IBM Model 7014-S00)
Up to 12
Up to 12
3494 Model L22
Up to 4
3494 Model D22
Up to 12
Table 3. Maximum 3592 tape drive attachments in environments without a tape

controller (continued)
TS3400 Tape Library
Up to 2
3584 Model L22/L23
See note 1
3584 Model D22/D23
See note 2
Note:
1. The number will vary depending on the number of I/O slots, the number of storage
slots, and the type of "Capacity On Demand" feature installed. The absolute maximum
number is 12.
2. The number will vary depending on the number of storage slots installed. The absolute
maximum number is 12.
Table 4 summarizes the maximum number of 3592 tape drive attachments in

environments with a tape controller.
Note: The 3592 E07 drive is not supported in 3494 or TS3400 tape libraries.
Table 4. Maximum 3592 tape drive attachments in environments with a tape controller
Environment
Number of drives
Up to 12
Note: A total of 16 drives can be attached
with multiple racks.
1.6 meter rack (IBM Model 7014-S00)
Up to 8
Up to 8
3494 Model D24
Up to 8
3494 Model D22
Up to 12 (with external controller attach for

C06)
3494 Model L22
Up to 4 (with adjacent frame support)
TS3400 Tape Library
Up to 2 (with external controller attach for

C06)
TS3500 Tape Library (3584) Model L22/L23
See note 1
TS3500 Tape Library (3584) Model D22/D23
See note 2
Note:
|
|
|
|
|
1. The number will vary depending on the number of I/O slots, the number of storage
slots, and the type of "Capacity On Demand" feature installed. The absolute maximum
number is 12.
2. The number will vary depending on the number of storage slots installed. The absolute
maximum number is 12.
Characteristics
This topic describes the characteristics of the 3592 tape drives.
Table 5 shows the 3592 tape drives and 3592 tape cartridge characteristics including
capacities.
Table 5. 3592 tape drives characteristics with 3592 tape cartridges
|
|
Characteristics
Display panel
3592 E07 Tape Drive

Specifications
3592 E06 Tape Drive

Specifications
3592 E05 Tape Drive

Specifications
3592 J1A Tape Drive

Specifications
8-character alphanumeric LED display

Table 5. 3592 tape drives characteristics with 3592 tape cartridges (continued)
|
|
Characteristics
3592 E07 Tape Drive

Specifications
3592 E06 Tape Drive

Specifications
Media
3592 E05 Tape Drive

Specifications
3592 J1A Tape Drive

Specifications
Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592
|
|
|
Host
attachments
Fibre Channel attach;

Fibre Channel attach; ESCON or FICON via 3592
ESCON or FICON via
C06 or J70 controllers
TS1120 (C06) Controller
Fibre Channel attach;

ESCON or FICON via
3590 A60 or 3592 C06
or J70 controllers
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Uncompressed
Data capacity
(3592 tape
cartridge )
4000 GB (3725.29 GiB1)

per Advanced Data
cartridge media JC and
Advanced WORM
cartridge media JY, 1600
GB (1490.12 GiB) per
Extended Data
cartridge media JB and
Extended WORM
cartridge media JX, 500
GB (465.66 GiB) per
Advanced Economy
cartridge media JK
1000 GB (931.32 GiB)

per Extended Data
Extended WORM
GB (596.04 GiB) per
Standard Data cartridge
media JA and Standard
WORM cartridge media
JW, 128 GB (119.21 GiB)
per Economy cartridge
media JJ and Economy
JR
700 GB (651.93 GiB) per

Extended Data
Extended WORM
GB (465.66 GiB) per
Standard Data cartridge
media JA and Standard
WORM cartridge JW,
100 GB (93.13 GiB) per
Economy Data cartridge
media JJ and Economy
JR
300 GB (279.39 GiB)

per Standard Data
cartridge media JA
and Standard WORM
cartridge media JW,
60 GB (55.88 GiB) per
Economy Data
cartridge media JJ and
Economy WORM
cartridge media JR
Device data
rate (native)
250 MB/s
160 MB/s
100 MB/s
40 MB/s
Data transfer
rate (maximum
instantaneous)
800 MB/s
Tape speed
read/write
maximum
400 MB/s
8.55 m/s
Approximate
usable tape
length
200 MB/s
6.21 m/s
4.74 m/s
570 m (standard), 785 m (Extended), 204 m (Economy)
Load/ready
13 seconds
Search/rewind
speed (middle
of tape)
12.4 m/s (488 in./s)
Full cartridge
rewind time,
(from physical
end of tape)
Maximum
cartridge
rewind time,
Data cartridge
Device data
rate (3:1
compression
sustained)
19 seconds
10 m/sec. (393 in./s)
8 m/sec. (315 in./s)
9 seconds
55 seconds
650 MB/s
350 MB/s
66 seconds
77 seconds
280 MB/s
120 MB/s
One gibibyte (GiB) = 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 mebibytes (MiB).
Operator controls
This topic provides an overview of the operator controls for the 3592 tape drives.
The 3592 tape drive is installed in a canister, which is a hot-swappable/quick

disconnect field-replaceable unit (FRU). Installation and replacements are to be
completed by qualified IBM Service Representatives only. The tape drive and
canister do not have their own power supply, but are powered on when the
canister is plugged into a drive cradle or frame installation. Once power is
supplied to the unit, the drive performs several self-tests.
The 3592 tape drive is typically managed through an automated library manager
or host, and its associated software. A display, buttons, and indicators are available
on the front of individual drives when manual operation is required.
Drive front panel components

This topic describes the front panel components.
The front panel of the drive has an 8 character Display panel, an Unload button, a
Reset button, and an LED power indicator. See Table 6 for a description of their
functions.
Table 6. 3592 Tape drive front panel component functions
Component
Functions
Display panel
An 8-character light-emitting diode (LED)

display panel, which displays drive status
codes and also a limited actions menu.
Mount messages, attention messages, drive
status messages, and FID (failure ID)
messages can also be displayed.
Unload button
The Unload button is used to manually

unload a tape from the drive. If you press
this button while a tape is loaded, the drive
completes any operation in progress,
rewinds, and unloads the tape cartridge.
Reset button
The Reset button generates a drive reset.

Current tape motion is terminated and
completely stopped before resetting. The
button is recessed to prevent accidental
activation. Use a pencil or small screwdriver
to press the reset button.
LED power indicator
A green LED power indicator shows

whether or not power is provided to the
drive. As part of the power-on process, the
LED automatically lights and the drive
performs a number of power-on self tests.
Drive compatibility
|
|
This topic describes tape cartridges and tape formats that are compatible with the
3592 tape drives.
|
|
|
|
|
The 3592 E06, EU6 and E07 tape drives can be used with the TS1120 (C06)
Controller when they are encryption enabled. The 3592 E07 is not supported by the
3592 J70 or 3590 A60 controllers. The 3494 and TS3400 tape libraries do not support
the 3592 E07 Tape Drive, however, the TS3500 Tape Library does support the 3592
E07 drive. The 3592 E05 and J1A tape drives can be used with the TS1120 (C06)
Controller or 3592 J70 Controller. The 3592 J1A Tape Drive can be used with the
3590 A60 Controller.
The 3592 tape cartridge has external dimensions (form factor) that allow it to be
used within existing storage cells of libraries containing 3590 tapes. However, the
3592 tape drives must be installed in frames separate from any 3590 drives. The
3592 tape drive cartridges are not compatible with 3590 tape drives cartridges, and,
likewise, 3590 tapes cannot be used in the 3592 drives. Other compatibility
considerations include:
v Supported formats: there are four formats with different recording densities that
yield different capacities per cartridge type:
Enterprise Format 1 (EFMT1) used by the 3592 J1A Tape Drive, and the 3592
E05 Tape Drive in both native and J1A emulation mode. This format records
512 tracks on 8 channels. The 3592 E06 tape drive reads data written in
EFMT1 format but does not write in EFMT1. The 3592 E07 does not read or
write in EFMT1.
Enterprise Format 2 (EFMT2), used by the 3592 E05 Tape Drive, and the 3592
E06 Tape Drive. This format records 896 tracks on 16 channels. The 3592 E07
can read but not write in EFMT2 (JB media only). When operating on
encrypted data at this density, the recording format is Enterprise Encrypted
Format 2 (EEFMT2).
Enterprise Format 3 (EFMT3), used by the 3592 E06 Tape Drive and the 3592
E07 Tape Drive. This format records 1152 tracks on 16 channels. When
operating on encrypted data at this density, the recording format is Enterprise
Encrypted Format 3 (EEFMT3).
Enterprise Format 4 (EFMT4), used by the 3592 E07 Tape Drive. This format
records 664 tracks on JB and JX cartridges and 2176 tracks on JC, JK, and JY
cartridges on 32 channels. When operating on encrypted data at this density,
the recording format is Enterprise Encrypted Format 4 (EEFMT4).
v Supported cartridge types:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 3592 E07 Tape Drive uses the Advanced Data (type JC) and Advanced
WORM (write-once, read-many) (type JY) cartridges. Both the type JC and JY
cartridges have a maximum native capacity of 4000 GB (3725.29 GiB).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 3592 tape drive models E07, E06, and E05 use 3592 Extended Data (type
JB) and Extended WORM (type JX) with a maximum capacity of 1600 GB
(1490.12 GiB) using EFMT4 format, 1000 GB (931.3 GiB) using EFMT3 format,
and 700 GB (651.93 GiB) using EFMT2 format. The 3592 E07 Tape Drive can
only read format EFMT2.
The 3592 tape drive models E06, E05, and JIA use 3592 Standard Data (type
JA) and Standard WORM (type JW) cartridges with a maximum native
capacity of 640 GB (596.04 GiB) using EFMT3 format, 500 GB (465.66 GiB)
using EFMT2 format, and 300 GB (279.39 GiB) using EFMT1 format. The 3592
E07 Tape Drive does not read or write cartridge types JA and JW.
|
|
The 3592 tape drive models E06, E05, and JIA use 3592 Economy Data (type
JJ) and Economy WORM (type JR) cartridges with a maximum native capacity
of 128 GB (119.21 GiB) using EFMT3 format, 100 GB (93.13 GiB) using EFMT2
format, and 60 GB (55.88 GiB) using EFMT1 format. The 3592 E07 Tape Drive
does not read or write cartridge types JJ and JR.
The 3592 E07 Tape Drive uses the 3592 Advanced Economy (type JK)
cartridge with a maximum native capacity of 500 GB (465.66 GiB) using
EFMT4 format.
|
|
|
|
|
For more information on tape cartridges see Table 33 on page 100.

v The 3592 J1A Tape Drive
Reads and writes EFMT1 format only.
v The 3592 E05 Tape Drive
Reads and writes EFMT1 and EFMT2 formats in native mode.

Reads and writes EFMT1 format in J1A emulation mode.
Reads and writes EFMT2 and EFMT3 formats.
Reads EFMT1 format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Operates only in native mode.

Reads and writes EFMT3 and EFMT4 formats (EFMT3 can only be written
using JB and JX media and EFMT4 format can only be written using JB, JX,
JC, JY and JK media).
Reads in EFMT2 format (JB and JX media only)
Operates only in native mode.
|
v
See Tape drive emulation mode support for more information.

3592 tape drives cannot read cartridges written by 3590 or 3490 tape drives.
Cartridges written by the 3592 tape drive cannot be read by the 3590 or 3490
drives. Even though the cartridges are similar in size, they contain different
media and media format, and are not interchangeable.
3592 drives manufactured before the general availability of WORM capability
must have a microcode update to be able to read and write WORM cartridges.
Drives without the updated microcode reject the WORM cartridges.
3592 tape drives need a code update to be able to recognize the latest encrypted
format written on a cartridge. Drives without the update the media is ejected by
the library.
Although multiple systems may be attached to a 3592 tape drive, the systems
cannot use the drive simultaneously. The 3592 tape drive can only be varied
online to one system at a time.
3592 tape drives are not supported for attachment to 3590 Model A50 or A00
controllers.
v The Fibre Channel switch (4 Gb or 2 Gb) or 2109 switch attached to 3590 or 3592
tape drives cannot be shared with open systems servers if attached to a
controller.
v 3592 tape drives and different models of 3590 tape drives cannot be intermixed
on the 3592 Model J70 or 3590 Model A60 Controller. The TS1120 (C06)
Controller does not support 3590 tape drives.
For more information on the 3590 A60 Controller, refer to IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0329.
Tape drive emulation mode support

This topic provides reference information on the tape drive emulation mode.
|
The native 3592 E05 Tape Drive can reformat an EFMT1, EFMT3, or EFMT4 tape to
EFMT2 and reformat an EFMT2 or EFMT3 tape to an EFMT1 when writing from
beginning of tape (BOT). The 3592 J1A Tape Drive (or the E05 emulating the J1A)
can reformat an EFMT2 or EFMT3 tape to an EFMT1. The 3592 tape drive
automatically reformats media when the tape is written while positioned at BOT,
such as when writing the tape label, if the tape does not match the drive format. In
such a case, the tape is reformatted to match the 3592 tape drive. The manual
reformat process varies by operating system but usually includes running a
program to issue the Mode Select command.
The 3592 E06 Tape Drive does not support emulation but can read tapes in EFMT1,
EFMT2, and EFMT3 format, and write in EFMT2 and EFMT3 format. The 3592 E06
Tape Drive can reformat any EFMT1, EFMT2, EFMT3, and EFMT4 tape to EFMT3
format when writing from BOT.
The 3592 E07 Tape Drive does not support emulation but can read in EFMT2,
EFMT3, and EFMT4 format, and write in EFMT3 and EFMT4 format with
compatible IBM 3592 tape cartridges. The 3592 E07 Tape Drive can reformat any
compatible EFMT2, EFMT3, or EFMT4 tape to EFMT3 or EFMT4 format when
writing from BOT.
|
|
|
|
|
Table 7. 3592 Drive Emulation
Drive Mode
Setting
Formats read
Format used
when writing
and cartridge is
at BOT
Format used
when writing
and cartridge is
not at BOT
Model type
reported to host
in response to
Inquiry
command
J1A
EFMT1
EFMT1
EFMT1
J1A
Native E05
EFMT1 and
EFMT2
EFMT1 and
EFMT2
EFMT1 and
EFMT2
E05
E05 emulating
J1A
EFMT1
EFMT1
EFMT1
J1A
E06/EU6
EFMT1, EFMT2,
and EFMT3
EFMT2 and
EFMT3
EFMT2 and
EFMT3
E06
E07
EFMT2, EFMT3
and EFMT4
EFMT3 and
EFMT4
EFMT3 and
EFMT4
E07
There are two methods of setting the emulation mode for a 3592 E05 Tape Drive,
Static Emulation and Dynamic Emulation.
Static Emulation
The TS1120 (3592 E05 Tape Drive) now supports a new function called Static
Emulation Mode. This function, available for both open systems and
controller-attached 3592 Model E05 drives, allows 3592 Model E05 drives to be set
in a mode to emulate the interface and format behaviors of the previous generation
3592 Model J1A drives. When Static Emulation mode is activated, the 3592 Model
E05 drive reports that it is a 3592 Model J1A drive in inquiry data and can only
write and read 3592 data and WORM cartridges in the older Model J1A data
format (EFMT1) rather then the Model E05 data format (EFMT2). In this mode,
cartridges written by the 3592 E05 drives are fully interchange compatible with
older 3592 Model J1A drives with no format selection controls required. This mode
may be useful for customers who may wish to purchase the 3592 Model E05 drives
but cannot upgrade software levels or other aspects of their system to support the
new drives or data format.
Static Emulation mode, once activated on a drive, is a non-volatile feature and
remains in effect until deactivated regardless of power cycles, reset cycles, or drive
replacement. Emulation mode may be controlled in two ways:
v In TS3500 (or 3584) open system attached drives, the 3584 library now has
support for customer capability to activate and deactivate this feature using the
web interface. This requires that both drives and libraries have the required
minimum microcode levels or greater. Consult the IBM System Storage TS3500
10
Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0559, to determine the

required microcode levels and control procedures.
v For all E05 drives in other system configurations, static emulation mode is
activated and deactivated by the IBM Service Support Representative (SSR)
using the drive service panel. Activation may be performed during the
installation and setup of the drives by the SSR if requested by the customer.
Post-install activation or deactivation is fulfilled by ordering 3592 Model E05
Feature Code 0500 which causes the SSR to verify and install the required
microcode levels for the drive, perform the requested activation or deactivation
procedure, and update the customer publications as necessary.
Please note that Static Emulation mode is not designed to be used in drives
attached to IBM Virtual Tape systems (VTS) or TS7700 Virtualization Engine, which
use a different, automatic means to ensure the 3592 E05 drives in a virtual
subsystem process cartridges in the J1A compatible format. No activation or
deactivation process is necessary to install 3592 Model E05 drives in VTS
subsystems. Also note that Static Emulation mode may not be activated or
deactivated or otherwise controlled through the IBM device drivers and such
control should not be attempted by using a host application.
Static Emulation mode is implemented in new drive microcode levels (D3I1_6E1 or
greater) shipped standard on all 3592 Model E05 drives delivered after Jan, 2006.
3592 Model E05 drives shipped prior to this date or operating with older levels of
code must have the drive microcode updated to the latest operating levels for this
feature to be available. This microcode upgrade, if required, may be performed by
the SSR with fulfillment of 3592 Model E05 Feature Code 0500 in conjunction with
feature activation.
Dynamic Emulation
When attached to VTS release 2.32.745.xx or later, TS7700 Virtualization Engine, or
J70 or C06 heterogeneous frames containing J1A drives, Model E05 drives
automatically operate in J1A emulation mode in these subsystems, even when set
to operate as native E05 drives. This mode is set by the special ATAPE driver
component resident in these subsystems and is automatic. In this mode, the E05
drives can read and write only in Enterprise Format 1 (EFMT1) at the J1A
performance and capacity ratings. When removed from these subsystems, the
drives automatically revert to native E05 operation and no action is necessary to
restore normal mode.
Tape encryption overview

This topic provides an introduction to tape encryption using the 3592 tape drives.
Data is one of the most highly valued resources in a competitive business
environment. Protecting that data, controlling access to it, and verifying its
authenticity while maintaining its availability are priorities in our
security-conscious world. Data encryption is a tool that answers many of these
needs.
|
|
The IBM System Storage TS1120 and later tape drives are capable of encrypting
data as it is written to any compatible IBM 3592 tape cartridge including
write-once, read-many (WORM) cartridges. This capability adds a strong measure
of security to stored data without the processing overhead and performance
degradation associated with encryption performed on the server or the expense of
a dedicated appliance.
11
There are three major elements in the tape drive encryption solution:
The encryption-enabled tape drive
All TS1140 and TS1130 tape drives are encryption-capable. All TS1120 tape drives
with feature code 5592 or 9592 are encryption-capable. This means that they are
functionally capable of performing hardware encryption, but this capability has
not yet been activated. In order to perform hardware encryption, the tape
drives must be encryption-enabled. In an IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape
Library, TS1120 and later tape drives can be encryption-enabled through the
IBM System Storage Tape Library Specialist web interface.
|
|
Note: When a TS1120 and later tape drive is attached to a tape controller, the
tape drive must be encryption-enabled for system-managed encryption. This
applies even when encryption is not being used by the host. The TS1120 and
TS1130 tape drives can attach to a 3592 J70 or C06 controller. The TS1140 can
only attach to the C06 controller.
When TS1120 and later tape drives are attached to a controller, this process
consists of having an IBM System Services Representative (SSR) set up the
drive as encryption-enabled. Only encryption-enabled TS1120 and later tape
drives can be used to read and write encrypted 3592 tape cartridges.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Encryption key management

Encryption involves the use of several kinds of keys, in successive layers. How
these keys are generated, maintained, controlled, and transmitted depends
upon the operating environment where the encrypting tape drive is installed.
Some applications, such as Tivoli Storage Manager, are capable of performing
key management. For environments without such applications or those where
application independent encryption is desired, IBM offers an encryption key
server (such as the IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java
platform, the Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager, or the IBM Security Key Lifecycle
Manager for z/OS). Managing encryption describes key management in
more detail.
|
|
Encryption policy
This is the method used to implement encryption. It includes the rules that
govern which volumes are encrypted and the mechanism for key selection.
How and where these rules are set up depends on the operating environment.
See Managing encryption for more information.
Note: In the tape storage environment, the encryption function on tape drives
(desktop, stand-alone and within libraries) is configured and managed by the
customer and not the SSR. In some instances an SSR is required to enable
encryption at a hardware level when service access or service password controlled
access is required. Customer setup support is by Field Technical Sales Specialist
(FTSS), customer documentation, and software support for encryption software
problems. Customer how to support is also provided with customers who have a
support line contract.
Managing encryption
|
This topic introduces the encryption key server (EKS) and the three methods for
managing encryption.
An encryption key server is a software program that assists IBM encryption-enabled

tape drives in generating, protecting, storing, and maintaining encryption keys that
are used to encrypt information being written to, and decrypt information being
read from, tape media (tape and cartridge formats). IBM currently supports the
following encryption key servers: IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the
Java platform, Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager, and IBM Security Key Lifecycle
|
|
|
12
|
|
|
Manager for z/OS. Throughout the remainder of this publication, the three
encryption key servers are referred to collectively as the "encryption key server"
(EKS) unless a specific software program is being discussed. The EKS operates on
z/OS, i5/OS, AIX, Linux, HP-UX, Sun Solaris, and Windows, and is designed to
be a shared resource deployed in several locations within an Enterprise. It is
capable of serving numerous IBM encrypting tape drives, regardless of where
those drives reside (for example, in tape library subsystems, connected to
mainframe systems through various types of channel connections, or installed in
other computing systems.)
The EKS uses a keystore to hold the certificates and keys (or pointers to the
certificates and keys) required for all encryption tasks. Refer to the appropriate
EKS documentation for detailed information about the EKS and the keystores it
supports.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The EKS acts as a daemon process awaiting key generation or key retrieval
requests sent to it through a TCP/IP communication path between the EKS and
the tape library, tape controller, tape subsystem, device driver, or tape drive. When
a TS1120 or later tape drive writes encrypted data, it first requests an encryption
key. Upon receipt of the request, the EKS generates an Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) key and serves it to the tape drives in two protected forms:
v Encrypted or wrapped, using Rivest-Shamir-Adleman (RSA) key pairs. The tape
drive writes this copy of the key to the cartridge memory and three additional
places on the tape media in the cartridge for redundancy.
v Separately wrapped for secure transfer to the tape drive where it is unwrapped
upon arrival and the key inside is used to encrypt the data being written to
tape.
|
|
When an encrypted tape cartridge is read by a TS1120 or later tape drive, the
protected AES key on the tape is sent to the EKS where the wrapped AES key is
unwrapped. The AES key is then wrapped with a different key for secure transfer
back to the tape drive, where it is unwrapped and used to decrypt the data stored
on the tape. The EKS also allows protected AES keys to be rewrapped, or rekeyed,
using different RSA keys from the original ones used when the tape was written.
Rekeying is useful when an unexpected need arises to export volumes to business
partners whose public keys were not included; it eliminates the need to rewrite the
entire tape and enables a tape cartridge's data key to be re-encrypted with a
business partner's public key.
There are three methods of encryption management to choose from. These methods
differ in where the encryption policy engine resides and where key management is
performed for your encryption solution, and how the EKS is connected to the
drive. Your operating environment determines which is the best for you. Key
management and the encryption policy engine may be located in any one of the
following three environmental layers.
13
Application
Policy
or
System
Data Path
Policy
Data Path
or
Policy
Library Drive Interface
a14m0177
Library
Figure 2. Three possible locations for encryption policy engine and key management.
Application Layer
Initiates data transfer for tape storage, for example TSM.
System Layer
Everything between the application and the tape drives, for example the
operating system, z/OS DFSMS, device drivers, and FICON/ESCON
controllers.
Library Layer
The enclosure for tape storage, such as the IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape
Library. A modern tape library contains an internal interface to each tape drive
within it.
Application-managed tape encryption:
This topic describes application-managed tape encryption.
This method is best where operating environments run an application already
capable of generating and managing encryption policies and keys, such as Tivoli
Storage Manager. Policies specifying when encryption is to be used are defined
through the application interface. The policies and keys pass through the data path
between the application layer and the encrypting tape drives. Encryption is the
result of interaction between the application and the encryption-enabled tape drive,
and does not require any changes to the system and library layers. Because the
application manages the encryption keys, data volumes written and encrypted
using the application-managed encryption method can only be read by the same
software application that wrote them.
An encryption key server is not required by, or used by, application-managed tape
encryption.
14
|
|
Application-managed tape encryption on IBM TS1120 and later tape drives can use
either of two encryption command sets:
v The IBM encryption command set developed for the encryption key server
v The T10 command set defined by the InterNational Committee for Information
Technology Standards (INCITS)
Application-managed tape encryption using the TS1120 and TS1130 tape drives is
supported in the following IBM libraries:
v IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library
v IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library
|
|
|
Application-managed tape encryption using the TS1140 tape drive is supported in

the following IBM library:
For more information about setting up application-managed encryption, see your
Tivoli Storage Manager documentation or visit http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/tivihelp/v1r1/index.jsp for more information.
System-managed tape encryption:
This topic describes system-managed tape encryption.
This method is best for encryption on TS1120 and later tape drives in Open
Systems and System z operating environments where the applications that write or
read from tape are not capable of performing the key management required for
application-managed encryption.
Open Systems
Encryption policies specifying when to use encryption are set up in the IBM tape
device driver. System-managed tape encryption and library-managed tape
encryption interoperate with one another. In other words, a tape encrypted using
system-managed encryption may be decrypted using library-managed encryption,
and vice versa, provided they both have access to the same keys and certificates.
Otherwise, this may not be feasible.
For details on setting up system-managed encryption on tape drives in an AIX,
Linux, Windows, or Solaris environment, see the IBM Tape Device Drivers
Installation and User's Guide, and the Planning and Operator Guide for your tape
library.
System z
Encryption policies specifying when to use encryption are set up in z/OS DFSMS
(Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem) or implicitly through each instance
of IBM device driver. Additional software products such as IBM Integrated
Cryptographic Service Facility (ICSF) and IBM Resource Access Control Facility
(RACF) may also be used. Key generation and management is performed by the
encryption key server running on the host or externally on another host. Policy
controls and keys pass through the data path between the system layer and the
encrypting tape drives. Encryption is transparent to the applications.
15
For TS1120 and later tape drives connected to an IBM Virtualization Engine
TS7700, encryption key labels are assigned on a per-storage pool basis using the
TS7700 Management Interface. DFSMS storage constructs are used by z/OS to
control the use of storage pools for logical volumes, resulting in an indirect form of
encryption policy management. For more information, see the white paper, IBM
Virtualization Engine TS7700 Series Encryption Overview, available at
http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?&uid=ssg1S4000504.
|
|
With system-managed encryption, System z hosts can rekey an encrypted tape on

the TS1120 and later tape drives. Refer to the appropriate operating system
documentation for the mechanism that is used to initiate a rekey operation.
For details on setting up system-managed encryption on TS1120 and later tape

drives in a System z platform environment, see z/OS DFSMS Software Support for
IBM System Storage TS1140, TS1130, and TS1120 Tape Drives (3592), SC26-7514.
Encryption key paths:

This topic describes encryption key paths.
In system-managed encryption on System z platforms, multiple key paths are
supported by the tape controller.
In-band key flow
In-band key flow, shown in Figure 3 on page 17, occurs between the encryption
key server and the tape drive through a FICON proxy (only available in z/OS) on
the FICON/ESCON interface. The FICON proxy, supports failover to the
secondary key path on failure of first-specified encryption key server path
addresses. Impact on controller service requirements is minimal.
|
|
|
The controller:
v Reports drive status in SMIT displays
v Passes encryption-related errors from the drive to the host
v Reports to the host encryption failure unit checks
v Must be reconfigured whenever new encryption drives are introduced for
attachment or when an encryption-capable drive is enabled for encryption.
16
|
Z server
Encryption
Key Server
3494
3953
LM
Library Manager
Interface
Key
Exchange
Interface
FICON
Proxy
Encryption
Control
|
|
|
FICON
ESCON
Interface
Subsystem
Proxy
Drive
Interface
3592
Drive
3592
C06/J70
c0600102
Host
Figure 3. In-band encryption key flow
Out-of-band key flow
|
|
|
Out-of-band key flow, shown in Figure 4 on page 18, occurs between the
encryption key server and the tape drive through a subsystem proxy, located in the
3592 controller or TS7700 Virtualization Engine, on the encryption key server
interface. Impact on service requirements may be greater than for in-band key flow
due to the introduction of two routers on the encryption key server interface, to
and from the controller.
The controller and TS7700:
v Supports failover to the secondary key path on failure of first-specified
encryption key server path addresses
v Reports drive status in SMIT displays
v Passes encryption-related errors from the drive to the host
v Reports to the host encryption failure unit checks
v Must be reconfigured whenever new encryption drives are introduced for
attachment or when an encryption-capable drive is enabled for encryption.
As many as two encryption key server IP/domain addresses (and as many as two
ports) may be entered for each controller, as well as two Domain Name Server IP
addresses.
17
Encryption Key Server Interface

Encryption
Key Server
Subsystem
Proxy
3494
3953
LM
E
Se ncr
rv ypt
er io
In n K
te e
rfa y
ce
TS7700
Virtualization
Engine
Drive
Interface
Library Manager
Interface
3592
Drive
Z server
Host
FICON
Proxy
Subsystem
Proxy
3592 C06/J70
Controller
Drive
Interface
3592
Drive
c0600103
Encryption
Control
FICON
ESCON
Interface
|
|
|
Figure 4. Out-of-band encryption key flow
Library-managed tape encryption:

This topic describes library-managed tape encryption.
This method is best for tape drives in an open-attached IBM System Storage tape
library. TS1120 and TS1130 tape drives can attach to an IBM System Storage
TS3400, TS3500, or IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library. TS1140 tape drives can
only attach to a TS3500 Tape Library. For TS3500 Tape Library attachment, barcode
encryption policies can be used to specify when to use encryption, and are set up
through the IBM System Storage Tape Library Specialist Web interface. In such
cases, policies are based on cartridge volume serial numbers.
|
|
Library-managed encryption also allows other options, such as encryption of all

volumes in a library, independent of bar codes. Key generation and management is
performed by the encryption key server. Policy control and keys pass through the
library-to-drive interface, therefore encryption is transparent to the applications.
Library-managed encryption, when used with certain applications such as

Symantec Netbackup or the EMC Legato NetWorker, includes support for an
internal label option. When the internal label option is configured, the TS1120 and
later tape drives automatically derive the encryption policy and key information
from the metadata written on the tape volume by the application. Refer to your
Tape Library Operator's Guide for more information.
|
|
Note: If you use library-managed encryption and IBM tape and changer drivers
running on Open Systems platforms (AIX, HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows),
information for bulk rekey is available in the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation
and User's Guide, GC27-2130, available at http://www-01.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?rs=577&uid=ssg1S7002972.
18
System-managed tape encryption and library-managed tape encryption

interoperate with one another. In other words, a tape encrypted using
system-managed encryption may be decrypted using library-managed encryption,
and the other way around, provided they both have access to the same keys and
certificates. Otherwise, this may not be feasible.
About encryption keys:
This topic describes the encryption keys used to encrypt data.
An encryption key is typically a random string of bits generated specifically to
scramble and unscramble data. Encryption keys are created using algorithms
designed to ensure that each key is unique and unpredictable. The longer the key
constructed this way, the harder it is to break the encryption code. Both the IBM
and T10 methods of encryption use 256-bit AES algorithm keys to encrypt data.
256-bit AES is the encryption standard currently recognized and recommended by
the U.S. government, which allows three different key lengths. 256-bit keys are the
longest allowed by AES.
|
Two types of encryption algorithms may be used by the encryption key server:
symmetric algorithms and asymmetric algorithms. Symmetric, or secret key
encryption, uses a single key for both encryption and decryption. Symmetric key
encryption is generally used for encrypting large amounts of data in an efficient
manner. 256-bit AES keys are symmetric keys. Asymmetric, or public/private
encryption, uses a pair of keys. Data encrypted using one key can only be
decrypted using the other key in the public/private key pair. When an asymmetric
key pair is generated, the public key is typically used to encrypt, and the private
key is typically used to decrypt.
The encryption key server uses both symmetric and asymmetric keys; symmetric
encryption for high-speed encryption of user or host data, and asymmetric
encryption (which is necessarily slower) for protecting the symmetric key.
Encryption keys may be generated by the encryption key server, by applications

such as Tivoli Storage Manager, or by a utility such as keytool. The responsibility
for generating AES keys and the manner in which they are transferred to the tape
drive depends on the tape drive type and the method of encryption management.
However, it may be helpful to understand the difference between how the
encryption key server uses encryption keys and how other applications use them.
How the encryption key server processes encryption keys
On TS1120 and later tape drives
|
|
|
|
In system-managed and library-managed tape encryption, unencrypted data (clear

text) is sent to the tape drive and converted to ciphertext using a symmetric 256-bit
AES Data Key (DK) generated by the encryption key server. The cyphertext is then
written to tape. The encryption key server uses a single, unique data key for each
3592 tape cartridge. This data key is also encrypted, or wrapped, by the encryption
key server using the public key from an asymmetric Key Encrypting Key (KEK)
pair. This process creates an Externally Encrypted Data Key (EEDK). The EEDK is
written to the cartridge memory and to three additional places on the tape media
in the cartridge. The tape cartridge now holds both the encrypted data and the
means to decrypt it for anyone holding the private part of the KEK pair. Figure 5
on page 20 illustrates this process.
19
The data key is also wrapped a second time, possibly using the public key of
another party, to create an additional EEDK. Both EEDKs can be stored on the tape
cartridge. In this way, the tape cartridge can be shipped to a business partner
holding the corresponding private key that would allow the data key to be
unwrapped and the tape decrypted by the business partner.
Clear
Data
Esym{data,DK}
Cipher
Text
Encrypted
Tape
DK
EEDK
KEK
a14m0176
Easy{DK,KEK}
Figure 5. Encryption using both symmetric and asymmetric encryption keys
Encryption key processing by other applications (an encryption key server not
used)
In application-managed tape encryption, unencrypted data (clear text) is sent to the

tape drive and converted to ciphertext using a symmetric Data Key (DK) provided
by the application, and is then written to tape. The data key is not stored
anywhere on the tape cartridge. Once the encrypted volume is written, the data
key must be in a location available to the application, a server database, for
example, in order for the volume to be read.
TS1120 and later tape drives can use applications such as Tivoli Storage Manager
for application-managed encryption. Tivoli Storage Manager uses a single, unique
data key for each tape cartridge.
Alternatively, the tape drives can be used by applications that use the T10
command set to perform encryption. The T10 command set uses symmetric 256-bit
AES keys provided by the application. T10 can use multiple, unique data keys per
tape cartridge, and even write encrypted data and clear data to the same tape
cartridge. When the application encrypts a tape cartridge, it selects or generates a
data key using a method determined by the application and sends it to the tape
drive. The key is not wrapped with an asymmetric public key and it is not stored
on the tape cartridge. Once the encrypted data is written to tape, the data key
must be in a location available to the application in order for the data to be read.
The process for application-managed tape encryption is shown in Figure 6 on page
21.
20
Clear
Data
Encrypted
Tape
Cipher
Text
a14m0236
Esym{data,DK}
DK
Figure 6. Encryption using only symmetric encryption keys
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and 3592 J70 Controller

This topic provides information about the controllers.
The IBM System Storage TS1120 Tape Controller and its predecessor, the IBM
TotalStorage 3592 Tape Controller Model J70, provide new levels of performance
and attachment capabilities for System z customers. These controllers offer the
following enhancements compared to the 3590 Model A60 controller:
v Up to four 4 Gb/s (TS1120 Controller only) or 2 Gb/s (3592 J70 Controller only)
FICON attachments, twice the number that the 3590 Model A60 controller offers
v Up to eight ESCON attachments
v Support for an intermix of ESCON and FICON attachments
v Up to sixteen attached 3592 tape drives or twelve 3590 models B, E, and H tape
drives (3592 J70 Controller only) for some configurations (for more information
on 3590 tape drives, refer to IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590
Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0329.)
v Two 4 Gb/s or 2 Gb/s (3592 J70 Controller only) Fibre Channel adapters for
attaching 3592 tape drives
v Support for 3592 drive hot swap capabilities
v Support for capacity scaling/segmentation with the 3592 tape drive
v Support for WORM capabilities with the 3592 tape drives
v Support for high-speed CCW for increased performance of certain applications,
such as Hierarchical Storage Management (HSM) audit
v Support for all IBM 3592 Tape Cartridge types including WORM cartridges
v Support for IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library (withdrawn) (TS1120
Controller only)
Throughout the remainder of this publication, the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller
and the 3592 J70 Controller are referred to collectively as the 3592 controller unless
a specific model is being discussed.
Fibre Channel switches for the C06 and J70 controllers

This topic provides information about the Fibre Channel switches.
The 3592 controllers can attach to ESCON and FICON channels on selected System
z servers or through a FICON/FICON switch with the appropriate levels of system
software. The 3592 controllers can be directly attached to host systems that are
within 10 k (6.2 mi) or attached with a FICON/FICON switch, with appropriate
repeaters, within 100 k (62 mi). FICON attachment is available when the 3592
21
Model E05, E06, E07, and J1A tape drives or 3590 Model B, E, and H tape drives
(3592 J70 Controller only) are attached to the 3592 controllers.
A 3592-supported Fibre Channel switch is required to attach 3590 Model B, E, and

H Fibre Channel tape drives or more than four 3592 tape drives to a 3592
controller.
For the most recent list of C06-supported Fibre Channel switches, please visit
http://www.ibm.com/support/techdocs/atsmastr.nsf/WebIndex/FQ115356.
For the most recent list of J70-supported Fibre Channel switches, please visit
Controls and indicators

The 3592 Controllers require no operator interaction after setup by authorized IBM
personnel. On the controller, there is a Power On button with a Power On
indicator, power supply indicators, a Reset button, and a liquid crystal display
(LCD). See Table 8 for a description of their functions.
Table 8. Descriptions of the 3592 Models C06 and J70 controls and indicators
Control/Display
Description
Power On button
The Power On button turns the system

power on and off to the 3592 controller.
Power On indicator
Blinking - Indicates that the system is in

Standby mode and that the 3592 controller is
connected to a power source. Solid Indicates that the system is in On mode and
that the 33592 controller is connected to a
power source when the 'Power On' button
has been pressed to turn system power on.
Power supply indicators
There are two power supply indicators, one

for each power supply, which are lit when
that power supply drawer is operational.
Reset button
The Reset button is used by the IBM service

representative to reset and initialize the 3592
controller.
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
This LCD displays the progress of the

controller's self tests and diagnostic
indicators. It is also used to display codes
and diagnostic messages.
Compatibility
v You cannot intermix SCSI and Fibre Channel attached tape drives on a single
3592 tape controller.
v 3592 Model E05 and J1A tape drives can be attached to the same controller when
E05 drives are emulating J1A drives.2
v 3592 tape drives cannot be attached to the same 3592 Model J70 controller with
3590 tape drives. 3590 B, E, or H models cannot be intermixed on the same 3592
Model J70 controller. 3590 tape drives are not supported by the TS1120 (C06)
Controller.
2. To take advantage of the performance improvements of the model E05 drive, only native E05 drives must be attached to the
TS1120 (C06) Controller or 3592 J70 Controller.
22
v The 4 Gb/s or 2 Gb/s Fibre Channel Switch must be used exclusively by the
TS1120 (C06) Controller.
v The 4 Gb/s or 2 Gb/s Fibre Channel Switch or 2109 Model F16 or S16 switch
must be used exclusively by the 3592 J70 Controller.
v You cannot intermix 3592 and 3590 tape drives on a single Fibre Channel switch
with either J70 or C06 controller.
v 3590 tape drives are not supported by the C06 controller.
v The 2109 switch (withdrawn) is not supported by the C06 controller.
v External fabric is supported as of October 23, 2004 (see Chapter 2, Standard
Features, on page 31).
Call Home
The TS1120 (C06) Controller and 3592 J70 Controller support the Call Home
function. The Call Home function opens a service alert if a problem occurs with
the controller. A service representative can then respond to fix the problem.
Feature codes FC 2710, FC 2711, or FC 2712 (these three feature codes are
withdrawn from Marketing) provide base remote support for Model J70 controller
service alerts. In addition to error alerts, you can enhance Call Home functionality
with features FC 2714, FC 2715, FC 2719, and FC 2732. Enhanced Call Home
functionality sends wellness monitoring data through the IBM System Storage
TS3000 System Console (TSSC). Your service representative can activate enhanced
Call Home Functionality during the installation of the controller. Service menus
provide means to deactivate the Remote Support. The 3953-F05 frame with FC 2721
provides the same service as 3592 FC 2732. One or the other is required.
The following 3592 tape controller environments support Call Home:
v TS1120 (C06) Controller or 3592 J70 Controller in stand-alone frames/racks
v TS1120 (C06) Controller or 3592 J70 Controller in StorageTek Automated
Cartridge System (ACS) environments
v
v
v
v
TS1120 (C06) Controller or 3592 J70 Controller in the 3494 Tape Library
TS1120 (C06) Controller or 3592 J70 Controller in the 3953 F05 Tape Frame
TS1120 (C06) Controller in the 3952 Tape Frame
The TS3400 Tape Library attached to a TS1120 Tape Controller is also supported
by Call Home through an ethernet connection to the TSSC.
3952 Tape Frame installation

The TS1120 (C06) Controller can be installed in the IBM System Storage 3952 Tape
Frame Model F05 (3952 Tape Frame). There are two versions of the 3952 Tape
Frame: the 3494 attachment frame and the silo attachment frame. A maximum of
three TS1120 (C06) controllers or two 3592 J70 controllers can be installed in either
version of the 3952 Tape Frame. See 3952 F05 Tape Frame specifications on page
125.
Table 9. TS1120 (C06) controllers in 3952 F05 frames
Frame
Attachments
3952 Model F05 (3494 attachment)
One to three TS1120 (C06) controllers
3952 Model F05 (silo attachment)
One to three TS1120 (C06) controllers
23
Connecting C06 controllers in a 3952-F05 frame to tape drives in

a D22 or D24 frame of a 3494 Tape Library
Every TS1120 (C06) Controller in a 3952-F05 frame is independent of the other tape
controllers in the frame. This means that all C06 tape controllers installed in a
3952-F05 frame to be attached to a 3494 do not have to attach to the same 3494
library. Each C06 can be attached to a separate 3494 tape library, or some can be
attached to the same 3494 tape library. Each 3494 D22 or D24 frame that is
attaching to an outboard C06 tape controller orders an attachment to an outbound
controller. This provides the cabling needed for each C06 tape controller to attach
to a 3952-F05 or multiple 3952-F05 frames.
3953 Frame installation

The TS1120 (C06) Controller and 3592 J70 Controller can be installed in the 3953
F05 frame. There are two versions of this frame: the base frame and the expansion
frame. One 3592 C06 or J70 controller can be installed in the base frame; up to
three 3592 C06 and J70 controllers can be installed and intermixed in the expansion
frame. See the IBM 3953 Tape System Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0557,
for a complete discussion of the 3592 controller in the 3953 F05 frame. See Table 10
for a summary of the number of tape controllers that can be installed in the 3953
F05 frame.
Table 10. TS1120 (C06) Controller and 3592 J70 Controller in 3953 F05 frames
Frame
Attachments
3953 Model F05 (base)
One C06 or J70 controller
3953 Model F05 (expansion)
Up to three C06 or J70 controllers
TS3400 Tape Library installation

This product is no longer available for ordering and is not supported by the
TS1140 Tape Drive (3592 Model E07).
|
|
One or two 3592 Model E05, E06, or EU6 tape drives can be installed in the IBM
System Storage TS3400 Tape Library (3577 Model L5U). 3592 J1A tape drives are
not supported in the TS3400 Tape Library. The TS3400 contains two magazines,
each capable of holding nine tape cartridges. The lower magazine can be
configured to use the first three cartridge slots as an I/O station. The TS3400
Library can be rack mounted or used in a stand-alone (table top) environment.
Rack mounted TS3400 libraries may be attached to a rack mounted TS1120 (Model
C06) Controller. See IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library Planning and Operator
Guide for more information.
In a System z environment, 3592 drives in the TS3400 library report to the host as
stand-alone drives with cartridge loaders rather than appear as a library to the
host. The control unit supports the 3592 drives and simulated cartridge loaders in
system mode and in automatic mode. Since support for the TS3400 is transparent
to System z operating platforms, which mode is supported depends on the
operating system support available today.
Table 11. TS1120 and TS1130 tape drives in TS3400 Tape Library
24
Frame
Attachments
TS3400 (3577 Model L5U)
Up to two 3592 E05, E06, or EU6 tape drives
TS3500 Tape Library installation

This topic describes the number of tape drives allowed in a Model D22, D23, L22,
and L23 tape frame.
All model 3592 tape drives can be installed in the IBM System Storage TS3500
(3584) Tape Library Model L22/L23 and Model D22/D23 frames. Up to twelve
3592 tape drives can be installed in each TS3500 Model L22 and D22 frame. The
3592 tape drives can be intermixed within TS3500 libraries but not within the same
frames. See the IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library with ALMS Introduction and
Planning Guide, GA32-0593 for a complete discussion of the 3592 tape drive in the
IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library. See Table 12 for a summary of the
number of 3592 tape drives that can be installed in the TS3500 Tape Library's
Model L22/L23 and Model D22/D23 frames.
Table 12. 3592 tape drives in TS3500 Tape Library (3584) Frames L22/L23 and D22/D23
|
|
Frame
Attachments
TS3500 Model L22/L23
Up to twelve 3592 tape drives
TS3500 Model D22/D23
Up to twelve 3592 tape drives
Note: ALMS (Advanced Library Management System) and enhanced node cards
are required to support Model E07 drives in a 3584 library.
3494 Frame installation

|
|
|
3592 Model J1A, E05, E06, and EU6 tape drives can be installed in the IBM
TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library's L22, D22, and D24 frames. The 3592 E07 drive is
not supported by the 3494 library. Since the 3592 tape drive is smaller, the 3494
Model L22, D22, and D24 frames hold twice the number of tape drives compared
to the corresponding frame with 3590 tape drives. The 3592 tape drives and 3590
model tape drives can be intermixed within libraries, but not within the same
frames.
Existing 3494 frame models L10, L12, and L14 frames can be converted to the
Model L22 (These frame conversions are withdrawn from Marketing as of
December 29, 2006). Existing D10, D12, and D14 frame models can be converted to
the D22 and D24 frames to accommodate the new 3592 drives. See the IBM
TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448 for more
information on frame conversions.
When using a TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller with a 3494 tape library, the C06
controller resides in a 3952 Tape Frame that is detached from the library. C06
connection to the library is made through a 3494 D24 Frame or 3494 D22 Frame.
The 3494 D24 Frame or 3494 D22 Frame contains the fibre channel switch(es) that
the C06 uses to communicate with up to twelve connected 3592 tape drives.
Additional drives (up to 16 total per controller) can be connected in an adjacent
3494 D22 Frame or 3494 L22 Frame.
Table 13. L22, D14, D22, and D24 maximum frame capacities for drives and controllers
Frame
Attachments
25
Table 13. L22, D14, D22, and D24 maximum frame capacities for drives and
controllers (continued)
3494 Model L22
Up to four 3592 J1A, E05, E06, or EU6 tape

drives
Note:
1. If a Model L22 frame is installed with
the adjacent frame FC 4085, the
maximum number of attached 3592
drives is four.
2. If a Model L22 frame is installed with
drives is four.
3494 Model D22
Up to twelve 3592 J1A, E05, E06, or EU6

tape drives
Note:
1. If a Model D22 frame is installed with
drives is eight.
2. If a Model D22 frame is installed with
drives is four.
3494 Model D24
One 3592 Model J70 or 3590 Model A60

controller, or TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller
and up to eight 3592 J1A, E05, E06, or EU6
tape drives.
3494 Model D14

controller and up to four model H1A, four
E1A, or four B1A 3590 tape drives
3590 Model A14 Frame installation

The 3592 Model J70 controller can be installed in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise
Tape Drive Frame 3590 Model A14. See Table 14 for a summary of the number of
drives and controllers that can be installed in the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape
Drive Frame 3590 Model A14. For more information regarding the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive 3590 and 3590 controllers, see the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0329.
Table 14. 3590 Model A14 maximum frame capacity for drives and controllers
Frame
Attachments
1
3590 Model A14 (see )
26

controller and up to eight SCSI drives or
twelve Fibre Channel drives with
multiframe FC 4084.
This frame/controller combination is supported only for 3590 drive attachments.
Rack installation
This topic describes the requirements for installing 3592 tape drives in a rack.
|
|
The 3592 tape drives can be installed in a rack environment, and can be mixed
with 3590 drives in the same rack, but not on the same shelves. In addition, 3592
J1A drives can be installed in racks with a TS1120 (C06) Controller, 3592 J70
Controller, or a 3590 Model A60 controller, but E05, EU6, and E06 drives require a
C06 or J70 controller. E07 drives require a C06 controller. 3590 drives can be
installed in racks with a 3592 J70 Controller or a 3590 A60 Controller. However,
3592 drives and 3590 drives cannot be attached to the same controller.
For additional information regarding rack installations for 3590 drives or
controllers, see the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and
Planning Guide, GA32-0329.
To allocate the proper amount of rack space, determine the number of 3592 tape
drives you plan to install. You can place up to two 3592 tape drives into one
cradle. On each shelf in a rack, you can mount two cradles, for a maximum of four
tape drives per shelf. One shelf, containing either one or two 3592 tape drive
cradles requires 10 EIAs of rack space. This means, for example, that installations
of 1 to 4 drives would require the same total 10 EIAs of rack space. The fifth
through eighth drive installations would require an additional 10 EIAs of rack
space. See Table 15 for the maximum number of 3592 tape drives that can be
installed in different rack environments.
Note: An EIA is an Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) unit of measure which is
equal to the distance between the center point of each rack mounting hole.
Table 15. Maximum number of 3592 tape drives or 3590 drives installed in racks with or
without the TS1120 (C06) Controller, 3592 J70 Controller, or the 3590 A60 Controller
Rack Size
Number of 3592 Drives
Number of 3590 Drives with

Controller
2.0 m (6.6 ft) rack (IBM

Model 7014-T42)
v Up to 16 without
controller
Up to 4
v Up to 12 with controller
1.8 m (5.9 ft) (IBM Model

7014-T00)
v Up to 12 without
controller
Up to 4
1.6 m (5.2 ft) (IBM Model

7014-S00)
v Up to 12 without
controller
Up to 2
Note: For information on 3590 drives in racks without controllers, see the IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0329
Hardware and software support

These topics provide information about supported hardware and software.
Support for the 3592 tape drives is provided in i5/OS, OS/400, AIX, HP-UX,
Linux, Sun, and Windows NT, 2000, or Windows Server 2003 operating system
environments. Support for the z/OS, z/VM, z/TPF, and VSE/ESA operating
system environments is available through the 3592 C06 and J70 controllers.
27
For general tape drive information and details on operating systems, hardware
support, supported software versions and release levels, visit the following website
and select the tape drive of your choice http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/
tape/index.html.
The installation of a 3592 tape drive may require code updates for operating
systems, supported open systems device drivers, or storage management software.
Per the Solutions Assurance Product Review (SAPR) Guide, the account team or
business partner should ensure that the customer checks the appropriate PSP
buckets for System z environments or the equivalent support levels required for
their particular software environment prior to the installation of the 3592 tape
drive.
A Solutions Assurance call is required at a minimum for the installation of:
v The first new TS1120 (C06) Controller or 3592 J70 Controller in an account, or
v The first new 3592 tape drive in an account
Device drivers
This topic describes how to obtain information about device drivers.
To access the 3592 Firmware and Device Driver Matrix, visit the following website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/index.html and
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click the Support & downloads menu item.

Select Download > Fixes, updates, and drivers.
Select System Storage from the category pulldown.
Click Tape storage systems.
Click the tape drive of your choice.
6. Click Device drivers.

Updated open systems device drivers can be obtained from: http://
www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/. Further information can be found in the IBM
TotalStorage Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide, GC35-0154, also
available at the above site.
Application software
This topic describes application software.
Tivoli Storage Manager and other industry-leading compatible software offerings
provide storage and tape management software for the 3592 tape drives.
Supporting software and applications must be obtained separately from IBM, IBM
Business Partners, or independent software vendors (ISV). For a list of compatible
software and additional information, refer to the 3592 ISV Matrix at the following
web site: http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/pdf/compatibility/
ts1120_isv_matrix.pdf
Media
Data cartridges
This topic provides an overview of tape data cartridges used by the 3592 tape
drives.
28
|
|
|
|
The IBM 3592 Tape Cartridge is an advanced magnetic tape specifically optimized
for the Enterprise tape environment. It is available in five sizes. See Table 33 on
page 100 for more information on cartridge types and native capacities for each
tape drive model.
|
|
|
The 3592 Standard Data cartridge has a native capacity of 640 GB (596.04 GiB)
when formatted for EFMT3, 500 GB (465.66 GiB) when formatted for EFMT2, and
300 GB (279.39 GiB) when formatted for EFMT1. The 3592 Advanced Data
cartridge, used only by the 3592 E07 Tape Drive, has a native capacity of 4000 GB
(3725.29 GiB) when formatted for EFMT4.
|
|
|
The 3592 Economy cartridge has a native capacity of 128 GB (119.21 GiB) in
EFMT3, 100 GB (93.13 GiB) in EFMT2, and 60 GB (55.88 GiB) in EFMT1. The 3592
Advanced Economy cartridge, used only by the 3592 E07 Tape Drive, has a native
capacity of 500 GB (465.66 GiB).
|
|
The 3592 Extended cartridge has a native capacity of 1600 GB (1490.12 GiB) in
EFMT4, 1000 GB (931.32 GiB) in EFMT3 and 700 GB (651.93 GiB) in EFMT2. The
3592 Extended cartridge is not supported on the 3592 J1A Tape Drive or on a 3592
E05 Tape Drive emulating a 3592 J1A Tape Drive (EFMT1). See Table 32 on page 99
for each tape drive and the formats that it can read and write.
The 3592 Tape Cartridge can be encrypted on the Model E07, E06, and E05 tape
drives. Capacities of data cartridges can be increased through data compression,
with the actual compression and capacity depending upon the specific data.
Write-once, read-many (WORM) cartridges are available in four sizes and can also
be encrypted.
Cartridge memory is built into every data and cleaning cartridge to enhance the
functionality and reliability of the media. For more detailed information on 3592
data and cleaning cartridges, see Table 33 on page 100.
The 3592 tape cartridges are designed for automation, with a form factor similar to
the 3590 tape cartridges that allow them to be used in the TS3500 Tape Library, the
3494 Tape Library, and the StorageTek Automated Cartridge System. However,
3592 tape cartridges cannot be used in 3590 tape drives and 3590 tape cartridges
cannot be used in 3592 drives.
Cleaning cartridges
This topic describes the 3592 cleaning cartridge.
There is a cleaning cartridge designed specifically for the 3592 tape drive. As with
the data cartridges, the 3592 cleaning cartridges are not interchangeable with 3590
cleaning cartridges, so you must have both types of cleaning cartridges if you have
both types of drives in your environment. The cleaning cartridge also contains a
Cartridge Memory (CM) device, which automatically keeps track of the number of
times it has been used. Cleaning cartridges need to be replaced after 50 uses.
29
30
Chapter 2. Standard Features

The topics in this section provide feature code information for the 3592 tape drives.
This section provides feature code information to attach 3592 tape drives to TS1120
(C06) Controllers and 3592 J70 Controllers in a variety of environments, including
stand-alone rack environments. (See Feature descriptions3592 tape drive
installations in racks on page 41 and 3592 Model J70 Controller and associated
frame features on page 60). Information is also provided on attaching 3592 J1A
Tape Drives to 3590 Model A60 Controllers.
|
|
Additional feature code information can be found in the introduction and planning
guides for each of the following IBM tape systems that support 3592 tape drives,
TS1120 (C06) Controllers, and 3592 J70 Controllers.
Note: Not all 3592 tape drives or controllers are supported in the following tape
systems:
v IBM TotalStorage 3953 Tape Frame Model F05 (see the IBM TotalStorage 3953 Tape
Frame Model F05 and Library Manager Model L05 Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0472)
v IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library (see the IBM System Storage TS3520
Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0559)
v IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library (see the IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library
Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448)
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Drive Frame 3590 Model A14 (see the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide,
GA32-0329)
v IBM TotalStorage 3592 Tape Frame Model C20 (see the IBM TotalStorage 3592
Tape Frame Model C20 Introduction, Planning, and User's Guide, GA32-0554)
v IBM TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Frame 3590 (see the IBM TotalStorage Silo
Compatible Tape Frame 3590 Introduction, Planning, and User's Guide, GA32-0366)
3592 tape drive features

The topics in this section describe 3592 tape drive features for tape libraries, library
frames, and racks.
The 3592 tape drive features are grouped according to TS3400 tape libraries,
TS3500 library frames, 3494 library frames, and racks.
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in TS3400 Tape Library

|
|
The following 3577 feature codes install a 3592 tape drive into a TS3400 Tape
Library (3577 Model L5U). Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library
Planning and Operator Guide, GC27-2107 for feature code information required by
the TS3400 Tape Library to support 3592 tape drives.
31
Table 16. 3577 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3577 Model L5U
3577 Feature
Code
Feature Description
FC 1663
3592 Tape Drive Removal
FC 4685
3592 Install Field/Merge
FC 9685
3592 E05 Plant Ship with 3577
FC 9691
3592 E06 Field Install in 3577
Feature definitions3592 tape drives in TS3400 Tape Library

|
|
3592 Tape Drive Removal - Field (FC 1663): This feature provides removal of one
tape drive from an installed tape library. In addition to the drive removal, Machine
Level Control records are updated to indicate these features as no longer existing
within the library. This feature is intended for those customers who need to
remove drives from existing frames and later install them in other frames. For each
FC 1663 one 3592 tape drive is removed from the library.
Maximum: Two.
Note: After the initial install, each FC 1663 removes one of FC 9865 or FC 4685 or
FC 9691.
3592 Tape Drive Install - Field (FC 4685): This feature field installs one 3592 tape
drive canister into an installed 3577 Model L5U. This feature is also required to
field merge a customer owned 3592 tape drive canister into a 3577 Frame coming
from the plant.
Maximum: Two (FC 4685 plus FC 9685 plus FC 9691).
Note: The 3592 tape drive must be separately ordered. This feature only installs
that tape drive. The reinstall (Field Merge) of a drive may require the removal of
FC 1663.
Plant Ship 3592 E05 Tape Drive in 3577 (FC 9685): This feature notifies the plant
to ship one 3592 tape drive Model E05 with a TS3400 Tape Library 3577 Model
L5U.
Maximum: Two drives per frame (FC 4685 plus FC 9685 plus FC 9691).
3592 E06 Drive Plant Ship (FC 9691): This feature notifies the plant to ship one
3592 tape drive Model E06 with a 3577 Model L5U.
This feature does not apply to 3592 Model EU6.
Maximum: Two drives per frame (FC 4685 plus FC 9685 plus FC 9691).
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in TS3500 library

frames
The following features install a 3592 tape drive into a TS3500 (3584) L22/L23 or
D22/D23 frame. Refer to the IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Information
32
|
|
Center, available at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/ts3500tl/v1r0/

index.jsp, or the IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Introduction and Planning
Guide, GA32-0559 for feature code information required by the TS3500 tape system
to support 3592 tape drives.
Table 17 lists the 3584 feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3584 library frames.
Table 17. 3584 feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3584 frames
3584 Feature
Code
Feature Description
FC 1663
3592 Tape Drive Removal
FC 1674
3592 Install Field/Merge
FC 1675
Field Install 3592 Model E07 in 3584
FC 9680
Plant Install 3592 Model E05 in 3584
FC 9683
FC 9692
Table 18 lists the 3592 feature codes for tape drives in 3584 library frames.
Table 18. 3592 feature codes for tape drives in 3584 frames
|
|
3592 Feature
Code
Feature Description
FC 9677
Plant Install 3592 in a 3584 Frame
|
|
FC 9689
3592 Field Install in a 3584 Frame
Feature definitions3592 tape drives in TS3500 library frames
3592 Tape Drive Removal (FC 1663): This feature provides removal of one tape
drive from an installed tape library. In addition to the drive removal, Machine
Level Control records are updated to indicate these features as no longer existing
within the library. This feature is intended for those customers who may have the
need to remove drives from existing frames and later install them in other frames.
One 3592 tape drive (FC 1674, FC 1675, FC 9680, FC 9683, or FC 9692) should be
removed from the library for each FC 1663.
Maximum: 12.
Drive Field Install (FC 1674): This feature field installs one 3592 tape drive
canister into an installed 3584 Model D22, D23, L22, or L23. This feature is also
required to field merge a customer owned 3592 tape drive canister into a 3584
frame coming from the plant. Installation of a 3592 tape drive canister requires that
a 3592 Fibre Drive Mounting Kit feature (FC 1513 or FC 1515) be installed to
contain the canister. The 3592 tape drive must be ordered separately. This feature
only installs that tape drive. Field install only.
Maximum: 12 per frame of FC 1674 plus FC 9680 plus FC 9683.
Prerequisites: The quantity of FC 1513 or FC 1515 must be equal to or greater than

the quantity of tape drives installed (FC 1674 plus FC 9680 plus FC 9683).
|
|
Field Install 3592 Model E07 in 3584 (FC 1675): This feature allows the field
installation of a 3592 Model E07 tape drive into an installed 3584 Model D22, D23,
33
|
|
|
|
|
L22, or L23. This feature is also required to field merge a customer owned 3592
tape drive canister into a 3584 frame coming from the plant. Installation of a 3592
tape drive canister requires that a 3592 Fibre Drive Mounting Kit feature (FC 1515)
be installed to contain the canister. The 3592 tape drive must be ordered separately.
This feature only installs that tape drive. Field install only.
|
|
Maximum: 12 per frame. The sum of FC 1674, FC 1675, FC 9680, FC 9683, or FC

9692 is a maximum of twelve.
|
|
|
Prerequisites: The quantity of FC 1513 plus FC 1515 must be equal to or greater

than the quantity of tape drives installed (FC 1674, FC 1675, FC 9680, FC 9683, or
FC 9692).
Plant Install 3592 E05 in 3584 (FC 9680): This feature tells the plant to install one
3592 Model E05 tape drive into a 3584 Model D23 or L23 coming from the plant.
Installation of a 3592 Model E05 tape drive canister requires that a 3592 Fibre Drive
Mounting Kit feature (FC 1513) be installed to contain the canister.
Maximum: 12 per frame, of FC 9680 plus FC 1674 plus FC 9683.
|
|
Prerequisites: The quantity of FC 1513 plus FC 1515 must be equal to or greater

than the quantity of FC 9680 plus FC 1674 plus FC 9683.
|
|
Note: An additional LC/LC Patch Panel Cable (FC 1461) is required to attach the
second port of the 3592 tape drive.
Plant Install 3592 Model E06 in 3584 (FC 9683): This feature tells the plant to
install one 3592 Model E06 tape drive into a 3584 Model D23 or Model L23 coming
from the plant. Installation of a 3592 Model E06 tape drive canister requires that a
3592 Fibre Drive Mounting Kit (FC 1515) be installed to contain the canister. Plant
installation only.
Maximum: 12. The sum of FC 9680 plus FC 1674 plus FC 9683 is a maximum of
twelve.
Prerequisites: The quantity of FC 1515 must be equal to or greater than the
quantity of FC 9683.
|
|
|
|
Plant Install 3592 Model E07 in 3584 (FC 9692): This feature tells the plant to
install one 3592 Model E07 tape drive into a 3584 Model D23 or Model L23.
Installation of a 3592 E07 tape drive canister requires that a 3592 Fibre Drive
Mounting Kit (FC 1515) be installed to contain the canister. Plant install only.
|
|
Maximum: 12 per frame. The sum of FC 1674, FC 1675, FC 9680, FC 9683, or FC

9692 is a maximum of twelve.
|
|
Prerequisites: The quantity of FC 1515 must be equal to or greater than the

quantity of FC 9692.
|
|
34
|
|
|
|
|
|
Plant Install 3592 in a 3584 Frame (FC 9677): This feature notifies the plant to
factory install a new 3592 tape drive into a new 3584 Tape Library Frame. This
code must appear on the tape drive order and also the Plant Install 3592 E05 in a
3584 (FC 9680) or Plant Install 3592 E06 in a 3584 Drive (FC 9683) or Plant Install
3592 E07 in a 3584 (FC 9687) must appear on the 3584 frame order. Plant install
only.
|
|
Maximum of one of the following: FC 9673, FC 9673, FC 9675, FC 9677, FC 9685,

FC 9686, FC 9687, FC 9688, FC 9689, or FC 4674.
|
|
|
|
|
3592 Field Install in a 3584 Frame (FC 9689): This feature notifies the plant to
ship one 3592 tape drive which will be field installed in a 3584 Tape Library
Frame. This code must appear on the tape drive order and also the Field Merge
3592 tape drive (FC 1674), or for a 3592 E07, FC 1675 must appear on the 3584
Tape Library Frame order. Field install only.
|
|
Maximum of one of the following: FC 9673, FC 9675, FC 9677, FC 9685, FC 9686,

FC 9687, FC 9688, FC 9689, or FC 4674.
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in 3494 Tape Library

|
|
The following 3494 features install a 3592 E05 or E06 into a 3494 Tape Library. See
the IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448
for feature code information required by the IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library to
support 3592 tape drives.
Table 19. 3494 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3494
3494 Feature
Code
Feature Description
FC 4673
Replace 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive with 3592 Model E05
FC 4674
Field merge 3592 J1A Tape Drive
FC 4675
Field install 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive
FC 4676
Field install 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive
FC 4677
Field install 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive
FC 4678
Replace 3592 Model J1A or 3592 Model E05 with 3592 Model E06 or 3592
Model EU6 Tape Drive
FC 4772
Remove 3592 Tape Drive from 3494 Frame
FC 9674
Field merge 3592 J1A Tape Drive
FC 9676
Plant install 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive
FC 9678
Field merge 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive
FC 9683
Plant install 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive
FC 9684
Field merge 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive
FC 9694
Field merge 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive
Feature definition3592 tape drives in 3494 library frames

|
|
35
Replace 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive with 3592 Model E05 (FC 4673): This feature
is required to provide the mounting changes to replace a 3592 Model J1A Tape
Drive with a Model E05 Tape Drive in a currently installed Model D22 Frame.
Maximum: 12. The sum of FC 4673, FC 4674, FC 4675, FC 4676, FC 4677, FC 4678,
FC 9673, FC 9674, FC 9676, FC 9678, FC 9683, FC 9684, or FC 9694 is a maximum
of twelve.
Field install 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive (FC 4674): This feature code allows field
installation of a 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive in a 3494 Model D22. This feature code
is for currently installed 3494 frames only. See FC 9673 or FC 9674 for new 3494
orders.
of twelve.
Corequisite: A cradle feature (FC 4800 or FC 4803) with an available canister slot
must be installed. Field Installation: MES only.
Field install 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive (FC 4675): This feature allows the field
installation of a 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive in a 3494 Model D22. This feature is
for currently installed 3494 Frames only. See FC 9676 or FC 9678 for new 3494
orders.
of twelve.
Corequisites: A cradle feature (FC 4800 or FC 4803) with an available canister slot
must be installed.
Field install 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive (FC 4676): This feature allows the field
installation of a 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive in a 3494 Model D22. This feature is
for currently installed 3494 frames only. See FC 9683 or FC 9684 for new 3494
orders.
of twelve.
must be installed.
Field install 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive (FC 4677): This feature allows the field
installation of a 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive in a 3494 Model D22. This feature is
for currently installed 3494 frames only.
of twelve.
must be installed.
36
Replace 3592 Model J1A or E05 with Model E06 or EU6 (FC 4678): This feature is
required to provide the mounting changes to replace a 3592 Model J1A or 3592
Model E05 Tape Drive with a Model E06 or Model EU6 Tape Drive in a currently
installed Model D22 Frame.
of twelve.
Prerequisites: This feature is mutually exclusive with FC 9010.
Remove 3592 Tape Drive from 3494 frame (FC 4772): This feature provides the
instructions to remove a 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive from a currently installed
Model D22 frame.
Maximum: 12.
Corequisite: One of FC 4673, FC 4674, FC 4675, FC 4676, FC 4677, FC 4678, FC
9673, FC 9674, FC 9676, FC 9678, FC 9683, FC 9684, or FC 9694 must be removed
when this feature is added. Field Installation: MES only.
Field merge 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive in 3494 (FC 9674): This feature allows
the field merge of a customer owned 3592 Tape Drive Model J1A into a new 3494
Model Model D22 coming from the factory. This feature notifies the factory to
leave a mounting slot available for a field merge of a tape drive unit prior to
completion of the installation at the customer site.
of twelve.
Corequisite: A cradle feature (FC 4800 or FC 4803) with an available canister slot
must be installed.
Plant install 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive (FC 9676): This feature tells the factory
to install one 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive into a new 3494 Model D22 coming from
the plant.
of twelve.
must be installed.
Field merge 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive (FC 9678): This feature allows the field
merge of a customer owned 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive into a new 3494 Model
D22 coming from the factory. This feature notifies the factory to leave a mounting
slot available for a field merge of a tape drive unit prior to completion of the
installation at the customer site.
of twelve.
37
must be installed.
Plant Install 3592 E06 Tape Drive (FC 9683): This feature tells the factory to
install one 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive into a new 3494 Model D22 coming from
the plant.
of twelve.
Field merge 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive (FC 9684): This feature allows the field
merge of a customer-owned 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive into a new 3494 Model
of twelve.
must be installed.
Field merge 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive (FC 9694): This feature allows the field
merge of a customer-owned 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive into a new 3494 Model
FC 9673, FC 9674, FC 9676, FC 9678, FC 9683, FC 9684, or FC 9694 must be a
maximum of twelve.
must be installed.
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in 3592 Tape Frame

Model C20
|
|
The following 3592 Model C20 features install a 3592 tape drive into a Tape Frame
Model C20. See the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Frame Model C20 Introduction,
Planning, and User's Guide, GA32-0463 for feature code information required to
support 3592 tape drives.
Table 20. 3592 C20 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in Tape Frame Model C20
38
3592 C20
Feature Code
Feature Description
FC 4830
Install Model C20 Drive Shelf Pair
FC 4831
Field install 3592 Model J1A in C20 frame
FC 4832
Remove 3592 tape drive from C20 frame
Table 20. 3592 C20 Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in Tape Frame Model
C20 (continued)
FC 4833
Field install 3592 Model E05 in C20 frame
FC 4835
Replace 3592 Model J1A with Model E05
FC 4836
Field install 3592 Model E06 in C20 frame
FC 4837
Field install 3592 Model EU6 in C20 frame
FC 4840
Air Box Drive Cover
FC 4841
Replace 3592 Model J1A or Model E05 with Model E06 or Model EU6
Tape Drive
FC 9679
Plant install 3592 E05 in C20
FC 9693
Plant install 3592 E06 in C20
Feature definitions3592 Tape Drives in Tape Frame Model C20

Install Model C20 Drive Shelf Pair (FC 4830): This feature installs the redundant
power supplies and hardware on a horizontal drive shelf for mounting of up to
two 3592 Tape Drives. Up to two 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive canisters (FC 4831 or
FC 9675) or two 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive canisters (FC 4833 or FC 4835 or FC
9679) or two 3592 Model E06/EU6 Tape Drive canisters (FC 4836 or FC 4837 or FC
4841 or FC 9693) can be installed in each C20 Drive Shelf Pair, if the Air Box Drive
Cover (FC 4840) is not installed.
Maximum: ten.
Field install 3592 Model J1A in Model C20 (FC 4831): This feature provides the
hardware and instructions for field installation of one 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive
canister in a C20 Drive Shelf Pair in the 3592 Model C20. Two tape drive canisters
can be installed in each C20 Drive Shelf Pair feature (FC 4830).
Maximum: 20 if the Air Box Drive Cover (FC 4840) is not installed, or a maximum
of 10 if feature FC 4840 is installed.
Prerequisite: An available C20 Drive Shelf Pair feature (FC 4830) according to the
following:
v The number of drives installed (FC 4831 or FC 9675 or FC 4833 or FC 4835 or FC
9679 or FC 4836 or FC 4837 or FC 4841 or FC 9693) can be no greater than twice
the number of C20 Drive Shelf Pair features (FC 4830) if the Air Box Drive
9679 or FC 4836 or FC 4837 or FC 4841 or FC 9693) can be no greater than the
number of C20 Drive Shelf Pair features (FC 4830), if the Air Box Drive Cover
(FC 4840) is installed.
Remove 3592 Tape Drive from Model C20 frame (FC 4832): Remove a 3592 Tape
Drive from a Model C20 Frame This feature removes a 3592 Model J1A or E05
Tape Drive canister that is installed in a C20 Drive Shelf Pair in a 3592 Model C20.
This feature does not remove a C20 Drive Shelf Pair, associated power supplies, or
other associated hardware.
Maximum: 20.
39
Corerequisite: One FC 4831 or FC 4833 or FC 4835 or FC 9675 or FC 9679 or FC

4836 or FC 4837 or FC 4841 or FC 9693 must be removed with this feature.
Field install 3592 Model E05 in Model C20 frame (FC 4833): This feature
provides the hardware and instructions for field installation of one 3592 Model E05
Tape Drive canister in a C20 Drive Shelf Pair in the 3592 Model C20. Two tape
drive canisters can be installed in each C20 Drive Shelf Pair FC 4830.
following:
Replace 3592 Model J1A with Model E05 (FC 4835): This feature is required to
provide the mounting changes to replace a 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive with a
Model E05 Tape Drive in a currently installed Model C20 frame.
Maximum: 20. The sum of features FC 4831, FC 4833, FC 4835, FC 9675, FC 9679,
FC 4836, FC 4837, FC 4841 or FC 9693 is a maximum of 20.
Field install 3592 Model E06 in Model C20 frame (FC 4836): This feature
provides the hardware and instructions for field merge or field installation of one
3592 Model E06 Tape Drive canister in a C20 Drive Shelf Pair in the 3592 Model
C20. Two tape drive canisters can be installed in each C20 Drive Shelf Pair FC
4830.
following:
Field install 3592 Model EU6 in Model C20 frame (FC 4837): This feature
provides the hardware and instructions for field merge or field installation of one
3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive canister in a C20 Drive Shelf Pair in the 3592 Model
C20. Two tape drive canisters can be installed in each C20 Drive Shelf Pair FC
4830.
40
following:
Air Box Drive Cover (FC 4840): This feature provides an Air Box Cover for a
StorageTek 9310 PowderHorn Tape Library. If the StorageTek LSM has the
four-drive or ten-drive wall panel, then the Air Box Drive Cover feature (FC 4840)
must be installed and a maximum of ten or fewer tape drives can be installed.
Maximum: One.
Replace 3592 Model J1A or Model E05 with Model E06 or Model EU6 (FC 4841):
This feature is required to provide the mounting changes to replace a 3592 Model
J1A or 3592 Model E05 Tape Drive with a Model E06 or Model EU6 Tape Drive in
a currently installed Model C20 frame.
FC 4837, FC 4841 or FC 9693 is a maximum of 20.
Plant install 3592 Model E05 in Tape Frame Model C20 (FC 9679): This feature
notifies the plant to factory install a Model E05 Tape Drive into a 3592 Model C20
Frame coming from the plant. This feature must appear on the Model E05 order
and also on the Model C20 order.
Maximum: 20. If FC 4840 is not installed, the sum of FC 4831, FC 9675, FC 4833,
FC 4835, FC 9679, FC 4836, FC 4837, FC 4841, or FC 9693 is a maximum of 20. If
FC 4840 is installed, the sum of FC 4831, FC 9675, FC 4833, FC 4835, FC 9679, FC
4836, FC 4837, FC 4841, or FC 9693 is a maximum of ten.
Plant install 3592 Model E06 in Tape Frame Model C20 (FC 9693): This feature
notifies the plant to factory install a Model E06 Tape Drive into a 3592 Model C20
Frame coming from the plant. This feature must appear on the Model E06 order
and also on the Model C20 order.
Maximum: 20. If FC 4840 is not installed, the sum of FC 4831, FC 9675, FC 4833,
FC 4835, FC 9679, FC 4836, FC 4837, FC 4841, or FC 9693 is a maximum of 20. If
FC 4840 is installed, the sum of FC 4831, FC 9675, FC 4833, FC 4835, FC 9679, FC
4836, FC 4837, FC 4841, or FC 9693 is a maximum of ten.
Feature descriptions3592 tape drive installations in racks

Feature codes using the term Field merge instruct the plant to leave a mounting slot
available in the frame. This allows for the merging of a tape drive at the customer
site. Feature codes using the term Field install indicate that a mounting slot is to be
41
made available in an existing frame at the customer site. Table 21 lists the feature
codes that apply for rack installations.
Table 21. Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in rack installations
Feature Code
Description
4674
Field Install 3592 Tape Drive in Rack
4684
3592 E07 Additional Rack Mount Hardware
4772
Remove 3592 Tape Drive from Rack
4802
Install Left Drive-Pair Cradle in Rack
4812
Install Right Drive-Pair Cradle in Rack
Feature definitions3592 tape drive installations in racks

Install the 3592 Tape Drive in a Rack (FC 4674): This feature provides the
hardware and instructions to install the 3592 tape drive canister in a rack. Two
tape drive canisters can be installed in each cradle feature (FC 4802 or FC 4812). A
cradle with an available canister slot must already be installed in the rack to accept
the drive canister. Plant or field install.
|
|
Corequisite: A cradle feature (FC 4802 or FC 4812) with an available canister slot.
Maximum: one. The maximum of FC 9673 plus FC 9675 plus FC 9677 plus FC 9685
plus FC 9686 plus FC 9687 plus FC 9688 plus FC 9689 plus FC 4674 is one.
|
|
In any given rack, the following aggregate maximums apply:

v For 2 m (6.6 ft.) racks without a controller: 16
v For 1.6 m (5.25 ft.) and 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) racks without a controller or 2 m (6.6 ft.)
racks with a controller: 12
v For 1.6 m (5.25 ft.) and 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) racks with a controller: 8
|
|
|
3592 E07 Additional Rack Mount Hardware (FC 4684): This feature provides
hardware that enables installation of a 3592 E07 in an existing rack. Plant or field
installation.
Maximum number of features: one. Prerequisite: FC 4674 for 3592 E07.

Remove 3592 Tape Drive from a Rack (FC 4772): This feature removes a 3592
tape drive canister that is installed in a cradle in a rack. Any cradle features
associated with this removed tape drive are also removed from the tape drive, but
the physical cradle or shelf may remain installed in that rack. Maximum: One per
ordered feature code. Corerequisite: One feature FC 4674 must be removed with
this feature. Maximum: The total of drives installed in a rack (FC 4674). Field
removal only.
Install Left Drive-Pair Cradle in Rack (FC 4802): This feature adds a left-side
drive cradle for accepting up to two 3592 tape drive canisters in a rack. The feature
also provides a shelf capable of supporting a left-and right-side drive cradle, as
well as rack panels for covering either cradle. It includes two redundant power
supplies, drive identification logic for up to two 3592 tape drives, and a pluggable
large display and control panel for the drives.
Prerequisite: FC 4674. Maximum: one. For any given rack, the following maximum
FC 4802 cradle installations apply:
v For 2 m (6.6 ft.) racks without controllers: Four (4)
42
v For 1.6 m (5.25 ft.) and 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) racks without controllers: Three (3)
v Maximum cradle pair capacity is decreased by one if a controller is installed in
the rack
Install Right Drive-Pair Cradle in Rack (FC 4812): This feature adds one
right-side drive cradle, on the same shelf as a tape drive with the cradle FC 4802,
for accepting up to two 3592 tape drive canisters in a rack. It includes two
redundant power supplies and drive identification logic for up to two 3592 tape
drives. One feature FC 4802 must be currently installed for each feature FC 4812.
Plant or field installation.
|
Prerequisite: FC 4674. Maximum: one. For any given rack the following maximum
FC 4812 cradle installations apply:
|
|
v For 2 m (6.6 ft.) racks without controllers: Four (4)

v For 1.6 m (5.25 ft.) and 1.8 m (5.9 ft.) racks without controllers: Three (3)
v Maximum cradle pair capacity is decreased by one if a controller is installed in
the rack
Feature descriptions3592 tape drive standard features

The following 3592 tape drive features are common throughout rack and frame
installations.
Table 22. Common feature codes for 3592 tape drives
Feature Code
Feature Description
FC 0500
Tape drive microcode update
FC 5592
Encryption-capable 3592 E05 Tape Drive/Field
FC 5596
Encryption configuration 3592 Tape Drive/Field
FC 5913
13 m LC/SC Fibre Channel Cable 50um shortwave multimode
FC 5922
FC 5961
FC 6013
13 m LC/LC Fibre Channel Cable 50um shortwave multimode
FC 6025
FC 6061
3592 Cleaning Cartridge (withdrawn)
FC 8820
Twenty 3592 Data Cartridges (withdrawn)
FC 9000
Attached to System z
FC 9210
Attached to HP-UX System
FC 9211
Attached to Solaris System
FC 9212
FC 8802
Attached to Windows System
FC 9213
Attached to Other Non-IBM System
FC 9215
Attached to Linux System
FC 9400
Attached to i5/OS or AS/400
FC 9590
No data cartridges (withdrawn)
FC 9596
Encryption configuration 3592 / Plant
FC 9600
Attached to AIX System
43
Table 22. Common feature codes for 3592 tape drives (continued)
1
These features are no longer marketed by IBM beginning in January 2005. To order 3592
media, see 3599 media supplies on page 112.
2
Other non-IBM systems vendors may support attachment of the 3592 Model J1A tape
drive. You should check with the non-IBM system vendor for specifics on hardware and
software support requirements as any device drivers needed to support attachment to
these systems must be provided by the non-IBM vendor.
Feature definitions3592 tape drive standard features

Drive Microcode Update (FC 0500): This feature provides an update to the 3592
tape drive microcode on an installed tape drive. Newer microcode levels may be
required when attaching the 3592 tape drive in selected Fibre Channel or SAN
environments.
|
|
|
For additional information on minimum required microcode levels, access the 3592
Firmware and Device Driver Matrix by visiting the following website:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/index.html and
1. Click the Support & downloads menu item.
2. Select Download > Fixes, updates, and drivers.
3. Select System Storage from the category pulldown.
4. Click Tape storage systems.
5. Click the tape drive of your choice.
6. Click Firmware.
Maximum: none. Field installation only.
Encryption-Capable 3592 E05 - Field (FC 5592): This feature replaces a TS1120
Tape Drive shipped prior to September 8, 2006 with an encryption-capable TS1120
Tape Drive (3592-E05).
Encryption Configuration - Field (FC 5596): This feature provides configuration
and reconfiguration support for encryption-capable tape drives in Open Systems
environments.
For encryption configuration support of tape drives attached to a control unit in
System z environments, order FC 9595 or FC 5595 on the 3592 control unit.
For open system attached tape drives in TS3500 tape libraries, the capability is
provided through the library interface for the customer to perform encryption
configuration, FC 9900. When the customer performs this activity, it is not
necessary to install FC 5596.
FC 5596 cannot be ordered when the tape drives will be attached to a VTS or
TS7700 Virtualization Engine.
|
|
Prerequisites: One of FC 5592 or FC 9592 for Model E05 only. Mutually exclusive
with FC 9596. Maximum: 99. Field installation only.
LC/SC Fibre Channel Cables (FC 5913 - 5961): These features supply one
50.0/125 micrometer fiber-optic cable with an LC duplex connector on one end for
attachment to the 3592 tape drive, and an SC duplex connector on the other end
for attachment to switches or hosts with SC duplex fibre channel connectors. This
feature is for field or plant installation.
44
v 13 meter (43 ft.) LC/SC Fibre Cable (FC 5913)

|
Maximum: Two installed per tape drive. The sum of FC 5913 plus FC 5922 plus FC
5961 plus FC 6013 plus FC 6025 plus FC 6061 = maximum of five per order.
LC/LC Fibre Channel Cables (FC 6013 - 6061): These features supply one
50.0/125 micrometer short wavelength multimode fiber-optic cable with LC duplex
cable connectors at both ends. These cables are for attaching 3592 tape drives that
have an LC duplex connector to switches or hosts with LC duplex fibre channel
connectors. This feature is for field or plant installation.
v 13 meter (43 ft.) LC/LC Fibre Channel Cable (FC 6013)
Maximum: Two installed per tape drive. The sum of FC 5913 plus FC 5922 plus FC
5961 plus FC 6013 plus FC 6025 plus FC 6061 = maximum of five per order.
3592 Cleaning Cartridge (FC 8802): FC 8802 is no longer marketed by IBM
beginning in January 2005. See 3599 media supplies on page 112 to order 3592
media.
This feature provides a 3592 cleaning cartridge for 3592 Model J1A Tape Drives.
Prerequisite: FC 4674. Maximum: Five. Plant or field installation.
3592 Data Cartridges (20Pack) (FC 8820): FC 8820 is no longer marketed by IBM
beginning in January 2005. See 3599 media supplies on page 112 to order 3592
media.
This feature supplies a package containing twenty of the 300 GB (279.39 GiB) IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Data Cartridge 3592, with a new order of a 3592 tape
drive. Prerequisite: FC 4674. Maximum: Five. Plant installation only.
|
|
Attached to System z (FC 9000): This attachment feature code identifies the
system type as System z and determines the distribution method for microcode
updates.
Attached to HP-UX System (FC 9210): A device driver is available with FC 9200,
Open Systems Device Driver, for HP-UX attachment.
Attached to Solaris System (FC 9211): A device driver is available with FC 9200,
Open Systems Device Driver, for Solaris attachment.
Attached to Windows System (FC 9212): A device driver is available with FC

9200, Open Systems Device Driver, for attachment to Windows systems.
Attached to Other Non-IBM System (FC 9213): Several non-IBM systems vendors
support attachment of the 3592 tape drive. The customer should check with the
non-IBM system vendor for specifics on hardware and software support
requirements. Device drivers supporting attachment to these systems must be
provided by the non-IBM vendor.
Attached to Linux System (FC 9215): A device driver is available with FC 9200,
Open Systems Device Driver, for attachment to Linux systems.
45
Attached to i5/OS or AS/400 (FC 9400): A device driver is available with FC 9200,
Open systems Device Driver, for i5/OS or OS/400 systems.
No Data Cartridge (FC 9590): FC 9590 is no longer marketed by IBM beginning in

January 2005. See 3599 media supplies on page 112 to order 3592 media.
This feature notifies the plant that no data cartridges are to be shipped with this
tape drive from the factory. Either feature FC 8820, or FC 9590 must be ordered
with each drive. Prerequisite: FC 4674.
Encryption Configuration - Plant (FC 9596): This feature provides configuration
support for encryption-capable tape drives in Open Systems environments.
This feature does not apply to 3592 Model EU6.
For encryption configuration support of tape drives attached to a control unit in
System z environments, order FC 9595 or FC 5595 on the 3592 control unit.
For open system attached tape drives in TS3500 tape libraries, the capability is
provided through the library interface for the customer to perform encryption
configuration, FC 9900. When the customer performs this activity, it is not
necessary to install FC 9596.
FC 9596 cannot be ordered when the tape drives are attached to a VTS or TS7700
Virtualization Engine.
|
|
Prerequisites: One of FC 5592 or FC 9592 for Model E05 only. Mutually exclusive
with FC 5596. Maximum: one. Plant installation only.
Attached to AIX System (FC 9600): A device driver is available with FC 9200,
Open systems Device Driver, for AIX systems.
Feature descriptions3592 tape drives in 3494 library frames

|
|
The following 3592 tape drive features install a 3592 tape drive into the IBM
TotalStorage 3494 tape library's Model L22, D22, and D24 frames. Earlier frame
models can also be converted to D22 and D24 models. See the IBM TotalStorage
3494 Tape Library Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448 for feature code
information required by the IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library to support 3592
tape drives.
available in the frame. This allows for the merging of a tape drive at the customer
site. Feature codes using the term Field install indicate that a mounting slot is to be
made available in an existing frame at the customer site. See Table 23 on page 47
for the features that apply to the 3494 L22, D22, and D24 frames. Except where
noted, all features apply to all three frames.
Note that some features are ordered only against the drive, others are ordered
against only the frame, and others are ordered against both the frame and the
drive.
46
Table 23. Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3494 L22, D22, and D24 library frame
installations
Category
Cradle
Installation
Feature Code
4800
Install Cradle Pair
Remove Cradle Pair
Field Re-Install Cradle Pair
Adjacent Frame 3592 Tape Drives With SC Attachment
Adjacent Frame 3592 Tape Drives With LC Attachment
Adjacent Frame Fibre Channel 3592
Adjacent Frame 3592 Tape Drives L22/D22 to D22
Replace 3592 J1A with 3592 E05
4801
4803
Adjacent
Drive
Attachment
4065
4075
4085
4086
Drive
Installation
4673
4674
4675
Description
Field Install 3592 J1A

Field Install 3592 E05 Tape Drive
4676
Field Install 3592 Model E06 Tape Drive
4677
Field Install 3592 Model EU6 Tape Drive
4678
Replace 3592 Model J1A or E05 with 3592 Model E06 or

EU6 Tape Drive
47722
Remove 3592 Tape Drive
Factory Install 3592 E05 Tape Drive
9678
Field Merge 3592 E05 Tape Drive
9683
Factory Install 3592 E06 Tape Drive
9684
Field Merge 3592 E06 Tape Drive
9694
Field Merge 3592 EU6 Tape Drive
LM Microcode
Updates
0520
Drive Microcode Update
Tape
Cartridges
88025
3592 Cleaning Cartridge
88205
Twenty 3592 Data Cartridges
95405
No Data Cartridges
91043
iSeries OS/400 attach
91063
pSeries AIX attach
9109
zSeries ESCON/FICON attach
92004
Open Systems Device Drivers
9676
Operating
Systems
Attachments
HP-UX attach
Sun Solaris attach
9212
Microsoft Windows attach
9213
Other Non-IBM attachment
9215
Open Linux system attach
9216
zSeries Linux attach
9210
9211
47
Table 23. Feature codes for 3592 tape drives in 3494 L22, D22, and D24 library frame
installations (continued)
Category
Languages
Feature Code
4
Description
2924
English
2928
French
2930
Japanese (Service Panel only)
2931
Spanish
2932
Italian (Withdrawal from marketing announced May 9,

2006)
2935
French Canadian - keyboard only (Withdrawal from

marketing announced May 9, 2006)
Note: 1These features are ordered against the 3494 frame. 2These features are ordered
against both the 3494 frame and the J1A drive. 3Applies only to the L22 and D22 frames.
4
Applies to the L22 frames only. 5 These features are no longer marketed by IBM beginning
in January 2005. To order 3592 media, see 3599 media supplies on page 112. 6These
features are ordered against both the 3494 frame and the E05 drive
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and associated frame features

For features listed in numerical order, refer to Table 24 and refer to 3592 C06 and
associated frame feature descriptions on page 50.
For features listed according to supported Fibre Channel environments, refer to the
following sections:
v Features for the Fibre Channel Switches on page 58
v Features for External Fabric Support (FC 3492, FC 9492) on page 60
available in the frame for merging a device at the customer site. Feature codes
using the term Field install indicate that an existing rack or frame at the customer
site requires a mounting slot.
Table 24. Feature codes for Model C06 controllers and associated features
Feature Code
Machine Type/Model
0520
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3592

Model J70, 3494 Models Lxx
2714
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller
Console Expansion
2715
Console Attachment
2719
IBM System Storage TS3000 System

Console Upgrade
2720
IBM System Storage TS3000 System

Console (withdrawn)
2732
TS3000 System Console
2733
TS3000 Internal Modem
3062
Drive-to-Switch Cables / Rack
3440
Dual ESCON Attachment for C06
3441
FICON Short Wavelength

Attachment
48
Description
Functional Enhancement Field
Table 24. Feature codes for Model C06 controllers and associated features (continued)
Feature Code
Machine Type/Model
Description
3442
FICON Long Wavelength

Attachment
3443
FICON 10 km Long Wavelength

Attachment
3478
Two Dual Ported Fibre Drive

Adapters
3488
4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
3492
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952

Frame F05
External Fabric Support (Field)
3493
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952

Frame F05
Direct Connect Drives (Field)
3494
Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount

Kit
3495
Redundant Fibre Channel Attach
4641
Install Controller in Rack
4887
Reinstall 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
4897
5247
Enhanced Router
5248
Network 16-Port Switch for

IPv4/IPv6
5593
Router for EKM attach
5595
Control Unit Encryption

configuration / Field
9000
Attach to System z
9014
Attach TS3400 to Controller
9478
3592 Drive Attach to C06 Controller
9492
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952

F05 Frame
External Fabric Support (Plant)
9493
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3952

F05 Frame
Direct Connect Drives (Plant)
9595

configuration / Plant
9885
Field Merge C06 into 3952 F05
9886
Plant Install C06 into 3952 F05 for

Silo
9887
Field Merge C06 into 3953 F05
9888
Plant Install C06 into 3953 F05
9889
Plant Install C06 in 3952 F05 for

3494
9906
IPv6 Configuration
49
3592 C06 and associated frame feature descriptions

Functional Enhancement Field (FC 0520)
This feature provides an update to the microcode of an installed TS1120 (3592 C06)
Controller and the attached tape drives to provide the latest level of functional
microcode firmware support. Newer microcode levels may be required when
adding new functions. In order to take advantage of the 700 GB (651.93 GiB)
Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended, you must update controller microcode
installed before December 8, 2006.
Note: 3592-C06 1.21.7.x microcode is required for 3592 Model E07 drive support.
3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch Cables (FC 3062)

This feature provides a single Fibre Channel cable between a 3592 Tape Drive and
a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Switch in a rack, for connection to a TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller
installed in that rack. One of these features should be specified for each 3592 Tape
Drive to be attached to the Model C06 in the rack.
Maximum: twelve (with single switch feature FC 3488, FC 3487, FC 4887, or FC
4897) or Twenty-four (with two switches feature FC 3487, FC 3488, or FC 4887 or
FC 4897), when installed in a rack
Dual ESCON Host Adapter (FC 3440)

See Table 50 on page 148 for the allowable combinations of FICON/ESCON
attachments using features FC 3440, FC 3441, FC 3442, and FC 3443 described
below.
This feature provides an ESCON adapter for attachment of 3592 Tape Drives
through the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller to two ESCON host system channels.
Each port on the ESCON adapter can support up to 64 logical channels and, using
ESCON Directors, can be up to 43 kilometers from the host system.
Maximum: four. Minimum: one of Feature FC 3440, FC 3441, FC 3442, or FC 3443
is required on each Model C06. Permitted combinations of Feature FC 3440, FC
3441, FC 3442, and FC 3443 are shown in Table 50 on page 148.
For information on ESCON cable features, see Dual ESCON attachment for 3592
controller cable features on page 91.
FICON Short Wave Attachment (FC 3441)

below.
This feature provides one short-wavelength FICON adapter, with an LC Duplex
connector, for the attachment of 3592 Tape Drives through the TS1120 (C06)
Controller to a FICON host system long wave channel utilizing a 50-micron
multimode fibre cable. The total cable length cannot exceed 150 meters (492 feet).
Each FICON attachment can support up to 128 logical channels. A feature
conversion is available to convert FC 3441 to FC 3442 or FC 3443.
Maximum: Four. Minimum: One of FC 3440, FC 3441, FC 3442, or FC 3443 is
required on each TS1120 (C06) Controller. Plant or field installation.
50
FICON Long Wave Attachment (FC 3442)

below.
This feature provides one long-wavelength FICON adapter, with an LC Duplex
single-mode fibre cable. The total cable length cannot exceed 4 KM. Each FICON
attachment can support up to 128 logical channels. A feature conversion is
available to convert FC 3442 to FC 3441 or FC 3443.
Maximum: Four. Minimum: one of FC 3440, FC 3441, FC 3442, or FC 3443 is
required on each Model C06. Plant or field installation.
FICON Long Wave 10km Attachment (FC 3443)

below.
This feature provides one long-wavelength FICON adapter, with an LC Duplex
single-mode fibre cable. The total cable length cannot exceed 10 KM. Each FICON
attachment can support up to 128 logical channels. A feature conversion is
available to convert FC 3443 to FC 3441 or FC 3442.
Maximum: Four. Minimum: one FC 3440, FC 3441, FC 3442, or FC 3443 is required
on each Model C06. Plant or field installation.
Two Dual Ported Fibre Channel Drive Adapters (FC 3478)

This feature installs two short-wavelength 4 Gb Dual Ported Fibre Channel
adapters with LC connectors in a TS1120 (C06) Controller for attaching up to
sixteen 3592 Tape Drives when attached through a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch. Total cable length from the adapters to the switch cannot exceed 150
meters. Factory installed. Minimum: one. Maximum: one.
4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3488)

This feature provides a 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch with 20 LC Shortwave ports for
attachment of up to sixteen 3592 Tape Drives to a TS1120 (C06) Controller.
Hardware errors detected on the switch are managed by the TS1120 (C06)
Controller. The 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch has dual power connection for
attachment to separate power supplies. Factory or field installed.
Maximum: two. Prerequisites: FC 3478. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC
3492, FC 3493, FC 4887, FC 9492, and FC 9493. Intermix of 2 Gb and 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Switches is not supported within the TS1120 (C06) Controller.
External Fabric Support - Field (FC 3492)

This feature indicates that 3592 Tape Drives will be connected to TS1120 (C06)
Controller through an external customer-supplied Fibre Channel Switch. Field
installed.
Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 3478. This feature is mutually exclusive with FC
3488, FC 3493, FC 4887, FC 4897, FC 9492, and FC 9493.
51
The customer is responsible for providing the cables from the TS1120 (C06)
Controller installed in a 3952 or 3953 Model F05 frame to a customer-supplied fibre
channel switch. Cables from the switch or controller to the 3592 Tape Drives can be
ordered with the 3592 Tape Drives or supplied by the customer.
Direct Connect Drives - Field (FC 3493)

This feature indicates that 3592 Tape Drives will be directly connected to the
TS1120 (C06) Controller. Direct connect drives require either this feature or FC 9493
(External Fabric Support - Plant) specified on the TS1120 (C06) Controller with one
to four FC 3062 for rack-installed 3592 Tape Drives.
The cables are provided to direct connect the 3592 Tape Drives in a rack to the
TS1120 (C06) Controller by specifying FC 3062 when the external fabric feature FC
3493 or FC 9493 is specified.
Field installed. Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 3478. This feature is mutually
exclusive of FC 3488, FC 3492, FC 4887, FC 4897, FC 9492, and FC 9493.
Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount Kit (FC 3494)

This feature provides the required hardware to support attachment of 3592 Tape
Drives through a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3488, FC 4887, or FC
4897) for connection to a TS1120 (C06) Controller in a rack. It includes the
mounting hardware and instructions for installing the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch in the rack, including associated ethernet cabling between the Model C06
and the switch. Fibre Channel cables from the 3592 Tape Drives to the switch in
the rack with the Model C06 are included by specifying FC 3062 (one or two for
each tape drive). For multi-rack attachment of 3592 Tape Drives in other racks to
the switch, order the cables with the drives. Factory or field installed. Maximum:
one. Prerequisites: FC 4641 plus FC 3488, 4887, or FC 4897.
Redundant FC Rack Attach (FC 3495)

This feature provides the mounting hardware and instructions for installing a
second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the rack. Factory or field installed.
Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 3494 and a second FC 3488, FC 4887 or FC 4897.
Install Controller in Rack (FC 4641)

This optional feature provides the rack mounting hardware to install a TS1120
(C06) Controller in a rack. Factory or field installed. Maximum: one. This feature is
mutually exclusive with FC 9885, FC 9886, FC 9887, and FC 9888.
Reinstall 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 4887)

This feature is the same as FC 3487, but allows the customer to provide a 2 Gb
Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3487) that was removed from a 3592 Model J70 or a 3953
Model F05 and reinstall it for attachment to a TS1120 (C06) Controller.
Field install only. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC3478 on the
TS1120 (C06) Controller. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3488, FC 3492, FC
3493, FC 4897, FC 9492, and FC 9493.

This feature is the same as FC 3488 but allows the customer to provide a 4 Gb
Fibre Channel Switch feature FC 3488 that was removed from a 3592 Controller or
a 3952 F05 Frame or 3953 F05 Frame and reinstall it for attachment to this TS1120
(C06) Controller. Factory or field installed. Maximum: two. Prerequisites: FC 3478.
This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3492, FC 3493, FC 4887, FC 9492, and FC
9493.
52
Enhanced Router (FC 5247)

This feature provides one 8-port router with enhanced capabilities. This feature
does not support IPv6. Order a second feature for out of band encryption
connection to the Encryption Key Manager.
Maximum: two. Prerequisites: FC 4641 and FC 9014. This feature is mutually
exclusive of FC 5248 and FC 5593.
Network 16-Port Switch (FC 5248)

This feature provides a 16-port switch for use in attaching to a customer network.
This features also supports IPv4/IPv6 environments and provides a single Ethernet
cable. This feature only provides one path to an Out-of-Band Encryption Key
Manager server.
Note: The 3592 C06 Controller has limited support for IPv6. IPv6 traffic is
restricted to the customer's connection only. When attached to a TS3400, the
3592-C06 supports IPv4 / IPv6 traffic for receiving SNMP traps from the attached
TS3400 libraries. When attached to a TS3400 or configured for a rack mounted
controller, IPv4 / IPv6 support is provided for a single path to enable Out-of-Band
Encryption key exchanges. The 3592-C06 blocks all other IPv4 / IPv6 inbound and
outbound traffic from the customer network.
Maximum: one.
Prerequisites: FC 4641. Mutually exclusive of FC 5593 and FC 5247.
Router for EKM attach (FC 5593)

This feature provides two routers for redundant paths between the Encryption Key
Manager and the tape controller through the customer network. Ethernet cables
from the routers to the tape controller are also provided.
This feature is only supported with encryption capable TS1120 (3592 E05), TS1130
(3592 E06), and TS1140 (3592 E07) Tape Drives. Not valid with 3592 J1A Tape
Drives or IBM TotalStorage 3590 Tape Drives.
Maximum: seven. Prerequisites: FC 4641, FC 5247. Plant or field installed. Mutually
Control Unit Encryption Configuration / Field (FC 5595)

Provides encryption configuration and reconfiguration support of the control unit
attached tape drives. The first time FC 5595 is ordered, it will ship the minimum
level control unit microcode required. The minimum level Library Manager
microcode will also be supplied if the control unit is not in a customer rack
solution (FC 4641). For inband encryption, no other control unit features are
required. For out-of-band encryption, FC 5593 is required on the 3592 Tape
Controller (Model C06 or J70), the Tape Frame (3952 Model F05 or 3953 Model
F05), the Library Manager Frame (3494 Model Lxx or the 3590 C10 frame) to
provide a path through the router to the EKM.
Maximum: 99. Field installation only. Mutually exclusive of FC 9595.
This feature is only supported with encryption capable 3592-E05 Tape Drives. It is
not valid with 3592 J1A or 3590 Tape Drives.
53
Attached to zSeries (FC 9000)

No power cords need be specified for the tape controller. It comes with a short
cord that plugs into the 3952 Tape Frame, 3953 F05 Frame, or rack, and takes
advantage of the external power cord of the box in which it is installed.
Attach TS3400 to Controller (FC 9014)

This feature indicates a TS1120 Tape Controller (3592 Model C06) will be attached
to tape drives in a TS3400 Tape Library. It ships the Ethernet cable to attach the
TS3400 to either FC 5247 or FC 5248. Install one FC 9014 on the 3592 Tape
Controller for each TS3400 Tape Library to be attached. See IBM System Storage
TS3400 Tape Library Planning and Operator Guide for more information.
Maximum: seven. Prerequisites: FC 4641, FC 5247, or FC 5248. Plant or field
installed.
3592 Tape Drive Attached to Model C06 (FC 9478)

This feature is required on all TS1120 (3592 C06) Controllers that will have a 3592
Tape Drive attached. Minimum: one. Maximum: one. Factory or field installed.
External Fabric Support - Plant (FC 9492)

This feature on the controller indicates that 3592 Tape Drives will be connected to
the TS1120 (C06) Controller through an external customer-supplied Fibre Channel
Switch.
Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 3478. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC
3488, FC 3492, FC 3493, FC 4887, FC 4897, and FC 9493.
channel switch. Cables from the switch or controller to the 3592 Tape Drives can be
ordered with the 3592 Tape Drives or supplied by the customer.
For the most recent list of C06-supported fibre channel switches, please visit
Direct Connect Drives - Plant (FC 9493)

This feature on the controller indicates that 3592 Tape Drives will be directly
connected to a TS1120 (C06) Controller. Direct connect drives require either this
feature or FC 3493 (Direct Connect Drives -- Field) specified on the TS1120 (C06)
Controller with one to four FC 3062.
Field installed. Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 3478. This feature is mutually
exclusive of FC 3488, FC 3492, FC 3493, FC 4887, FC 4897, and FC 9492.
Control Unit Encryption Configuration / Plant (FC 9595)

attached tape drives. This feature will ship the minimum level control unit
microcode required. The minimum level Library Manager microcode will also be
supplied if the control unit is not in a customer rack solution (FC 4641). For inband
encryption, no other control unit features are required. For out-of-band encryption,
FC 5593 is required on the 3592 tape controller (Model C06 or J70), the tape frame
(3952 Model F05 or 3953 Model F05), the Library Manager frame (3494 Model Lxx
or the 3590 C10 frame) to provide a path through the router to the EKM.
Maximum: one. Plant installation only. Mutually exclusive of FC 5595.
54
|
|
|
This feature is only supported with encryption capable 3592 E05, E06, and E07 tape
drives. It is not valid with 3592 J1A or 3590 tape drives. The 3592 E07 tape drive is
only supported with the 3592 C06 controller while in the encryption enabled mode.
Field Merge 3592 C06 into 3952 F05 (FC 9885)

This feature specifies the attachment of a new TS1120 (C06) Controller to an
installed 3952 F05 Frame.
Maximum: one. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 4641, FC 9886, FC 9887,
and FC 9888.
Corequisites: One field install/field merge 3592 Model C06 Feature (FC 5878, FC
5880) must be ordered on the 3952 F05 Frame.
Plant Install 3592 C06 in 3952 F05 for Silo (FC 9886)
This feature specifies the factory attachment of a new TS1120 (C06) Controller to a
new 3952 F05 Frame.
Maximum: one. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 4641, FC 9885, FC 9887,
and FC 9888.
Corequisites: One plant install TS1120 (C06) Controller FC 5879 must be ordered on
the 3952 F05 Frame.
Field Merge 3592 C06 in 3953 F05 (FC 9887)

This feature specifies that a TS1120 (C06) Controller will be field merged, or field
installed, into a 3953 F05 Frame.
Maximum: one.
Corequisites: One Field Install/Field Merge TS1120 (C06) Controller Feature (FC
5878, FC 5880) must be ordered on the 3953 F05 Frame.
Plant Install 3592 C06 in 3953 F05 (FC 9888)

This feature specifies the factory attachment of a new TS1120 (C06) Controller to a
3953 F05 Frame.
Maximum: one.
Corequisites: One Plant Install TS1120 (C06) Controller (FC 5879) must be ordered
on the 3953 F05 Frame.
Plant Install 3592 C06 in 3953 F05 for 3494 (FC 9889)
This feature provides for the factory installation of a new 3592 Model C06
Controller in a new 3952 Model F05 Frame from the plant. This feature must
appear on the Model C06 and FC 5879 and FC 7316 must appear on the 3952
Model F05 order.
Maximum: one. This Feature is mutually exclusive with FC 4641, FC 9885, FC 9887,
and FC 9888.
Prequisites: One plant install 3592 Model C06 Feature (FC 5879) must be ordered
on the 3952 Model F05. One Enterprise Tape Library Attachment feature (FC 7316)
must be ordered on the 3952 Model F05.
55
IPv6 Configuration (FC 9906)
Service/Call Home features

Table 25. C06 Feature codes for Service/Call Home features
Category
Feature Code
Service/Call Home
2714
Console Expansion
2715
Console Attachment
2719
TS3000 System Console Upgrade
2720
TS3000 System Console (withdrawn)
2721
2732
2733
TS3000 Internal Modem
Description
IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console features

The following features FC 2714, FC 2715, and FC 2732 provide connection to an
IBM System Storage TS3000 System Console to enable enhanced remote support to
improve availability and enable early detection of problems and unusual
conditions. The TS3000 System Console enables remote monitoring of each
attached unit to expedite microcode updates, reduce service times, and enhance
local service. The TS3000 System Console may be shared among the following
units:
v 3494 Model L10, L12, L14, L22, AX0, B10, B18, B20, and HA1
v VTC in a 3494 Model CX1

v TS7700 Virtualization Engine
v TS1120 (C06) Controller
v 3592 Model J70
v 3590 Model A60
To connect a 3592 controller to a TS3000 System Console, one of the following
features must be selected on the 3592 controller based on the number of units
attached to that master console facility in the installation.
Console Expansion (FC 2714): This feature provides an attachment cable for
connection of a TS3000 System Console (TSSC) and an Ethernet switch for
expanding the number of units that can be attached to the TSSC, or Master
Console for Service. Up to 14 additional connections are provided by this feature
for connection of FC 2715 or another FC 2714. FC 2714 can attach to any existing
FC 2721, FC 2722, or FC 2732.
A minimum of one FC 2714, FC 2715, or FC 2732 is required. A maximum of one
other Console Expansion (FC 2714) can be connected to the Ethernet switch
provided by this feature FC 2714. A maximum of two of feature FC 2714 may be
included in a single TS3000 System Console facility (providing a total maximum of
43 unit connections). Plant or field installable.
Console Attachment (FC 2715): This feature provides a cable to attach a unit to
the Ethernet switch provided by the TS3000 System Console, or Master Console
For Service, or Console Expansion (FC 2714). A maximum of 40 of feature FC 2715
may be included in a single TS3000 System Console facility. FC 2715 can attach to
any existing FC 2721, FC 2722, or FC 2732.
56
|
|
Minimum: one of FC 2714, FC 2715, or FC 2732 is required. Maximum: one of FC

2714, FC 2715, or FC 2732. Plant or field installable.
TS3000 System Console Upgrade (FC 2719): This feature provides a memory
upgrade to 2.1 GB (2 GiB) total RAM and a second ethernet card for the Service
Console to allow redundant connections into the service network. This feature only
applies to consoles shipped with FC 2718, FC 2720 and 3953-F05 FC 2721.
TS3000 System Console (FC 2720) (withdrawn): This feature provides the
enhanced TS3000 System Console, an Ethernet switch, and a cable and connectors
for connection of one of the above units to an IBM supplied modem to enable
remote enhanced service. This feature should be specified on the first unit in an
installation connected to a TS3000 System Console facility. The Ethernet switch
provides 14 additional connections for cables supplied with feature FC 2714 or FC
2715.
FC 2714 may be connected to FC 2720. FC 2720 Plant or field installable. The
3953-F05 FC 2721 may be used in place of FC 2720 (FC 2714 or FC 2715 still
required on controller).
TS3000 System Console (FC 2721): This feature provides the rack mountable
TS3000 System Console, an Ethernet switch for the Master Console and a cable and
connector for connection of one subsystem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
TS3000 System Console (FC 2732): This feature provides a rack mount version of
TS3000 System Console for installation. FC 2732 provides a 1U server, keyboard,
display, mouse, and Ethernet switch. Includes console upgrade previously
provided as FC 2719 (Memory upgrade to 2 GB total RAM and a second Ethernet
card for the Service Console to allow redundant connections into the service
network).
|
|

Corequisite: FC 2733 (Refer to the Limitations section ).
|
|
TS3000 Internal Modem (FC 2733): This feature provides an internal modem
installed in the TSSC server (FC 2732).
Maximum: one. Plant or field installable.
|
|
Corequisite: FC 2732 is required. Refer to the Limitations section for a list of

countries where the modem is qualified for use.
|
|
Limitations: FC 2733, Internal modem, is qualified for use in the following

countries:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Argentina, Australia, Bahrain, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Chile, China CCC, China
NALTE, Colombia, Costa Rica, Croatia, Ecuador, Egypt, Guatemala, Guyana,
Honduras, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Israel, Japan, Jordan, Kazakhstan, Korea,
Kuwait, Kyrgyzstan, Lebanon, Macau, Malaysia, Mexico, Morocco, New Zealand,
Nicaragua, Oman, Pakistan, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, Russia, Saudi
Arabia, Singapore, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Suriname, Taiwan, Thailand, Turkey,
UAE, Ukraine, United States, Uruguay, Vietnam, Venezuela, Austria, Belgium,
Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany,
57
Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,

Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom. Overseas regions of the
European Union, Portugal: Azores, Madeira, Spain: Canarias, France: Guyane,
Guadeloupe, Martinique, Runion. United States: includes U.S. Territories: Guam,
Northern Mariana Islands, Puerto Rico, U.S. Virgin Islands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fibre Channel environments and their feature codes

This section specifies feature for each of the following two fibre channel
environments:
v Features for the Fibre Channel Switches
For more details on the adapter and attachment features indicated below, see
Table 24 on page 48.
Features for the Fibre Channel Switches

When a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch is used, all mounting hardware,
twenty GBICs, dual power, and cooling fans are installed. The following
requirements apply in the specified environments:
3592 Model C06 controller requirements: The following requirements apply
when installing a 3592 Model C06 controller with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch.
v 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3488) or Reinstall 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
(FC 4897) or Reinstall 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 4887) must be specified
on the C06 controller. Two FC 3488s, FC 4887s, or two FC 4897s can be installed
for redundancy. Intermixing of 2 Gb and 4 Gb switches is not allowed on the
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller.
and
v Dual Ported Fibre Adapters (FC 3478) must be specified for each installed
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller.
v 3592 Drive Attach to Controller (FC 9478) must be specified on the C06
controller if attaching 3592 drives.
Rack requirements: The following features are required when installing the C06
controller in a rack environment with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch:
v Install Controller in a Rack (FC 4641) must be specified.
v Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount Kit (FC 3494) provides the hardware for
installing the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the rack and cables from the
C06 to the switch. Up to sixteen 3592 tape drives can be attached to a single C06
with this feature.
v Redundant FC Attach (FC 3495) provides the mounting hardware and
instructions for installing a second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the
rack. Any two of the following features must be installed for FC 3495: FC 3488,
FC 4887, or FC 4897.
v 3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch Cables (FC 3062) (see 3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch
Cables (FC 3062) on page 50) must be specified on the TS1120 (3592 C06)
Controller for each 3592 tape drive attached to the controller with the 2 Gb or 4
Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the rack.
58
3592 tape drives in a stand-alone rack: The following feature is required when
installing 3592 drives in a stand-alone rack with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch:
v LC/LC Fibre Channel Cables (FC 6013, FC 6025, or FC 6061) must be specified
on each tape drive not in the rack with the controller to provide one
short-wavelength cable to attach those tape drives to the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch.
Enterprise Tape Library 3494 features: The following features pertain when
installing a TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller in a 3952 Tape Frame with Outboard C06
Controller (FC 5266) and a 2 Gb (FC 4887 ) or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC
4888):
v FC Switch Mount Kit (FC 3486) must be specified on the 3494 Model D22 or
D24 frame that attaches to the C06 controller.
v Redundant FC Attach (FC 3490) may be added for redundancy. Two of FC 4887,
FC 3488, or FC 4897 must be installed for FC 3490.
v Adjacent Frame Fibre Channel 3592 (FC 4085) must be specified on the
associated 3494 Model L22 or D22 frame that contains the other 3592 tape drives
that will be attached to the C06 controller. When FC 4085 is ordered against a
3494 Model L22 or D22 frame, the correct number of 3592 Drive-to-Switch cables
for the 3494 Model L22 or D22 frame is provided, based on the number of 3592
tape drives ordered against the 3494 Model D22 or L22 frame.
v One 3592 Drive-to-Switch Cable (FC 3061) must be specified on the 3494 D24
Frame for each 3592 tape drive attached to the 2 Gb or 4 Gb switches.
3953 F05 Tape Frame features: The following features pertain when installing a
3592 Model C06 Controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame:
v 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3487) This feature provides a 2 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch with 20 LC Shortwave ports for attachment of up to 16 3592
Model E05 and J1A Tape Drives to a TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller.
Channel Switch with 20 LC Shortwave ports for attachment to 3592 Tape Drives
in the 3584 Tape Library. The 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch has dual power
connection for optional attachment to separate power supplies. For each TS1120
(3592 C06) Controller there is a maximum of two. For each VTS this feature
must be ordered in pairs.
v Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit (FC 4888) provides the mounting hardware
for the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame that
contains one or more TS1120 (3592 C06) Controllers. This feature includes the
required mounting hardware, bifurcated power cables, and instructions for
installing up to two Fibre Channel Switches in the frame. One FC 4888 must be
ordered for each TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller for which FC 3487, FC 3488, FC
4889, or FC 4897 will be ordered.
v Customer-Supplied 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 4889) allows a 2 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch provided by the customer to attach to the 3592 tape drives in a
3584 Tape Library. Two fibre channel switches are recommended for each
controller for redundancy, but only one is required. However, if only one switch
is installed per controller, it must be installed in the lower of the two positions.
This feature can be ordered in any quantity from one to six for each frame. One
FC 4888, Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit, must be ordered for each TS1120
(3592 C06) Controller for which FC 4889 will be ordered.
59
FC 4888, Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit, must be ordered for each TS1120
(3592 C06) Controller for which FC 4897 will be ordered.
Features for External Fabric Support (FC 3492, FC 9492)

When connecting 3592 tape drives to a TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller using external
fabric (FC 3492 - field installed, FC 9492 - Plant installed), the following
3592 Controller zoning requirements: When using a supported,
customer-supplied Fibre Channel director (see Fibre Channel switches for the C06
and J70 controllers on page 21), connectivity is through 2 Gb or 4 Gb multimode
ports. Supported directors can be connected to single or dual ports on the 3592
tape drives. Each director must be zoned to ensure the only devices in the zone are
the controller and 3592 tape drives. Up to two zones can be configured per
controller in order to provide failover in the event of a controller adapter, director,
blade or port failure. This requires each controller adapter (FC 3478) to be
connected to a separate zone and each 3592 tape drive port connected to those
separate zones. The cables from the controller to the director and from the director
to the tape drives can be ordered against the 3592 tape drives.
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller requirements: The following requirements apply
when connecting 3592 Model J1A and E05 tape drives to a TS1120 (C06) Controller
using external fabric:
v Two Dual Ported LC Fibre Drive Adapters (FC 3478) must be specified for each
installed TS1120 (C06) Controller.
v Drive Attached to Controller (FC 9478) must be specified on the TS1120 (C06)
Controller.
v Either External Fabric Support Field (FC 3492) or External Fabric Support Plant
(FC 9492) must be specified on the TS1120 (C06) Controller.
Enterprise Tape Library 3494 features: The following requirements apply when
connecting 3592 tape drives to a 3592 Model C06 controller using external fabric in
a 3494 environment:
(FC 9492) must be specified on the D24, and D22 or L22 adjacent frames.
Features for Direct Connect Support (FC 3493, FC 9493)

For limited configurations, four 3592 drives can be attached to a controller using
direct connect support (FC 3493 - field installed, FC 9493 - plant installed). One FC
3061 must be ordered for each 3592 drive in a rack. Cables from the controller to
the 3592 drives can be ordered with the 3592 drive or supplied by the customer. To
attach additional drives, any of the Fibre Channel options can be ordered (see
Fibre Channel switches for the C06 and J70 controllers on page 21). Additional
drives may be added later via any of the other switch options.
3592 Model J70 Controller and associated frame features

|
|
For features listed in numerical order, refer to Table 26 on page 61 and refer to J70
and associated frame feature descriptions on page 63.
60
following sections:
v Features for external fabric support on page 80
v Features for the IBM TotalStorage Storage Area Network Switch Model F16 on
page 81
v Features for the IBM TotalStorage SAN switch Model S16 on page 83
Table 26. Feature codes for Model J70 control units and associated features
Feature Code
Machine Type/Model
0520
3592 Model J70, 3494 Models Lxx
3059
3592 Model J70
3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch Cables
3413
3592 Model J70
Dual ESCON Host Adapter
3434
3592 Model J70
2 Gb/s FICON Long Wave

Attachment
3435
3592 Model J70
2 Gb/s FICON Short Wave

Attachment
3413 to 3434
3592 Model J70
Convert Dual ESCON Host Adapter

to 2 Gb LW FICON Adapter
3413 to 3435
3592 Model J70
Convert Dual ESCON Host Adapter

to SW FICON Adapter
3434 to 3435
3592 Model J70
Convert 2 Gb LW FICON Host

Adapter to 2 Gb SW FICON
Adapter
3435 to 3434
3592 Model J70
Convert 2 Gb SW FICON Adapter

to 2 Gb LW FICON Adapter
3464
3465
3474
Description
Functional Enhancement Field
3590 Model A14, 3494 Models D14, Fibre Drive Attach Controller
D24
3592 Model J70 (for rack
installation)
SC Fibre Switch Controller in Rack
3590 Model A14, 3494 Models D14, LC Fibre Drive Attached Controller
D24
3475

installation)
LC Fibre Switch Controller in Rack
3476
3592 Model J70
Two LC Fibre Drive Adapters
3477
3592 Model J70
Dual Ported SCSI Drive Adapters
3478
3592 Model J70
Two Dual Ported Fibre Channel

Drive Adapters
3483
3592 Model J70
Drive Attach to SC Switch
3484
3592 Model J70
Drive Attach to LC Switch
3485

installation)
2 Gb Fibre Channel Drive Attach

Rack
3486
3590 Model A14, 3494 Model

D14/D24
Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit
61
Table 26. Feature codes for Model J70 control units and associated features (continued)
62
Feature Code
Machine Type/Model
3487
3592 Model J70
3488
3494 Model D22, 3592 Model J70,

3953 Model F05
3489

installation)
3490

D14/D24
3491
3592 Model J70, 3494 Models

D22/D24/L22
External Fabric Support Field
4060
3590 Model A14
4065

installation)3494 Models D22/L22
Multiframe SCSI Rack

AttachAdjacent Frame 3592 Tape
Drives with SC Attachment
4075
3494 Models L22, D22
Adjacent Frame 3592 Tape Drives

with LC Attachment
4084

D12/L12 Frame
4085
3494 Model D22/L22
4641

installation)
4772
3494 Models D22, D24, L22
Remove E05/J1A Drive
4800
3494 Models D22, D24, L22
Install Cradle Pair
4801
3494 Models D22, D24, L22
Remove Cradle Pair
4803
3494 Models D22, D24, L22
Reinstall Cradle Pair
4855
3494 Models D14, D24
4860
3590 Model A14, 3494 D14/D24
4865
3494 Model D14/D24
4868
3590 Model A14
Field Install J70 in a 3590 Model

A14 Frame
4887
3592 Model J70
4889
3592 Model J70, 3953 F05

in 3953 F05 frame
4890
3592 Model J70, 3953 F05
Reinstall 2109 F16 Fibre Channel

Switch in 3953 F05 frame
4897
3592 Model J70
5593
3592 Model J70
5595
3592 Model J70

configuration / Field
9000
3592 J70 Controller
9059
3592 Model J70
J70 to 3590 Attachment
9060
3592 Model J70
Multiframe SCSI A14
Description
(Withdrawal from marketing
announced May 9, 2006)
Redundant 2 Gb Attach Rack
Multiframe SCSI A14
Multiframe 2 Gb 3590
Adjacent Frame 2 Gb 3592
Install J70 Control Unit in Rack
Field Install J70 in 3494

Replace Controller with a 3592
Model J70
Remove J70 Controller from a 3494
Model D14/D24 Frame
Attach to System z
Table 26. Feature codes for Model J70 control units and associated features (continued)
Feature Code
Machine Type/Model
Description
9476
3592 Model J70
J1A Drive Attached to Controller
9477
3592 Model J70
3592 Drive Attached to J70

Controller
9491
3592 Model J70, 3494 Model

D22/D24/L22
9595
3592 Model J70

configuration / Plant
9673
3494 Models D22, D24, L22
Factory Install J1A Drive
9676
3494 Models D22, D24, L22
Factory Install E05 Drive
9865
3592 Model J70, 3494 Model D14,

D24
Field Merge J70 in a 3494 Model

D14/D24 Frame
9866
3592 Model J70, 3494 Model D14,

D24
Plant Install 3592 Model J70 in a

3494 Model D14/D24 Frame
9867
3592 Model J70, 3590 Model A14

3590 Model A14 Frame
9868
3592 Model J70, 3590 Model A14
Field Merge 3592 Model J70 in a

3590 Model A14 Frame
9875
3592 Model J70
Field Merge 3592 Model J70 in a

3953 Model F05 Frame
9876
3592 Model J70

3953 Model F05 Frame (Withdrawal
from marketing announced May 9,
2006)
9877
3592 Model J70
Field Install 3592 Model J70 in 3952

F05
External Fabric Support/Plant

(Withdrawal from marketing
Note: For more information on 3590 Model A14 features, refer to the IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0329. For more
information on 3494 Model frame features, refer to the IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library
Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448. For more information on 3953 Model F05
features, refer to the IBM TotalStorage 3953 Tape Frame Model F05 and Library Manager Model
L05 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0472.
J70 and associated frame feature descriptions

Functional Enhancement Field (FC0520)
This feature provides a microcode upgrade to the 3592 Model J70 controller to
support:
v The Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended. You must update controller
microcode installed before December 8, 2006.
v The non-disruptive addition of 3592 drives to an installed and operating 3592
Model J70 controller. This feature must be added to any J70 that was shipped
prior to October 29, 2004.
This feature, when ordered for both the 3592 Model J70 and the 3494 Lxx frame,
provides:
v Application performance and enhancements, including support of WORM
capability of the 3592 drives. It is required to utilize WORM and Economy
Cartridge capability in any 3592 drives attached to the J70 controller. This feature
63
must be added to any J70 that was shipped prior to May 21, 2004. If the 3592
controller and 3592 drives are installed in a 3494 library, this feature must also
be ordered against the LXX frame to utilize WORM and Economy Cartridges
capability. This feature adds support for attachment to the 3953 L05 Library
Manager to J70s shipped before May 27, 2005. Refer to the IBM TotalStorage
Automated Tape Library (3494) Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0448, for
additional information on 3494 FC 0520.
3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch Cables (FC 3059)

This feature provides the necessary hardware and a single Fibre Channel cable
between a 3592 Tape Drive and a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch or the F16 or
S16 model 2109 switch in a rack or frame for connection to a Model J70 Controller
installed in that rack. The number of this feature specified should equal the
number of 3592 Tape Drives in the rack or frame attached to the Model J70 in that
rack.
Dual ESCON Host Adapter (FC 3413)

attachments using features FC 3413, FC 3434, and FC 3435 described below.
This feature installs a dual-ported ESCON adapter for the attachment of 3590 and
3592 tape drives through the 3592 Model J70 controller. The adapter provides an
MT-RJ conformant connector. Each port on the adapter can support up to 64 logical
channels and, using ESCON Directors, can be up to 43 kilometers from the host
system. Feature conversions are available to convert FC 3413 to FC 3434 or FC
3435. Maximum: Four. Plant or field installation.
For information on ESCON cable features, see Dual ESCON attachment for 3592
controller cable features on page 91.
2 Gb FICON Long Wave Attachment (FC 3434)

This feature provides one longwavelength 2 Gb FICON adapter, with LC Duplex
Connectors for the attachment of 3590 or 3592 tape drives through the 3592 Model
J70 controller to a FICON host system longwave channel utilizing a 9micron
single mode fibre cable. Each 2 Gb FICON attachment can support up to 128
logical channels. A feature conversion is available to convert FC 3434 to FC 3435.
Maximum: Four. Plant or field installation.
For information on appropriate FICON cable features, see FICON
long-wavelength attachment cable features on page 93.
2 Gb FICON Short Wave Attachment (FC 3435)

This feature provides one shortwavelength FICON adapter, with an LC Duplex
connector, for the attachment of the 3590 or 3592 tape drives through the 3592
Model J70 controller to a FICON host system shortwavelength channel utilizing a
50micron fibre cable. The total cable length cannot exceed 300 meters. Each 2 Gb
FICON attachment can support up to 128 logical channels. A feature conversion is
available to convert FC 3435 to FC 3434. Maximum: Four. Plant or field installation.
64

short-wavelength attachment cable features on page 94.
Convert Dual ESCON Host Adapter to 2 Gb LW FICON Adapter

(3413 to 3434)
This feature provides for the removal of the ESCON adapter, FC 3413, from the
3592 Model J70 controller and the replacement with FC 3434, the 2 Gb LW FICON
adapter. The ESCON adapter is returned. A FICON cable specify feature should be
included with the feature conversion to ship the desired cable option (FC 9700, FC
9752, or FC 9753). Maximum: Four. Field installation only.
Convert Dual ESCON Host Adapter to SW FICON Adapter (3413

to 3435)
This feature provides for the removal of the ESCON adapter, FC 3413, from the
3592 Model J70 controller and the replacement with FC 3435, the 2 Gb SW FICON
adapter. The ESCON adapter is returned. A FICON cable specify feature should be
included with the feature conversion to ship the desired cable option (FC 9700, FC
9752, or FC 9753). Maximum: Four. Field installation only.
Convert 2 Gb LW FICON Host Adapter to 2 Gb SW FICON

Adapter (3434 to 3435)
This feature provides for the removal of the 2 Gb LW FICON adapter, FC 3434,
from the 3592 Model J70 controller and the replacement with FC 3435, the 2 Gb SW
FICON adapter. The 2 Gb LW FICON adapter is returned. A FICON cable specify
feature should be included with the feature conversion to ship the desired cable
option (FC 9700, FC 9762, or FC 9763). Maximum: Four. Field installation only.
Convert 2 Gb SW FICON Adapter to 2 Gb LW FICON Adapter

(3435 to 3434)
This feature provides for the removal of the 2 Gb SW FICON adapter, FC 3435,
from the 3592 Model J70 controller and the replacement with FC 3434, the 2 Gb
LW FICON adapter. The 2 Gb SW FICON adapter is returned. A FICON cable
specify feature should be included with the feature conversion to ship the desired
cable option (FC 9700, FC 9752, or FC 9753). Maximum: Four. Field installation
only.
SC Fibre Switch Controller in Rack (FC 3465)

Note: The IBM 2109 Model S16 SAN Fibre Channel switch is no longer marketed
by IBM.
This feature provides the required mounting hardware and instructions for
installing the IBM 2109 Model S16 SAN Fibre Channel switch in the rack, the
fibre-switch to controller fibre channel cabling, as well as the associated ethernet
router and ethernet cabling between the controller, router, and fibre switch. The
65
2109 Model S16 SAN Fibre Channel limits the number of 3592 tape drives which
can be attached to the J70 Controller to twelve.Corequisites:
v IBM 2109 SAN Fibre Channel switch Model S16 must be installed in the rack
v When Model S16 is installed, additional S16 features FC 2010 (Shortwave GBIC)
will be required for each 3592 drive in excess of two
v FC 6103 (Power Supply, Additional) which provides an additional redundant
power supply enabling dual-power source configurations to minimize power
outages should also be present with the 2109 Model S16
v J70 used in the frame and must have feature FC 3483
v Two LC/SC controller-to-switch cables
This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3475 and FC 3485.
LC Fibre Switch Controller in Rack (FC 3475)

Note: The IBM 2109 Model F16 SAN Fibre Channel switch will no longer be
marketed by IBM beginning January 2005.
This feature provides the required mounting hardware and instructions for
installing the 2109 Model F16 SAN Fibre Channel switch in the rack, the
fibre-switch to controller fibre channel cabling, as well as the associated ethernet
router and ethernet cabling between the controller, router, and fibre switch. The
2109 Model F16 SAN Fibre Channel limits the number of 3592 tape drives which
can be attached to the J70 Controller to twelve.Corequisites:
v IBM 2109 SAN Fibre Channel switch Model F16 must be installed in the rack
v When Model F16 is installed, additional F16 features FC 2210 (Shortwave GBIC)
will be required for each 3592 drive in excess of six
v FC 6103 (Power Supply, Additional), which provides an additional redundant
outages due to a failed power supply, should also be present with the 2109
Model F16
v J70 used in the frame and must have feature FC 3484
v Two LC/LC controller-to-switch cables
Two LC Fibre Drive Adapters (FC 3476)

This feature installs two short-wavelength 2 Gb Fibre Channel adapters with LC
connectors in a 3592 Model J70 Controller for attaching up to twelve 3592 Tape
Drives when attached through a 2109 SAN Fibre Channel Switch, or sixteen 3592
Tape Drives when attached through a 2 Gb/4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch, or twelve
3590 Tape Drives with Fibre Channel Attachment through a 2109 SAN Fibre
Channel Switch or the 2 Gb/4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch. Total cable length from
the adapters to the switch cannot exceed 500 meters.
Dual Ported SCSI Drive Adapters (FC 3477)

This feature installs two dual ported ultra SCSI adapters in a 3592 Model J70
controller for attaching parallel SCSI 3590 drives via the Fast20 protocol. Total cable
length from the adapters to the switch cannot exceed 25 meters. Adapter to drive
connectivity is provided via daisy chained SCSI bus. Any cards currently placed in
the slots for these cards must be removed. A fibre switch feature cannot be
installed in the frame. Only 3590 SCSI drives are supported with this adapter.
Maximum: One. Plant or field installation.
66
Two Dual Ported LC Fibre Channel Drive Adapters (FC 3478)

This feature installs two short-wavelength 4 Gb Dual Ported Fibre Channel
adapters with LC connectors in a 3592 Model J70 Controller for attaching up to 12
3592 Tape Drives, or 12 3590 Tape Drives with Fibre Channel Attachment (FC 3510
or FC 9510), through a 2109 SAN Fibre Channel or the 2 Gb/4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch. Total cable length from the adapters to the switch cannot exceed 500
meters. Maximum: One. Mutually exclusive of FC 3477 ( Dual-Ported SCSI Drive
Adapters) or FC 3476 (Two LC Fibre Channel Drive Adapters). Plant or field
installation.
Drive Attach to SC Switch (FC 3483)

In a 3592 Model J70 controller, this ships controller microcode support for 3590 or
3592 drive attachment through a 2109 Model S16 switch, but does not ship FCP
adapters. A fibre switch feature must be installed in the frame, along with fibre
drives. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3484 and FC 3486. Maximum: One.
Plant or field installation.
Drive Attach to LC Switch (FC 3484)

This feature enables attachment of 3592 drives or 3590 H model or E model Tape
Drives with Fibre Channel Attachment (features FC 3510 or FC 9510) through a
2109 Model F16. This feature is mutually exclusive with FC 3483 and FC 3486.
Maximum: One. Plant or field installation. Corequisites: All attaching 3590 Tape
Drives must have either feature FC 3510 or FC 9510.
Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount Kit (FC 3485)

This feature is ordered against the 3592 Model J70 controller for stand-alone rack
installations.
This feature provides the required hardware to support attachment of 3592 Tape
Drives, or 3590 Tape Drives with Fibre Channel Attachment (FC 3510 or FC 9510),
through a 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3487 or FC 4887) or a 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch ( FC 3488 or FC 4897) for connection to a 3592 Model J70
Controller in a rack. It includes the mounting hardware and instructions for
installing the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the rack, including associated
Ethernet cabling between the Model J70 and the switch.
Fibre Channel cables from the 3592 Tape Drives to the switch in the rack with the
Model J70 are included by specifying feature #3059 (one for each tape drive). Fibre
Channel cables from the 3590 Fibre Channel Tape Drives to the switch in the rack
with the Model J70 are included by specifying feature #9059 (one for each tape
drive). For the multi-rack attachment of 3592 or 3590 Tape Drives in other racks to
the switch, the cables should be ordered with the drives.
The switch will operate in 1 Gb mode only if the drives in the environment are
3590 Tape Drives. Plant or field install. Maximum: One. Minimum: None.
Prerequisites: FC 4641 plus FC 3487, FC 4887, FC 3488, or FC 4897 must be
installed on the 3592 Model J70 Controller.
Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit (FC 3486)

This feature is ordered against either the 3590 Model A14 or the 3494 Model D14
or D24.
This feature provides the mounting hardware for the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch on the 3590 Model A14 Frame or the 3494 Model D14 or D24 that contains
67
a 3592 Model J70 Controller that supports attachment of 3590 Tape Drives with
Fibre Channel Attachment (FC 3510 or FC 9510) or 3592 tape drives. It includes the
required mounting hardware and instructions for installing a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch in the 3590 Model A14 or the 3494 Model D14 or D24, including
associated Ethernet router and cabling between the 3592 Model J70 Controller and
the switch in the 3590 Model A14 or the 3494 Model D14 or D24. Up to twelve
3590 Tape Drives in three Model A14 Frames can be attached to the 3592 Model J70
Controller. Up to 10 3590 Tape Drives in the two 3494 adjacent frames can be
attached to the 3592 Model J70 Controller. Up to 16 3592 tape drives in a 3494
Model D24/D22/L22 combination can be attached to the 3592 Model J70
Controller.
Plant or field install. Maximum: One. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC 3487 or
FC 4887 or FC 3488 or FC 4897 must be installed on the 3592 Model J70 Controller.
FC 3486 is mutually exclusive of 3494 frame features FC 3464, FC 3474, FC 4060,
FC 4064, FC 4065, FC 4074, FC 4075, FC 4084, and FC 4085, and with 3592 Model
J70 Controller features FC 3483 and FC 3484.
2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3487) (Withdrawal from marketing

This feature is ordered against the 3592 Model J70 Controller.
attachment of up to 16 3592 Tape Drives or 12 3590 Tape Drives to a 3592 Model
J70 Controller. Hardware errors detected on the switch are managed by the 3592
Model J70 Controller. The 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch has dual power connection
for attachment to separate power supplies and fully populated with twenty GBICs.
Intermix of 3590 and 3592 Tape Drives is not allowed. Intermix of 2 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch FC 3487 and the 4 Gb Fibre channel Switch FC 3488 is not
allowed.
Plant or field install. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. The Fibre Channel Switch
types attached to the Model J70 Controller must be the same 2 Gb or 4 Gb and
cannot be intermixed. Prerequisites: FC 3476 or FC 3478 must be installed on the
3592 Model J70 Controller, and this feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3483, FC
3484, FC 3488, FC 3491, and FC 9491.
4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3488)

attachment of up to 16 3592 Tape Drives or 12 3590 Tape Drives to a 3592 Model
J70 Controller. Hardware errors detected on the switch are managed by the 3592
Model J70 Controller. The 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch has dual power connection
for attachment to separate power supplies and fully populated with twenty GBICs.
Intermix of 3590 and 3592 Tape Drives is not allowed. Intermix of 2 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch FC 3487 and the 4 Gb Fibre channel Switch FC 3488 is not
allowed.
Plant or field install. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC 3476 or
FC 3478 must be installed on the 3592 Model J70 Controller, and this feature is
mutually exclusive of FC 3483, FC 3484, FC 3487, FC 3491, and FC 9491.
Redundant FC Rack Attach (FC 3489)

This feature is ordered against the 3592 Model J70 controller for stand-alone rack
installations.
68
second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the rack.
Plant or field install. Maximum: One. Minimum: None.Prerequisites: FC 3485 on
the 3592 Model J70 controller. A second FC 3487 or FC 4887 or FC 3488 or FC 4897
on the 3592 Model J70 controller is required.
Redundant Fibre Channel Attach (FC 3490)

This feature is ordered against either the 3590 Model A14 or the 3494 Model D14
or D24.
second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the 3590 Model A14 Frame or 3494
Model D14 or D24.
Plant or field install. Maximum: One. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC 3486 must
be installed.
External Fabric Support Field (FC 3491)

This feature is ordered against the 3592 Model J70 Controller and either the 3494
Model D22, D24, or L22.
This feature on the controller and on the 3494 frame indicates that 3592 Model E05
or J1A Tape Drives will be connected to the 3592 Model J70 Controller through an
external customer-supplied Fibre Channel switch or directly to the controller. One
or two 3592 tape drives may be directly attached to the 3592 Model J70. FC 3059
should be ordered for each drive. (This feature is not supported on a frame with a
3590 Model A60 Controller.)
For the most recent list of 3592-supported fibre channel switches, please visit
http://www.ibm.com/support/techdocs/atsmastr.nsf/webindex/fq109793.
The customer is responsible for providing the cables from the 3592 Model J70 to a
customer-supplied Fibre Channel Switch. (Cables from the switch or controller to
the 3592 Tape Drives can be ordered with the 3592 Tape Drives or supplied by the
customer.)
Field install only. Maximum: One. Minimum: None.Prerequisites: FC 3476 or FC
3478 must be specified on the 3592 Model J70. This feature is mutually exclusive of
FC 3483, FC 3484, FC 3487, FC 3488, FC 4887, FC 4897, FC 9491 on the 3592 Model
J70, and is mutually exclusive of FC 3486, FC 4065, FC 4075, FC 4085, and FC 9491
on the frame(s).
Multiframe SCSI Rack Attach (FC 4065)

This feature includes cables to connect the Model J70 Controller to tape drives in
the second rack, and necessary drive-to-drive interconnection cables in that rack.
Because of SCSI cable length restrictions, the two racks must be installed adjacent
to each other. This feature is mutually exclusive with FC 3465, FC 3475, FC 3483,
FC 3484, and FC 3485.
Multiframe 2 Gb 3590 (FC 4084)

This feature is ordered against either the 3590 Model A14 or the 3494 Models D12
or L12.
This feature provides the hardware and installation instructions to support
attachment of 3590 Tape Drives with Fibre Channel Attachment (FC 3510 or FC
69
9510) in a 3590 Model A14 Frame or a 3494 Model D12 or L12 Frame to a 3592
Model J70 controller in a different Model A14 Frame or adjacent 3494 Model D14
Frame. This feature allows for a Fibre Channel cable from each tape drive to the 2
Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the Model A14 Frame or 3494 Model D14
Frame with the 3592 Model J70 Controller to be included based on the number of
drives installed in this frame. The distance between the Model A14 Frames in this
multiframe fibre configuration must be no more than 7 meters (23 feet). If another
controller is installed in this Model A14 Frame, that controller will be
non-functional. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. Plant or field installation. One
FC 3487 or FC 4887, or FC 3488 or FC 4897 must be ordered on the Model J70
controller in the adjacent frame for each of these features ordered. Order one FC
4084 if the 3494 Model D14 has FC 3486 only, two if the Model D14 has FC 3486
and FC 3490. This feature is mutually exclusive of frame features FC 3464, FC 3474,
FC 4060, FC 4062, FC 4064, FC 4074, and FC 9062.
Adjacent Frame Fibre Channel 3592 (FC 4085)

This feature is ordered against either the 3494 Model D22 or L22.
This feature provides the hardware and installation instructions to support
attachment of 3592 Tape Drives in a 3494 Model D22 or L22 Frame to a 3592
Model J70 Controller with the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in an adjacent
Model D24 Frame. Up to 16 3592 Tape Drives can be attached to the 3592 Model
J70, up to eight in the Model D24 Frame and up to four in the Model L22 or eight
in the Model D22 Frame. When FC 4085 is ordered against a 3494 Model L22 or
D22 frame, the correct number of 3592 Drive-to-Switch cables for the 3494 Model
L22 or D22 frame is provided, based on the number of 3592 tape drives ordered
against the 3494 Model D22 or L22 frame. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. Plant
or field installation. One FC 3487 or FC 4887 or 3488 or 4897 must be ordered on
the J70 controller in the adjacent frame for each of these features ordered. Order
one FC 4085 if the 3494 Model D24 has FC 3486 only, two if the Model D24 has FC
3486 and FC 3490. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3491, FC 4065, FC 4075,
and FC 9491.
Install J70 Control Unit in Rack (FC 4641)

This feature provides the rack mounting hardware to install a J70 controller in a
rack. Field installation only.
Replace Controller with a 3592 Model J70 (FC 4860)

A60 controller with a 3592 Model J70 controller in a currently installed 3494 Model
D14/D24 or 3590 Model A14 frame. Maximum: One. Field installation only.
Remove J70 Controller from a 3494 Model D14/D24 Frame (FC

4865)
This feature allows the field removal of a J70 controller from an installed 3494
Model D14/D24 frame. This feature is for currently installed units only. All tape
drives in the 3494 Model D14/D24 frame and their associated features must also
be removed. Maximum: One. Field removal only.
Field Install J70 in a 3590 Model A14 Frame (FC 4868)

This feature is required to provide the mounting hardware to add a J70 controller
to a currently installed 3590 Model A14 frame. This feature is not available if FC
9012 is installed. Maximum: One. Field installation only.

70
This feature is the same as FC 3487, but allows the customer to provide a 2 Gb
Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3487) that was removed from a 3592 Model J70 or a 3953
Model F05 and reinstall it for attachment to a 3592 Model J70.
Field install only. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC 3476 or FC
3478 on the 3592 Model J70 controller. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC
3483, FC 3484, FC 3491, and FC 9491.

This feature is the same as feature #3488 but allows the customer to provide a 4 Gb
Fibre Channel Switch feature (#3488) that was removed from a 3592 Model J70 or a
3953 Model F05 and reinstall it for attachment to this 3592 Model J70.
Field install only. Maximum: Two. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC 3476 or FC
3478 on the 3592 Model J70 controller. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC
3483, FC 3484, FC 3491, and FC 9491.

Control Unit Encryption Configuration / Field (FC 5595)

attached tape drives. The first time FC 5595 is ordered, it will ship the minimum
level control unit microcode required. The minimum level Library Manager
microcode will also be supplied if the control unit is not in a customer rack
solution (FC 4641). For inband encryption, no other control unit features are
required. For out-of-band encryption, FC 5593 is required on the 3592 Tape
Controller (Model C06 or J70), the Tape Frame (3952 Model F05 or 3953 Model
F05), the Library Manager Frame (3494 Model Lxx or the 3590 C10 frame) to
provide a path through the router to the EKM.
Maximum: 99. Field installation only. Mutually exclusive of FC 9595.
This feature is only supported with encryption capable 3592-E05 Tape Drives. It is
not valid with 3592 J1A or 3590 Tape Drives.
Attached to zSeries (FC 9000)

No power cords need be specified for the tape controller. It comes with a short
cord that plugs into the 3952 Tape Frame, 3953 F05 Frame, or rack, and takes
advantage of the external power cord of the box in which it is installed.
J70 to 3590 Attachment (FC 9059)

This feature provides the necessary hardware and a single cable to connect a 3590
tape drive in a 3494 Model D14 frame, 3590 Model A14 frame, or stand-alone rack
to a 3592 Model J70 controller installed in that frame or rack. One of these features
71
should be specified for each 3590 tape drive attached to the J70 controller in that
frame or rack. Maximum: Four. Plant or field installation.
Multiframe SCSI A14 (FC 9060)

This feature is required on the J70 controller to support SCSI multiframe
attachment of up to eight 3590 tape drives in two different 3590 Model A14 frames.
This feature must be on both the J70 and the 3590 Model A14 frame containing the
J70. Maximum: One. Plant or field installation.
3592 Drive Attached to Controller (FC 9476)

This feature provides controller support for 3592 J1A tape drives for all
environments. This feature is mandatory for any A60 or J70 controller attaching
3592 drives. Maximum: One. Plant or field installation.
3592 Tape Drive attached to J70 Controller (FC 9477)

This feature is required on all 3592 Model J70 Controllers that will have a 3592
Model J1A or E05 Tape Drive attached to the 3592 Model J70. Maximum: one. This
feature is mutually exclusive of Feature FC 9476.
External Fabric Support/Plant (FC 9491) (Withdrawal from

This feature is ordered against the 3592 Model J70 Controller and either the 3494
Model D22, D24, or L22.
This feature on the controller and on the 3494 frame indicates that 3592 tape drives
will be connected to the 3592 Model J70 Controller through an external
customer-supplied Fibre Channel switch or directly to the controller. One or two
3592 tape drives may be directly attached to the 3592 Model J70. FC 3059 should
be ordered for each drive. (This feature is not supported on a frame with a 3590
Model A60 Controller.)
For the most recent list of J70-supported fibre channel switches, please visit
The customer is responsible for providing the cables from the 3592 Model J70 to a
customer-supplied Fibre Channel Switch. (Cables from the switch or controller to
the 3592 Model J1A Tape Drives can be ordered with the 3592 Tape Drives or
supplied by the customer.)
Plant install only. Maximum: One. Minimum: None. Prerequisites: FC 3476 or FC
3478 must be specified on the 3592 Model J70. This feature is mutually exclusive of
FC 3483, FC 3484, FC 3487, FC 3488, FC 3491, FC 4887, and FC 4897 on the 3592
Model J70, and is mutually exclusive of FC 3486, FC 3491, FC 4065, FC 4075, and
FC 4085 on the frame(s).
Control Unit Encryption Configuration / Plant (FC 9595)

attached tape drives. This feature will ship the minimum level control unit
microcode required. The minimum level Library Manager microcode will also be
supplied if the control unit is not in a customer rack solution (FC 4641). For inband
encryption, no other control unit features are required. For out-of-band encryption,
FC 5593 is required on the 3592 tape controller (Model C06 or J70), the tape frame
(3952 Model F05 or 3953 Model F05), the Library Manager frame (3494 Model Lxx
or the 3590 C10 frame) to provide a path through the router to the EKM.
Maximum: one. Plant installation only. Mutually exclusive of FC 5595.
72
|
|
|
This feature is only supported with encryption capable 3592 E05, E06, and E07 tape
drives. It is not valid with 3592 J1A or 3590 tape drives. The 3592 E07 tape drive is
only supported with the 3592 C06 controller while in the encryption enabled mode.
Field Merge J70 in a 3494 Model D14/D24 Frame (FC 9865)

This feature allows the field merge of a J70 controller in a 3494 Model D14 or D24
frame. This feature notifies the factory to leave a mounting slot available for a field
merge of a J70 tape control unit prior to completion of installation. FC 9865 must
also be ordered on both the J70 controller and the frame. Maximum: One. This
applies to the sum of features FC 4660, FC 4665, FC 4855, FC 4860, FC 5266, FC
9665, FC 9666, FC 9865, and FC 9866. Plant installation only.
Plant Install 3592 Model J70 in a 3494 Model D14/D24 Frame (FC
9866)
This feature factory installs a J70 controller in a new 3494 Model D14 or D24 frame
from the plant. FC 9866 must be ordered on both the J70 controller and the frame.
Maximum: One. This applies to the sum of features FC 4660, FC 4665, FC 4855, FC
4860, FC 5266, FC 9665, FC 9666, FC 9865, and FC 9866. Plant installation only.
Plant Install 3592 Model J70 in a 3590 Model A14 Frame (FC
9867)
This specify feature factory installs a new J70 controller into a new 3590 Model A14
frame from the plant. This feature must appear on both the J70 and Model A14
orders. Maximum: One. Plant installation only
Field Merge 3592 Model J70 in a 3590 Model A14 Frame (FC
9868)
This specify feature notifies the plant that a J70 controller will be field merged into
a 3590 Model A14 frame coming from the plant, as part of the final customer
installation. Maximum: One. Plant installation only.
Field Merge 3592 Model J70 in a 3953 Model F05 Frame (FC
9875)
a new 3953 Model F05 frame coming from the plant, as part of the final customer
installation. This feature requires that FC 5875, Field Merge 3592 Model J70 in a
3953 Model F05 Frame, be ordered against the 3953 F05 frame. In a 3584 tape
library, it is recommended that up to four drives be set as control paths for each
logical library. See the IBM TotalStorage 3953 Tape Frame Model F05 and Library
Manager Model L05 Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0472, for any additional
requirements. Maximum: One. Plant installation only.
Plant Install 3592 Model J70 in a 3953 Model F05 Frame (FC
9876) (Withdrawal from marketing announced May 9, 2006)
This specify feature factory installs a new J70 controller into a new 3953 Model F05
frame from the plant. This feature requires that FC 5876, Plant Install 3592 Model
J70 in a 3953 Model F05 Frame, be ordered against the 3953 F05 frame. In a 3584
tape library, it is recommended that up to four drives be set as control paths for
each logical library. See the IBM TotalStorage 3953 Tape Frame Model F05 and Library
Field Install J70 in 3952 F05 (FC 9877)

The feature notifies the plant that a 3592 Model J70 Controller will be field merged
or field installed into a 3952 Model F05 Frame. One Field Merge 3592 Model J70
feature (FC 5875) or one Field Install 3592 Model J70 feature (FC 5877) must also
be ordered on the 3952 Model F05.
73
Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 3476 (Two LC Fibre Channel Drive Adapters), or

feature FC 3478 (Two Dual-Ported LC Fibre Channel Drive Adapters), and feature
FC 5245 (Dual Path Attachment), and one IBM TotalStorage Master Console or
TS3000 System Console feature (FC 2713, FC 2714, FC 2715, or FC 2720)
Mutually exclusive of FC 4641, FC 9861, FC 9862, FC 9865, FC 9866, FC 9867, FC
9868, FC 9875, FC 9876.
Field Merge 3592 Model J70 in a 3952 Model F05 Frame (FC
9895)
a new 3952 Model F05 frame coming from the plant, as part of the final customer
installation. This feature requires that FC 5877, Field Install 3592 Model J70 in a
3952 Model F05 Frame, be ordered against the 3952 F05 frame. In a 3584 tape
library, it is recommended that up to four drives be set as control paths for each
logical library. See the IBM TotalStorage 3953 Tape Frame Model F05 and Library
Plant Install 3592 Model J70 in a 3952 Model F05 Frame (FC
9896)
This specify feature factory installs a new J70 controller into a new 3952 Model F05
frame from the plant. In a 3584 tape library, it is recommended that up to four
drives be set as control paths for each logical library. See the IBM TotalStorage 3953
Tape Frame Model F05 and Library Manager Model L05 Introduction and Planning
Guide, GA32-0472, for any additional requirements. Maximum: One. Plant
installation only.
Service/Call Home features

Note: FC 2710, FC 2711, and FC 2712 for the 3592 Model J70 are no longer
marketed by IBM beginning in January 2005.
Table 27. Feature codes for Service/Call Home Features
Category
Feature Code
Description
Service/Call Home
2710
Remote Support Facility
2711
Remote Support Switch
2712
Remote Support Attachment
2713
Master Console for Service (Withdrawal from

2714
Console Expansion
2715
Console Attachment
2719
TS3000 System Console Upgrade
2720
TS3000 System Console (withdrawn)
2722
Remote Support features

The following features are to provide rapid diagnostic and remote support
capability. The same modem and switch may be shared between the following
units:
v 3494 Model AX0, B10, B16, B18, B20, L10, L12, L14, L22, and HA1
74
v
v
v
v
3592
3592
3590
3490
Model C06
Model J70
Model A60, A50, or A00
Model F1A (or FC 0) Control Unit (FC 3000 or 3500)
One of the following three features should be selected based on the number of
units in the installation.
Remote Support Facility (FC 2710):
Note: FC 2710 is no longer marketed by IBM beginning in January 2005.
This feature supplies a cable and connectors for attachment to an IBM supplied
modem which enables remote diagnostic support. This feature should only be
specified on the first unit in an installation. Each 3592 Model J70 controller must
specify only one of features FC 2710, FC 2711, or FC 2712. Plant or field
installation.
Remote Support Switch (FC 2711):
This feature provides a switch, cables, and connectors for the attachment of units
through the switch to a modem. It should be ordered on the second unit in an
installation. One switch should be specified for every set of fourteen units in an
installation site. Each J70 controller must specify one of features FC 2710, FC 2711,
or FC 2712.
Remote Support Attachment (FC 2712):
This feature provides an additional cable and connector to attach to the Remote
Support Switch (FC 2711). It should be ordered on the third through fourteenth
unit attached to the Remote Support Switch in an installation site. Each J70
controller must specify one of features FC 2710, FC 2711, or FC 2712. Plant or field
installation.
IBM TotalStorage Master Console features

|
The following features FC 2713, FC 2714, FC 2715, FC 2719, FC 2720, and FC 2722
provide connection to an IBM TotalStorage Master Console to enable enhanced
remote support to improve availability and enable early detection of problems and
unusual conditions. The 3953-F05 FC 2721 may be used in place of FC 2722. The
master console enables remote monitoring of each attached unit to expedite
microcode updates, reduce service times, and enhance local service. The same
master console may be shared among the following units:
v 3494 Model L10, L12, L14, L22, AX0, B10, B18, B20, and HA1
v TS7700 Virtualization Engine
v TS1120 (C06) Controller
v 3592 Model J70
v 3590 Model A60
v TS3500 Tape Library
75
To connect a J70 controller to an IBM TotalStorage Master Console, one of the

following three features must be selected on the J70 controller based on the
number of units attached to that master console facility in the installation.
Master Console for Service (FC 2713) (Withdrawal from marketing announced
May 9, 2006): This feature provides the IBM TotalStorage Master Console, an
Ethernet switch and a cable and connectors for connecting one of the above units
to an IBM supplied modem to enable remote enhanced service. This feature should
be specified on the first unit in an installation connected to a master console
facility. The Ethernet switch provides 14 additional connections for cables supplied
with feature FC2714 or FC2715. This is an optional feature on the J70 controller.
Maximum: One of FC2713, FC2714, or FC2715. A maximum of one of feature
FC2714 may be connected to the Master Console For Service feature FC2713. Plant
or field installable.
One of FC 2713, FC 2714, or FC 2715 is required. Plant or field installable.
Console Expansion (FC 2714): This feature provides an attachment cable for
connection of a TS3000 System Console (TSSC) and an Ethernet switch for
expanding the number of units that can be attached to the TSSC, or Master
Console for Service. Up to 14 additional connections are provided by this feature
for connection of FC 2715 or another FC 2714. FC 2714 can attach to any existing
FC 2721, FC 2722, or FC 2732.
other Console Expansion (FC 2714) can be connected to the Ethernet switch
provided by this feature FC 2714. A maximum of two of feature FC 2714 may be
included in a single TS3000 System Console facility (providing a total maximum of
43 unit connections). Plant or field installable.
Console Attachment (FC 2715): This feature provides a cable to attach a unit to
the Ethernet switch provided by the TS3000 System Console, or Master Console
For Service, or Console Expansion (FC 2714). A maximum of 40 of feature FC 2715
may be included in a single TS3000 System Console facility. FC 2715 can attach to
any existing FC 2721, FC 2722, or FC 2732.
|
|
TS3000 System Console Upgrade (FC 2719): This feature provides a memory
upgrade to 2.1 GB (2 GiB) total RAM and a second ethernet card for the Service
Console to allow redundant connections into the service network. This feature only
applies to consoles shipped with FC 2718, FC 2720 and 3953-F05 FC 2721.
TS3000 System Console (FC 2720) (withdrawn): This feature provides the
enhanced TS3000 System Console, an Ethernet switch, and a cable and connectors
for connection of one of the above units to an IBM supplied modem to enable
remote enhanced service. This feature should be specified on the first unit in an
installation connected to a TS3000 System Console facility. The Ethernet switch
provides 14 additional connections for cables supplied with feature FC 2714 or FC
2715.
76
|
|
|
|
|
|
TS3000 System Console (FC 2722): This feature provides the enhanced TS3000
System Console, an Ethernet switch, and a cable and connectors for connection of
one of the above units to an IBM supplied modem to enable remote enhanced
service. This feature should be specified on the first unit in an installation
connected to a TS3000 System Console facility. The Ethernet switch provides 14
additional connections for cables supplied with feature FC 2714 or FC 2715.
|
|
|
|

Fibre Channel environments and their feature codes

This section specifies feature for each of the following four fibre channel
environments:
v Features for the Fibre Channel Switches
v Features for external fabric support on page 80
page 81
Note that you cannot mix attachment of 3592 and 3590 drives or different models
of 3590 drives on the same controller.
For more details on the adapter and attachment features indicated below, see
Table 26 on page 61.
Features for the Fibre Channel Switches

When a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch is used, all mounting hardware,
twenty GBICs, dual power, and cooling fans are installed. The following
3592 Model J70 controller requirements: The following requirements apply when
installing a 3592 Model J70 controller with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch.
(FC 4887) must be specified on the J70 controller. Two FC 3487s or two FC 4887s
can be installed for redundancy.
or
(FC 4897) must be specified on the J70 controller. Two FC 3488s or two FC 4897s
can be installed for redundancy.
and
v Two LC Fibre Drive Adapters (FC 3476) or Two Dual Ported LC Fibre Drive
Adapters (FC 3478) must be specified for each installed 3592 Model J70
Controller.
v E05/J1A Drive Attached to Controller (FC 9477) must be specified on the J70
Rack requirements: The following features are required when installing the J70
controller in a rack environment with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch:
v Fibre Channel Switch Rack Mount Kit (FC 3485) provides the hardware for
installing the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the rack and cables from the
77
J70 to the switch. Up to sixteen 3592 tape drives can be attached to a single J70
with this feature. Up to twelve 3590 tape drives (in up to three racks) can be
attached to a single J70 with this feature.
v Redundant FC Rack Attach (FC 3489) provides the mounting hardware and
instructions for installing a second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the
rack. Any two of the following four features must be installed for FC 3489: FC
3487, FC 4887, FC 3488, FC 4897. Intermixing of 2 Gb or 4 Gb switches is not
allowed on the J70 controller.
v 3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch Cables (FC 3059) (see 3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch
Cables (FC 3059) on page 64) must be specified on the 3592 Model J70 for each
3592 tape drive attached to the 3592 Model J70 with the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch in the rack.
v One feature 3590 Tape Drive Attached (FC9059) must be specified on the J70 for
each 3590 tape drive attached to the J70 in the rack that contains the J70.
installing 3592 drives in a stand-alone rack with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch:
on each tape drive not in the rack with the controller to provide one
short-wavelength cable to attach those tape drives to the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre
Channel Switch.
3590 tape drives in a stand-alone rack: The following features are required when
installing 3590 drives in a stand-alone rack with a 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch:
v Fibre Channel Attachment (FC 3510 or FC 9510) must be specified on each 3590
tape drive.
v LC/SC Fibre Channel Cables (FC 5913, FC 5922, or FC 5961) must be specified
on each 3590 tape drive not in the rack with the J70 to provide one
short-wavelength cable to attach those tape drives to the 2 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch.
3590 Model A14 frame features (attaching 3590 tape drives only): The following
features pertain when installing a 3592 Model J70 controller and attaching 3590
drives in a 3590 Model A14 frame with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch:
v FC Switch Mount Kit (FC 3486) must be specified on the frame that contains
the J70 controller.
v Redundant FC Attach (FC 3490) may be added for redundancy. Two FC 3487s,
FC 4887s, 3488s, or 4897s must be installed for FC 3490. Intermixing of 2 Gb or 4
Gb switches is not allowed on the J70 controller.
v Plant Install Hxx Fibre Drive (FC 9670) must be specified on the Model
A14one feature for each 3590 Model H11 Tape Drive with FC 9510 (Fibre
Channel Attachment) installed in that Model A14 coming from the plant.
v Plant Install Fibre Drive (FC 9511) must be specified on the Model A14, instead
of feature FC 9663 (Plant Install Drive)one feature for each 3590 Model E11
Tape Drive with feature FC 9510 (Fibre Channel Attachment) installed in that
Model A14 coming from the plant.
v Adjacent Frame Fibre Channel 3590 (FC 4084) must be ordered for multiframe
fibre attachment. See the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3590 Introduction
and Planning Guide, GA32-0329.
v One feature 3590 Tape Drive Attached (FC 9059) must be specified on the J70
for each tape drive attached to the J70 controller in the Model A14 frame that
contains the J70.
78
v The maximum distance between Model A14 frames is seven meters.

installing a 3592 Model J70 controller in a 3494 library frame with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb
Fibre Channel Switch:
v FC Switch Mount Kit (FC 3486) must be specified on the 3494 Model D24 or
D14 frame that contains the J70 controller.
v Redundant FC Attach (FC 3490) may be added for redundancy. Two FC 3487s,
FC 4887s, 3488s, or 4897s must be installed for FC 3490. Intermixing of 2 Gb or 4
Gb switches is not allowed on the J70 controller.
associated 3494 Model L22 or D22 frame that contains the other 3592 tape drives
that will be attached to the J70 controller. When FC 4085 is ordered against a
3494 Model L22 or D22 frame, the correct number of 3592 Drive-to-Switch cables
for the 3494 Model L22 or D22 frame is provided, based on the number of 3592
tape drives ordered against the 3494 Model D22 or L22 frame.
associated 3494 Model L12 or D12 frame that contains the other 3590 Fibre
Channel tape drives that will be attached to the J70 controller.
v One 3592 Drive-to-Switch Cables (FC 3059) must be specified on the J70 for
each 3592 tape drive attached to the J70 in the Model D24 frame.
v Factory Install H1A Fibre Drive (FC 9670) must be specified on the Model
D14one feature for each 3590 Model H1A Tape Drive with feature FC 9510
(Fibre Channel Attachment) installed in that Model D14 coming from the plant.
v Factory Install Fibre Drive (FC 9511) must be specified on the Model D14,
instead of feature FC 9663 (Factory Install E1A)one feature for each 3590
Model E1A Tape Drive with feature FC 9510 (Fibre Channel Attachment)
installed in that Model D14 coming from the plant.
v One 3590 Tape Drive Attached (FC 9059) must be specified on the Model J70 for
each 3590 tape drive attached to the J70 controller in the Model D14 frame.
v One Install Fibre Channel Drive (FC 3511) must be specified on a 3494 Model
D12 or L12 frame for each installed tape drive.
3592 Model J70 controller in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame:
v 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch (FC 3487) provides a 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
with 20 LC Shortwave ports for attachment to 3592 Model J1A tape drives in a
FC 4888, Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit, must be ordered for each 3592 Model
J70 controller for which FC 3487 will be ordered.
Channel Switch with 20 LC Shortwave ports for attachment to 3592 Tape Drives
in the 3584 Tape Library. The 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch has dual power
connection for optional attachment to separate power supplies. For each 3592 J70
there is a maximum of two. For each VTS this feature must be ordered in pairs.
v Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit (FC 4888) provides the mounting hardware
for the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in a 3953 F05 Tape Frame that
contains one or more 3592 Model J70 controllers. This feature includes the
required mounting hardware, bifurcated power cables, and instructions for
79
installing up to two Fibre Channel Switches in the frame. One FC 4888 must be
ordered for each 3592 Model J70 controller for which FC 3487, FC 3488, FC 4889,
or FC 4890 will be ordered.
FC 4888, Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit, must be ordered for each 3592 Model
J70 controller for which FC 4889 will be ordered.
Features for external fabric support

This section describes the requirements for external fabric support in specified
environments.
When connecting 3592 tape drives to a 3592 Model J70 controller using external
fabric, the following requirements apply in the specified environments:
3592 Controller zoning requirements: When using a supported,
customer-supplied Fibre Channel director (see Fibre Channel switches for the C06
and J70 controllers on page 21), connectivity is through 2 Gb or 4 Gb multimode
ports. Supported directors can be connected to single or dual ports on the 3592
tape drives. Each director must be zoned to ensure the only devices in the zone are
the controller and 3592 tape drives. Up to two zones can be configured per
controller in order to provide failover in the event of a controller adapter, director,
blade or port failure. This requires each controller adapter (FC 3478) to be
connected to a separate zone and each 3592 tape drive port connected to those
separate zones. The cables from the controller to the director and from the director
to the tape drives can be ordered against the 3592 tape drives.
Limited configurations: For limited configurations, four 3592 drives can be
attached to a controller using direct connect support. One FC 3061 must be ordered
for each 3592 drive. To attach additional drives, any of the Fibre Channel options
can be ordered (see Fibre Channel switches for the C06 and J70 controllers on
page 21). Additional drives may be added later via any of the other switch options.
connecting 3592 Model J1A and E05 tape drives to a 3592 Model J70 controller
using external fabric:
v Two LC Fibre Drive Adapters (FC 3476) or Two Dual Ported LC Fibre Drive
Adapters (FC 3478) must be specified for each installed 3592 Model J70
Controller.
v J1A/E05 Drive Attached to Controller (FC 9477) must be specified on the J70
controller.
(FC 9491) must be specified on the J70 controller.
Enterprise Tape Library 3494 features: The following requirements apply when
connecting 3592 Model J1A tape drives to a 3592 Model J70 controller using
external fabric in a 3494 environment:
(FC 9491) must be specified on the D24, and D22 or L22 adjacent frames.
80
Features for the IBM TotalStorage Storage Area Network Switch

Model F16
This section describes the requirements for using the 2109 storage area network
(SAN) Fibre switch Model F16.
Note: The IBM 2109 SAN Fibre switch Model F16 will no longer marketed by IBM
beginning in January 2005.
When a Model F16 SAN switch is used, the following requirements and features
apply:
installing a 3592 Model J70 controller with a Model F16 SAN switch.
v J1A Drive Attached to Controller (FC 9476) must be specified on the J70
v Two LC Fibre Channel Drive Adapters (FC 3476) and Fibre Drive Attached LC
Switch (FC 3484) are required on the J70 when attaching 3592 or 3590 tape
drives with a 2109 Model F16 switch.
2109 SAN Fibre switch Model F16 requirements: One 2109 Model F16 is required
for each J70 controller attaching 3592 tape drives. Each 2109 Model F16 switch
comes standard with eight shortwave Gigabit Interface Convertors (GBICs),
enough to connect to the two Model J70 Fibre Channel Attachments and up to six
3592 or 3590 tape drives. Additional features that may be ordered include:
v Additional Shortwave Transceiver (FC 2210), which provides one additional
GBIC. It must be ordered when more than six 3592 or 3590 tape drives will be
attached to the J70 controller. The quantity of this feature should equal at least
the number of tape drives attached to the J70 beyond six. (For example, to attach
ten 3592 Fibre Channel tape drives to a J70, a minimum of four feature FC 2210
must be ordered.)
v Power Supply, Additional (FC 6203), which provides an additional redundant
outages.
v Non-Rack Install (FC9205) should not be specified.
Rack requirements:
This topic describes the requirements for installing the J70 controller in a rack
environment with a 2109 Model F16 switch.
The following features are required when installing the J70 controller in a rack
environment with a 2109 Model F16 switch:
v LC Fibre Drive Attached Rack (FC 3475) provides mounting hardware for the
2109 Model F16 in the rack and cables from the J70 to the 2109.
v One feature 3592 Tape Drive-to-Switch Cables (FC 3059) must be specified on
the J70 for each 3592 tape drive attached to the J70 in the rack that contains the
J70.
for each 3590 tape drive attached to the J70 in the rack that contains the J70.
installing 3592 drives in a stand-alone rack attaching to a 2109 Model F16 switch:
81
on each tape drive not in the same rack as the J70 controller to provide one
shortwave cable to attach tape drives to the 2109 Model F16 switch.
installing 3590 drives in a stand-alone rack with a 2109 Model F16 switch:
tape drive.
on each 3590 tape drive not in the same rack as the J70 controller to provide one
shortwave cable to attach tape drives to the 2109 Model F16 switch.
3590 Model A14 frame features (attaching 3590 tape drives only):
This topic describes the requirements for attaching 3590 drives with a Model F16
switch in a 3590 Model A14 frame.
The following features pertain when installing a 3592 Model J70 controller and
attaching 3590 drives in a 3590 Model A14 frame with a Model F16 switch:
v LC Fibre Drive Attached Controller (FC 3474) must be specified on the frame
that contains the J70 controller.
v LC Multiframe Fibre Drives (FC 4074) must be specified on the other Model
A14 frames that contain Fibre Channel tape drives that will be attached to the
J70 controller.
v Plant Install Hxx Fibre Drive (FC 9670) must be specified on the Model
A14one feature for each 3590 Model H11 Tape Drive with FC 9510 (Fibre
Channel Attachment) installed in that Model A14 coming from the plant.
v Plant Install Fibre Drive (FC 9511) must be specified on the Model A14, instead
of feature FC 9663 (Plant Install Drive)one feature for each 3590 Model E11
Tape Drive with feature FC 9510 (Fibre Channel Attachment) installed in that
Model A14 coming from the plant.
for each tape drive attached to the J70 controller in the Model A14 frame that
contains the J70.
3592 Model J70 controller in a 3953 F05 tape frame with a Model F16 switch:
v Customer-Supplied 2 Gb Fibre Channel 2109 F16 Switch (FC 4890). One FC
4890 must be specified for each J70 controller in the frame.
v Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit (FC 4888) must be specified on the frame that
contains the J70 controller. One FC 4888 must be specified for each pair of FC
4890 ordered.
installing a 3592 Model J70 controller in a 3494 library frame with a Model F16
switch:
v LC Fibre Drive Attached Controller (FC 3474) must be specified on the 3494
Model D24 or D14 frame that contains the J70 controller.
v Adjacent Frame 3592 Tape Drives with LC Attachment (FC 4075) must be
specified on the associated 3494 Model L22 or D22 frame that contains the other
3592 tape drives that will be attached to the J70 controller.
82
v LC Adjacent Frame Fibre Drives (FC 4074) must be specified on the associated
3494 Model L12 or D12 frame that contains the other 3590 Fibre Channel tape
drives that will be attached to the J70 controller.
v One 3590 Tape Drive Attached (FC 9059) must be specified on the Model J70 for
each 3590 tape drive attached to the J70 controller in the Model D14 frame.
Features for the IBM TotalStorage SAN switch Model S16

Note:
1. The IBM 2109 SAN Fibre switch Model S16 is no longer marketed by IBM.
2. The IBM 2109 SAN Fibre switch Model S16 is not supported in the 3953 F05
tape frame.
When a Model S16 SAN switch is used, the following requirements and features
apply:
installing a 3592 Model J70 controller with a Model S16 SAN switch.
v 3592 Drive Attached to Controller (FC 9476) must be specified on the J70 if
attaching 3592 drives.
v Two LC Fibre Channel Drive Adapters (FC 3476) and Fibre Drive Attached
SC Switch (FC 3483) are required on the J70 when attaching 3592 or 3590 tape
drives with a 2109 Model S16 switch.
2109 SAN Fibre switch Model S16 requirements: One 2109 Model S16 is
required for each 3592 Model J70 Controller attaching 3592 Tape Drives. Each 2109
Model S16 Switch comes standard with four shortwave Gigabit Interface
Convertors (GBICs), enough to connect to the two Model J70 Fibre Channel
Attachments and two 3592 or 3590 Tape Drives. Additional features that may be
ordered include:
v Additional Shortwave Transceiver (FC 2210) provides one additional GBIC. It
must be ordered for 3592 or 3590 tape drives beyond two that will be attached
to the J70 controller. The quantity of this feature should equal at least the
number of 3592 or 3590 tape drives beyond two, attached to the J70 controller.
(For example, to attach six 3592 Fibre Channel tape drives to a J70, a minimum
of four FC 2210 must be ordered.)
Power Supply, Additional (FC 6203), which provides an additional redundant
outages.
v Non-Rack Install (FC9205) should not be specified.
v
Rack requirements: The following features are required when mounting a J70
controller in a rack environment with a 2109 Model S16 switch:
v Fibre Drive Attached Rack (FC 3465) provides mounting hardware for the 2109
Model S16 in the rack and cables from the J70 to the 2109.
each 3592 tape drive attached to the Model J70 in the rack that contains the
Model J70.
83
v One 3590 Tape Drive Attached (FC 9059) must be specified on the J70 for each
3590 tape drive attached to the J70 in the rack that contains the J70.
installing 3592 drives in a stand-alone rack with a 2109 Model S16 switch:
on each 3592 tape drive not in the rack with the J70 controller to provide one
short-wavelength cable to attach those tape drives to the 2109 Model S16 switch.
installing 3590 drives in a stand-alone rack with a 2109 Model S16 switch:
tape drive.
v SC/SC Fibre Channel Cables (FC 5813, FC 5825, or FC 5861) must be specified
on each 3590 tape drive not in the rack with the J70 controller to provide one
short-wavelength cable to attach those tape drives to the 2109 Model S16 switch.
3590 Model A14 frame features (attaching 3590 tape drives only): The following
features pertain when installing a J70 controller and attaching 3590 drives in a 3590
Model A14 frame with a Model S16 switch:
v Fibre Drive Attached Controller (FC 3464) must be specified on the frame that
contains the Model J70 Controller.
v Multiframe Fibre Drives (FC 4064) must be specified on the other Model A14
frames that contain Fibre Channel tape drives that will be attached to the J70
controller.
for each tape drive attached to the J70 in the Model A14 frame that contains the
Model J70.
installing a 3592 Model J70 controller in a 3494 library frame with a Model S16
switch:
v Fibre Drive Attached Controller (FC 3464) must be specified on the 3494 Model
D24 or D14 frame that contains the J70 controller.
v Adjacent Frame 3592 Tape Drives with SC Attachment (FC 4065) must be
specified on the associated 3494 Model L22 or D22 frame that contains the other
3592 tape drives that will be attached to the J70 controller.
v LC Adjacent Frame Fibre Drives (FC 4064) must be specified on the associated
3494 Model L12 or D12 frame that contains the other 3590 Fibre Channel tape
drives that will be attached to the J70 controller.
v One 3590 Tape Drive Attached (FC 9059) must be specified on the J70 for each
3590 tape drive attached to the J70 in the Model D14 frame.
J70 controller and 3590 SCSI tape drive attachment

The 3592 Model J70 controller can attach to selected 3590 model tape drives
through SCSI attachment. The following sections describe the requirements in
different environments that support SCSI drive attachment.
84
Enterprise Tape Library 3494 attachment

In a 3494 library, up to four 3590 Model B1A, E1A, or H1A tape drives and one
3592 Model J70 controller can be attached in a 3494 D14 frame. One FC 9059 (3590
Drive Attached) should be specified on the J70 for each 3590 tape drive in the 3494
Model D14 that is attached to the J70 controller in that frame, up to a maximum of
four.
A J70 controller in a 3494 Model D14 frame with Adjacent Frame Support can
attach to drives in an adjacent 3494 Model L12 or L14 frame, thereby attaching up
to a total of six 3590 tape drives. Or, a J70 in a 3494 Model D14 frame can attach to
drives in an adjacent 3494 Model D12 frame, thereby attaching up to a total of ten
tape drives.
3590 Model A14 attachment

|
Up to four Model H11 tape drives, up to four Model E11 tape drives, or up to four
Model B11 tape drives can be placed with one 3592 Model J70 controller in a 3590
Model A14 frame for non-library attachment to a System z server. One FC 9059
should be specified on the J70 for each 3590 tape drive in the 3590 Model A14
frame that is attached to the J70 controller in that frame.
To support SCSI attachment of 3590 tape drives in two different Model A14 frames,
Multiframe SCSI A14 (FC 4060) must be specified on the frame that contains the
3592 Model J70 controller, and Multiframe SCSI Drives - Field Install (FC 4062)
or Multiframe SCSI Drives - Plant Install (FC 9062) must be specified on the
other Model A14 frame. Multi-frame SCSI A14 (FC 9060) must also be specified
on the J70 controller.
Up to eight 3590 tape drives may be attached in a multiframe SCSI configuration
and all hardware and required cables between the J70 controller and the drives in
the other Model A14 frame are included in these features. Because of SCSI cable
length restrictions, the two Model A14 frames must be installed adjacent to each
other.
Rack attachment
The J70 controller can be installed in a standard 19-inch rack such as the IBM 7014
Model T00 or T42, with up to four 3590 tape drives. For rack installation, Install
Model J70 in a Rack (FC 4641) must also be ordered on the 3592 Model J70. The
SCSI cables from each 3590 tape drive to the J70 controller in that rack are
included when 3590 Drive Attached (FC 9059) is specified on the J70 (the quantity
of FC 9059 must equal the number of tape drives in the rack with the J70
controller).
To support SCSI attachment of 3590 tape drives in two different racks, FC 4065
(Multiframe SCSI Rack Attachment) must be specified on the Model J70. This
feature includes cables to connect the J70 controller to tape drives in the second
rack, and necessary drive-to-drive interconnection cables in that rack. Up to eight
3590 tape drives in the two racks may be attached to the J70. Because of SCSI cable
length restrictions, the two racks must be installed adjacent to each other.
J70 controller dual path attachment

The Dual Path Attachment (FC 5245) provides the necessary cables and hardware
to allow a J70 controller in a 3494 Model D14 or D24 frame to connect the control
path to a second internal LAN attachment on the 3494, the Dual Path
Concentrator (FC 5246). The J70 must be attached via the Attachment
Concentrator (FC 5232) on the 3494 L12, L14, or L22 frame.
85
3952 F05 Frame and associated features

The topics in this section describe the feature codes for the 3952 F05 Frame and
associated features.
For features listed in numerical order, refer to the table below and to TS1120 (3592
C06) Controller and associated frame features on page 48.
following sections:
page 81
Table 28. Feature codes for 3952 F05 Frame and associated features
86
Feature Code
Machine Type/Model
3492
3952 F05 Frame
External Fabric Support - Field
3493
3952 F05 Frame
Direct Connect Drives - Field
3516
3952 F05 Frame
Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit
3517
3952 F05 Frame
4870
3952 F05 Frame
Replace controller with TS1120

(C06) Controller
5593
3952 F05 Frame
5594
3952 F05 Frame
Attach additional CU to Router
5595
3952 F05 Frame
Control Unit Encryption Key

Manager configuration / Field
5875
3952 F05 Frame
Field Merge 3592 J70 Controller
5877
3952 F05 Frame
Field install 3592 J70 Controller
5878
3952 F05 Frame
Field merge TS1120 (C06) Controller
5879
3952 F05 Frame
Plant Install TS1120 (C06) Controller
5880
3952 F05 Frame
Field Install TS1120 (C06) Controller

in a 3952 F05 Frame
7315
3952 F05 Frame
TS7640 Silo Compatible Controller

Attachment
7316
3952 F05 Frame
Enterprise Tape Library Attachment

(3494 Outbound Controller Frame)
9492
3952 F05 Frame
External Fabric Support - Plant
9493
3952 F05 Frame
Direct Connect Drives - Plant
9959
3952 F05 Frame
Unterminated Power Cord
9966
3952 F05 Frame
China Unterminated Power Cord
Description
3952 F05 and associated feature descriptions

External Fabric Support - Field (FC 3492)
This feature on the 3952 F05 Frame indicates that 3592 Tape Drives will be directly
connected to a TS1120 (C06) Controller.
Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 7315 or 7316 on the 3952 F05 Frame. This feature
is mutually exclusive of FC 3493, FC 9492, and FC 9493.
channel switch. (Cables from the switch or controller to the 3592 Tape Drives can
be ordered with the 3592 Tape Drives or supplied by the customer.)
Direct Connect Drives - Field (FC 3493)

connected to a controller.
Controller installed in a 3952 or 3953 Model F05 frame to the 3592 Tape Drives.
(Cables from the controller to the 3592 Tape Drives can be ordered with the 3592
Tape Drives or supplied by the customer.)
Field installed. Maximum: one. Prerequisites: Must specify FC 7315 or FC 7316 on
the 3952 F05 Frame. Must specify FC 3493 or FC 9493 on the 3592 Model C06. This
feature is mutually exclusive of FC 9492, FC 9493, and FC 3492.
Fibre Channel Switch Mount Kit (FC 3516)

One of these features is required for each TS1120 (C06) Controller that supports
attachment of 3592 Tape Drives with a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in a
3952 Model F05 Silo Compatible Frame. This feature includes the required
mounting hardware and instructions for installing a 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch in the Model F05, including the associated Ethernet switch and cabling
between the TS1120 (C06) Controller and the switch. Up to sixteen 3592 Tape
Drives in 3592 Model C20 Frames can be attached to each TS1120 (C06) Controller.
Fibre Channel Cables from the 3592 Tape Drives to the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch should be ordered with FC 6013, FC 6025, or FC 6061 with each tape drive
in the 3592 Model C20 Silo Compatible Frame.
A maximum of two switches, Model C06 Controller FC 3488, FC 4887, or FC 4897,
can be mounted in one F05 Frame FC 3516 when the Redundant Fibre Channel
Attach feature FC 3517 is also specified. Intermixing of 2 Gb or 4 Gb switches is
not supported on the TS1120 (C06) Controller.
Maximum: three.
Prerequisites:
v FC 7315 is required.
v FC 3488 or FC 4887 or FC 4897 is required on the TS1120 (C06) Controller.
v One of the following: FC 4831, FC 4833, FC 4835, FC 9675, or FC 9679 must be
installed on each 3592 Model C20 Frame for each attaching 3592 Tape Drive.
87
Redundant Fibre Channel Attach (FC 3517)

second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch in the 3952 F05 Frame. Factory or field
installed.
Maximum: three.
Prerequisites:
v One FC 3516 must be installed on the 3952 F05 Frame for each FC 3517.
v One FC 3517 is required on this frame for each TS1120 (C06) Controller that
supports a second 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel Switch.
v A second FC 3488, FC 4887, or FC 4897 is required on the TS1120 (C06)
Controller.
v One of the following: FC 3431, FC 9675, FC 4833, FC 4835, or FC 9679 must be
installed on each 3592 Model C20 Frame for each attaching 3592 Tape Drive.
Fibre Channel Cables from the 3592 Tape Drives to the 2 Gb or 4 Gb Fibre Channel
Switch should be ordered with FC 6013, FC 6025, or FC 6061 with each tape drive
in the 3592 Model C20 Silo Compatible Frame. A second cable is required on each
tape drive to attach to the redundant switch.
Replace Controller with C06 (FC 4870)

J70 controller with a TS1120 (C06) Controller in a currently installed 3952 or 3953
Model F05 Frame.
Maximum: One for a base frame, three if an expansion or silo attached frame, or
3494 attached frame. The sum of FC 4870 plus FC 5877 plus FC 5878 plus FC 5879
plus FC 5880 cannot exceed three.


Attach Additional CU to Router FC 5594

The feature provides Ethernet cables to connect the second or third tape controller
in the frame to the routers supplied by FC 5593.
Maximum: two. Plant or field installed. Prerequisite: FC 5593.
Field Merge 3592 J70 (FC 5875)

This feature provides mounting hardware and notifies the plant that a
customer-supplied 3592 J70 Controller will be installed into a 3952 F05 Frame
coming from the plant, as part of the final customer installation.
Maximum: Two FC 5875 or FC 5877.
88
Field Install 3592 Model J70 in F05 (FC 5877)

This feature code provides mounting hardware to field install a customer-supplied
3592 J70 Controller.
Maximum: Two FC 5875 or FC 5877.
Field Merge TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller (FC 5878)

This feature code provides mounting hardware for a customer-supplied TS1120
(C06) Controller that will be installed in a 3952 F05 Frame coming from the plant,
as part of the final customer installation. This feature must appear on the 3952 F05
Frame and FC 9885 must appear on the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller order.
Maximum: three if ordered with the SILO Attachment FC 7315 or with 3494
Attachment FC 7316. The sum of FC 4870 plus FC 5875 plus FC 5877 plus FC 5878
plus FC 5879 plus FC 5880 cannot exceed three.
Plant Install TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller (FC 5879)

This feature code provides the mounting hardware to factory install a TS1120 (C06)
Controller into a new 3952 F05 Frame. This feature must appear on the 3952 F05
Frame and FC 9885 must appear on the TS1120 (C06) Controller order.
Maximum: three if ordered with the SILO Attachment FC 7315 or with 3494
Attachment FC 7316. The sum of FC 4870 plus FC 5875 plus 5877 plus FC 5878
plus FC 5879 plus FC 5880 cannot exceed three.
Field Install TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller in a 3952 Model F05

Frame (FC 5880)
This feature is required to provide the mounting hardware to add a TS1120 (C06)
Controller to a currently installed 3952 F05 Frame. This feature must appear on the
3952 F05 Frame and FC 9885 must appear on the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller
order.
Maximum: three. The sum of FC 4870 FC 5875 plus FC 5877 plus FC 5878 plus FC
5879 plus FC 5880 cannot exceed three.
TS7640 Silo Compatible Controller Attachment (FC 7315)

This feature identifies this 3952 Tape Frame the TS7640 Silo Compatible Controller
Attachment Frame.
FC 1903 is required with FC 7315.
Maximum: one. This Feature is mutually exclusive of FC 7310, FC 7311, and FC
7316.
Enterprise Tape Library Attachment (3494 Outbound Controller

Frame FC 7316)
This feature identifies this 3952 Tape Frame as the 3494 Outbound Controller
Frame. Factory installed only. Maximum: one. This Feature is mutually exclusive
with FC 7310, FC 7311, and FC 7315.
External Fabric Support - Plant (FC 9492)

This feature on the 3952 F05 Frame indicates that 3592 Tape Drives will be
connected to a TS1120 (C06) Controller through an external customer-supplied
Fibre Channel.
89
Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 7315 or 7316 on the 3952 F05 Frame. This feature
is mutually exclusive of FC 3493, and FC 9493.
Direct Connect Drives - Plant (FC 9493)

connected to a TS1120 (C06) Controller. FC 3493 (Direct Connect Drives / Field) or
FC 9493 (Direct Connect Drives / Plant) must be specified on the TS1120 (C06)
Controller.
Field installed. Maximum: one. Prerequisites: FC 7315 or FC 7316 on the 3952 F05
Frame. This feature is mutually exclusive of FC 3492, FC 3493, and FC 9492.
Unterminated Power Cord (FC 9959)

This feature provides an unterminated non-watertight 4.3 meter (14 foot), 200-208,
240 Vac, 24 Amp power cord with IRAM and BSMI agency certifications. This is
the recommended power cord for Argentina and Taiwan.
Maximum: one. Plant or field installed.
China Unterminated Power Cord (FC 9966)

This feature provides an unterminated non-watertight 4.3 meter (14 foot), 200-208,
240 Vac, 24 Amp power cord with CCC agency certification. This is the
recommended power cord for China.
Maximum: one. Plant or field installed.
Controller cable features

The topics in this section describe the controller cable features.
A variety of cables are required for device and host system attachment, depending
upon the individual customer configuration. Cables are often included within a
feature code for a common installation, and may be included or separately ordered
on the device or the frame.
Since customer environments may significantly differ from standard installations,
additional or substitute cables may be needed. See Fiber Transport Services on
page 147 for information about fibre cabling services provided by IBM.
The sections below provide cable types and descriptions for a variety of cables for
controller connections that can be ordered by feature codes. For Fibre Channel
cables specific to the 3592 drives, see 3592 tape drive features on page 31.
90
Host system attachment cables

Dual ESCON attachment for 3592 controller cable features
|
The tape controllers attach with ESCON cables to ESCON channels of System z
servers. If host attachment cables are required they can be specified with two of
the following cables:
Table 29. Dual ESCON attachment cables
Feature Code
Feature Description
FC 9700
No Factory ESCON/FICON cables
FC 9770
62.5 Micron MT-RJ to ESCON Riser-Rated 31 meter ESCON Cable
FC 9771
62.5 Micron MT-RJ to ESCON Plenum-Rated 31 meter ESCON Cable
FC 9775
62.5 Micron MT-RJ to ESCON 2 meter ESCON Jumper Cable
FC 9789
62.5 Micron MT-RJ to MT-RJ Plenum-Rated 31 meter ESCON Cable
FC 9790
62.5 Micron MT-RJ to MT-RJ Riser-Rated 31 meter ESCON Cable
ESCON cable feature definitions

No Factory FICON/ESCON Cables (FC 9700): This feature should be specified if
you do not want the factory to ship any ESCON or FICON cables with the new
shipment of a tape controller. This feature should be specified if none of the
following features is desired: FC 9752, FC 9753, FC 9762, FC 9763, FC 9771, FC
9775, FC 9789, FC 9793, or FC 9794. Maximum: One. Minimum: None. Plant
installation only.
62.5-Micron MT-RJ to ESCON Riser-Rated ESCON Cable, 31m (FC 9770): This
feature ships a 31-meter (100-Foot) 62.5-micron riser-rated ESCON fibre cable with
an MT-RJ connector on one end for connecting to the tape controller, and an
ESCON adapter on the other end, for connecting to a host system or ESCON
director. This feature should be specified when attaching a 3592 J70 Controller to
fibre components with ESCON connectors, such as the 4-ported ESCON channel
feature for zSeries or most ESCON directors. Indoor/outdoor riser-rated cables
can be installed between buildings as well as in a building's riser system. Riser
rated cables can eliminate the need for a splice or transition point where a campus
fiber enters a building and must continue on to additional termination points
within the building's riser system. Maximum: Eight. Plant or field installed.
Corequisite:
v Only available on the 3592 Model J70 Tape Controller when ordered with FC
3413. Two of FC 9770, FC 9771, FC 9775, FC 9789, or FC 9790 can be ordered
with each FC 3413.
62.5-Micron MT-RJ to ESCON Plenum-Rated ESCON Cable, 31m (FC 9771):
This feature ships a 31-meter (100-Foot) 62.5-micron plenum-rated ESCON fibre
cable with an MT-RJ connector on one end for connecting to the controller, and an
ESCON adapter on the other end, for connecting to a host system or ESCON
director. This feature should be specified when attaching a controller to fibre
components with ESCON connectors, such as the 4-ported ESCON channel feature
for zSeries, or most ESCON directors. This cable should be ordered when a
plenum cable is required to reduce the hazard of fire spreading between rooms. A
plenum is a compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are
connected and which forms part of a building's air distribution system. Maximum:
Eight. Plant or field installed.
91
Corequisite:
v Only available on the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller when ordered with FC 3440.
Two of FC 9771, FC 9775, or FC 9789 can be ordered with each FC 3440.
with each FC 3413.
62.5-Micron MT-RJ to ESCON Jumper Cable, 2m (FC 9775): This feature ships a
2-meter (6-Foot) 62.5-micron ESCON fibre jumper cable with an MT-RJ connector
on one end for connecting to the tape controller, and an ESCON adapter on the
other end for connecting to a pre-existing ESCON cable with an ESCON connector.
Maximum: Eight. Plant or field installed.
Corequisite:
with each FC 3413.
62.5-Micron MT-RJ to MT-RJ Plenum-Rated ESCON Cable, 31m (FC 9789): This
feature ships a 31-meter (100-Foot) 62.5-micron plenum-rated ESCON fibre cable
with an MT-RJ connector on both ends for connecting the tape controller to a host
system or ESCON director. This feature should be specified when attaching a tape
controller to fibre components with ESCON connectors, such as the 16-ported
ESCON channel feature for zSeries.
This cable should be ordered when a plenum cable is required, to reduce the
hazard of fire spreading between rooms. A plenum is a compartment or chamber
to which one or more air ducts are connected and which forms part of a building's
air distribution system. Maximum: Eight. Plant or field installed.
Corequisites:
with each FC 3413.
62.5-Micron MT-RJ to MT-RJ Riser-Rated ESCON Cable, 31m (FC 9790): This
feature ships a 31-meter (100-Foot) 62.5-micron riser-rated ESCON fibre cable with
MT-RJ connectors on both ends for connecting the 3592 J70 Controller to a host
system or ESCON director. This feature should be specified when attaching a 3592
J70 Controller to fibre components with ESCON connectors, such as the 16-ported
ESCON channel feature for zSeries.
Indoor/outdoor riser-rated cables can be installed between buildings as well as in
a building's riser system. Riser rated cables can eliminate the need for a splice or
transition point where a campus fiber enters a building and must continue on to
additional termination points within the building's riser system. Maximum: Eight.
Plant or field installed.
Corequisites:
92
with each FC 3413.
FICON long-wavelength attachment cable features
The FICON long-wavelength adapter shipped with FC 3434 (2 Gb FICON

Long-Wavelength Attachment), FC 3442 (FICON Long-Wavelength Attachment),
and FC 3443 (FICON Long-Wavelength 10 km Attachment) has an LC Duplex
connector, and can connect to FICON long-wavelength channels of System z
servers utilizing a 9-micron single-mode fibre cable. If host attachment cables or
jumper cables are required they can be specified with one of the following feature
numbers:
Table 30. 2 Gb FICON long-wavelength attachment cables
Feature Code
Description
FC 9700
No Factory FICON cables
FC 9752
9-micron LC/LC Fibre Cable, 31m
FC 9753
9-micron LC/SC Fibre Jumper Cable, 2m
FC 9763
FC 9793
9-micron LC/SC Fibre Cable, 31m
Feature definitions
shipment of a TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller or 3592 Model J70 Controller. This
feature should be specified if none of the following features are desired: FC 9752,
FC 9753, FC 9762, FC 9763, FC 9770, FC 9771, FC 9775, FC 9789, or FC 9790.
Maximum: One. Minimum: None. Plant installation only.
9-Micron LC/LC Fibre Cable, 31m (FC 9752): This feature ships a 31-meter
(100-Foot) 9-micron single-mode fibre cable with an LC Duplex connector on both
ends for FICON Long-Wavelength connection of the tape controller to a host
system. This feature should be specified when attaching a tape controller to fibre
components with LC Duplex connectors, such as the FICON channel feature for
zSeries (FICON Express LW 1.75 Feature FC 2319) or supported Fibre Channel
Directors with LC Duplex attachments.
Corequisites:
v Only available on the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller when ordered with FC 3442
or FC 3443 . Only one of the FC 9752, FC 9753, or FC 9793 can be ordered with
each FC 3442 or FC 3443.
3434 . Only one FC 9752, FC 9753, or FC 9793 can be ordered with FC 3434.
9-Micron LC/SC Fibre Jumper Cable, 2m (FC 9753): This feature ships a 2-meter
(6-Foot) 9-micron single-mode fibre cable with an LC Duplex connector on one end
for FICON Long-Wavelength connection to the tape controller, and an SC Duplex
connector on the other end for connection to a director or host system requiring an
SC Duplex connection. This feature should be specified when attaching a tape
controller in an environment with a single-mode SC Duplex cable already in place.
Maximum: four. Plant or field installation.
Corequisites:
93
or FC 3443. Only one of FC 9752, FC 9753, or FC 9793 can be ordered with each
FC 3442 or FC 3443.
3434. Only one FC 9752, FC 9753, or FC 9793 can be ordered with each FC 3434.
9-Micron LC/SC 31 Meter Fibre Cable (FC 9793): This feature ships a 31-meter
(100-Foot) 9-micron single-mode fibre cable with an LC Duplex connector on one
end for FICON Long-Wavelength connection to the tape controller, and an SC
Duplex connector on the other end for connection to a host system. This feature
should be specified when attaching tape controller to fibre components with SC
Duplex connectors, such as the FICON longwave channel features on G5 or G6
servers (#2314) or zSeries servers (#2315), or supported Fibre Channel Directors
with SC Duplex attachments.
Maximum: four. Plant or field installation.
Corequisites:
or FC 3443 . Only one of FC 9752, FC 9753, or FC 9793 can be ordered with each
FC 3442 or FC 3443.
3434 . Two of FC 9752, FC 9753, or FC 9793 can be ordered with each FC 3434.
FICON short-wavelength attachment cable features

The FICON short-wavelength adapters shipped with FC 3435 (2 Gb FICON
Short-Wavelength Attachment) and FC 3441 (FICON Short-Wavelength
Attachment) have an LC Duplex connector, and can connect to FICON
short-wavelength channels of System z servers utilizing a 50-micron multimode
fibre cable. If host attachment cables or jumper cables are required they can be
specified with one of the following feature numbers:
Table 31. 2 Gb FICON short-wavelength attachment cables

Feature Code
Description
9700
No Factory FICON Cables
9762
50-micron LC/LC Fibre Cable, 31m
9763
9794
50-micron LC/SC Fibre Cable, 31m
Feature descriptions
shipment of a tape controller. This feature should be specified if none of the
following features are desired: FC 9752, FC 9753, FC 9762, FC 9763, FC 9770, FC
9771, FC 9775, FC 9789, or FC 9790. Maximum: One. Minimum: None. Plant
installation only.
50-Micron LC/LC Fibre Cable, 31m (FC 9762): This feature ships a 31-meter
(100-Foot) 50-micron multimode fibre cable with LC Duplex connectors on both
ends for FICON Short-Wavelength connection of the tape controller to a host
system. This feature should be specified when attaching a tape controller to fibre
components with LC Duplex connectors, such as the FICON channel feature for
94
zSeries (FICON Express SW 1.75 feature FC 2320) or supported Fibre Channel

Directors with LC Duplex attachments. Maximum: four. Plant or field installation.
Corequisites:
Only one of FC 9762, FC 9763, or FC 9794 can be ordered with each FC 3441.
3435. Only one of FC 9762, FC 9763, or FC 9794 can be ordered with each FC
3435.
50-Micron LC/SC Fibre Jumper Cable, 2m (FC 9763): This feature ships a 2-meter
(6-Foot) 50-micron multimode fibre cable with an LC Duplex connector on one
end, for FICON Short-Wavelength connection to the tape controller, and an SC
Duplex connector on the other end, for connection to a director or host system
requiring an SC Duplex connection. This feature should be specified when
attaching a tape controller in an environment with a single-mode SC Duplex cable
already in place. Maximum: four. Plant or field installation.
Corequisites:
Only one FC 9762, FC 9763, or FC 9794 can be ordered with each FC 3441.
3435. Onle one FC 9762, FC 9763, or FC 9794 can be ordered with each FC 3435.
50-Micron LC/SC 31 Meter Fibre Cable (FC 9794): This feature ships a 31-meter
(100-Foot) 50-micron multimode fibre cable with an LC Duplex connector on one
end, for FICON Short-Wavelength connection to the tape controller and an SC
Duplex connector on the other end, for connection to a host system. This feature
should be specified when attaching a tape controller to fibre components with SC
Duplex connectors, such as the FICON shortwave channel features on G5 or G6
servers (FC 2316) or zSeries servers (FC 2318), or supported Fibre Channel
Directors with SC Duplex attachments. Maximum: four. Plant or field installation.
Corequisites:
Only one of FC 9762, FC 9763, or FC 9794 can be ordered with each FC 3441.
3435. Only one of FC 9762, FC 9763, or FC 9794 can be ordered with each FC
3435.
2109 switch attachment cable features

Fibre cables are required to connect tape drives to the J70 controller via the 2109
SAN switch. The 2109 SAN switch Model F16 requires 50-micron fiber cables with
an LC Duplex connector and the cables to the 2109 SAN switch Model S16 require
50-micron fiber cables with an SC Duplex connector. These cables can be customer
supplied or ordered with features on the 3494 frames or tape drives where
required.
SCSI drive cables

3590 Model A14 or 3494 Model D14 installation
The appropriate SCSI cables required for attaching 3590 tape drives to a 3592
Model J70 controller in a 3590 Model A14 frame or in a 3494 Model D14 frame are
included when FC 9059 (3590 Drive Attached) is specified on the J70 (the quantity
95
of FC 9059 must equal the number of tape drives attached to the J70 in that frame).
SCSI cables for attachment of 3590 tape drives in a Model A14 frame to a J70
controller in a different Model A14 are included when FC 4062 or FC 9062
(Multiframe SCSI Drives) is specified on that frame. FC 9060 (Multiframe SCSI
A14) must also be specified on the J70 controller.
Rack installation
The SCSI cables from each 3590 tape drive to the 3592 Model J70 in that rack are
included when FC 9059 (3590 Drive Attached) is specified on the J70 (the quantity
of FC 9059 must equal the number of tape drives in the rack with the J70). SCSI
cables for attachment of 3590 tape drives in a rack to a J70 controller in a different
rack are included when FC 4065 (Multiframe SCSI Rack Attachment) is specified
on the J70.
Fibre Channel drive cables

For Fibre Channel cables specific to the 3592 drives, see 3592 tape drive features
on page 31.
3494 frame installation

Fibre Channel cables for attachment of 3592 or 3590 tape drives in a 3494 Tape
Library to a 3592 Model J70 controller are included when FC 3464, FC 3474, FC
4064, FC 4065, FC 4074, or FC 4075 is specified on those frames. The number of
cables in the frame containing the Model J70 are specified by the quantity of FC
3059 or FC 9059 on the Model J70.
Adjacent D12 Frames
For the adjacent D12 frame attaching to a D14 with a 2109 S16 switch, the
interframe cables are ordered with FC 4064 (against the D12 frame) in quantity one
(1), where the actual number of cables shipped is determined by the quantity of
feature FC 3511 (against the D12 frame). FC 3511 is used to order the cables from
the drives in the D12 to the patch panel in the D12. FC 3511 also ships the patch
panel with the first order.
In the case of the adjacent D12 frame attaching to a D14 frame with
Adjacent/MultiFrame 2 Gb (FC 4084) or a 2109 F16 switch, the interframe cables
are ordered with FC 4074 (against the D12) in quantity one (1), where the actual
number of cables determined by quantity of FC 3511 quantity against the D12
frame.
Adjacent D22 Frames
For adjacent D22 frame attaching a D24 frame with Adjacent/MultiFrame 2 Gb
(FC 4085) or a 2109 S16 switch, the interframe cables are ordered with FC 4064
against the D22 frame in the quantity desired. You should order a quantity of FC
4065 equal to the sum of features FC 4674 and FC 9673 against the D22 frame, i.e.,
the number of drives in the D22 frame. The D22 does not use a patch panel.
For adjacent D22 frame attaching a D24 frame with an 2 Gb Fibre Channel Switch
or a 2109 F16 switch, the interframe cables are ordered with FC 4075 (against the
D22 frame) in the quantity desired.
3590 Model A14 installation

Fibre Channel cables for attachment of 3590 tape drives in a 3590 Model A14 frame
to a 3592 Model J70 controller are included when FC 3464, FC 3474, FC 4064, or FC
96
4074 is specified on those frames. The number of cables in the frame containing the
J70 is specified by the quantity of FC 9059 on the J70.
Rack installation
The appropriate length Fibre Channel cables for attachment of 3592 tape drives in
a rack to the tape controller in another rack must be ordered with each 3592 tape
drive using FC 6013, FC 6025, and FC 6061 (LC/LC Fibre Channel Cables) when
FC 3484 is ordered on the Model J70, or FC 5913, FC 5922, and FC 5961 (LC/SC
Fibre Channel Cables) when FC 3483 is ordered on the J70. For Fibre Channel
cables specific to the 3592 drives, see 3592 tape drive features on page 31.
Cables from 3592 tape drives to the J70 controller that are in the rack with the J70
are specified by the quantity of FC 3059 on the J70 and FC3062 on the TS1120 (3592
C06) Controller.
The appropriate length Fibre Channel cables for attachment of 3590 tape drives in
a rack to the 3592 Model J70 controller in another rack must be ordered with each
3590 tape drive using feature FC 5913, FC 5922, and FC 5961 (LC/SC Fibre
Channel Cables) when FC 3484 is ordered on the J70, or FC 5813, FC 5825, and FC
5861 (SC/SC Fibre Channel Cables) when feature FC 3483 is ordered on the J70.
Cables from 3590 tape drives to the J70 controller that are in the rack with the J70
are specified by the quantity of FC9059 on the J70.
97
98
Chapter 3. Media
The 3592 tape drive uses an advanced bidirectional serpentine recording technique
that writes eight data tracks at a time. Improved Error Correction Code (ECC) and
servo tracks with embedded longitudinal position written on the tape help ensure
data integrity and reliability. The servo tracks enable the 3592 tape drive to
accurately position the read/write head with respect to the media while the tape is
in motion. Resident diagnostics monitor operations to detect potential problems
and aid in fast resolution.
Both the format and the physical characteristics of the 3592 cartridges differ from
3590 cartridges. Therefore, they cannot be used interchangeably; only 3592 tape
cartridges can be used in 3592 tape drives, and only 3590 tapes can be used in 3590
drives. This is true for the cleaning cartridges, as well. If you have both 3590 and
3592 tape drives in your environment, you must have both types of cleaning tapes.
IBM 3592 tape cartridge

This topic provides general information on the IBM 3592 tape cartridge.
The 3592 tape drive has a bidirectional read/write head capable of operating at
four different recording densities, depending on the tape drive model. The 3592
E07 reads data in EFMT2 (896 tracks on 16 channels), EFMT3 (1152 tracks on 16
channels), and EFMT4 (2176 tracks on 32 channels) but only writes EFMT3 and
EFMT4. The 3592 E06 reads data in EFMT1 (512 tracks on 8 channels), EFMT2, and
EFMT3, but only writes EFMT2 and EFMT3. The 3592 E05 drive reads and writes
EFMT1 and EFMT2. The 3592 J1A reads and writes only EFMT1.
Table 32. Supported 3592 read (R) and write (W) formats
|
|
|
EFMT1
512 Tracks /
8 Channels
EFMT2
896 Tracks /
16 Channels
EFMT3
1152 Tracks /
16 Channels
EFMT4
2176 Tracks /
32 Channels
Model J1A
R/W
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Model E05
R/W
Not supported
Not supported
R/W
R/W
Not supported
3592
Tape Drive
Model E06
R/W
2
2
Model E07
1
2
3
R
Not supported
R/W
R/W
Model E05 can read and write EFMT1 operating in native or J1A emulation mode.
Model E06 and E07 do not support emulation.
Cartridge types JB and JX only.
The IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Standard Data (type JA) has a native capacity of 640
GB (596.04 GiB) when formatted for EFMT3, 500 GB (465.66 GiB) when formatted
for EFMT2, and 300 GB (279.39 GiB) when formatted for EFMT1.
|
|
The IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Advanced Data (type JC) has a native capacity of
4000 GB (3725.29 GiB) when formatted for EFMT4.
The IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Economy (type JJ) has a native capacity of 128 GB
(119.21 GiB) in EFMT3, 100 GB (93.13 GiB) in EFMT2, and 60 GB (55.88 GiB) in
EFMT1.
99
|
|
The IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Advanced Economy (type JK) has a native capacity
of 500 GB (465.66 GiB) when formatted for EFMT4.
|
|
The IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended Data (type JB) has a native capacity of 1600
GB (1490.12 GiB) when formatted for EFMT4, 1000 GB (931.32 GiB) in EFMT3, and
700 GB (651.93 GiB) in EFMT2. The IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended is not
supported on the 3592 J1A Tape Drive or on a 3592 E05 Tape Drive emulating a
3592 J1A Tape Drive (EFMT1).
Capacities of data cartridges can be increased through data compression, with the
actual compression and capacity depending upon the specific data. Write-once,
read-many (WORM) cartridges are also available in all capacities. All 3592
cartridge types can be encrypted when used with a compatible 3592 tape drive.
Cartridge types and characteristics

This topic provides information about the tape cartridges used in the 3592 tape
drives.
Cartridges can be distinguished by the text on the label, as well as by the color of
the tape cartridge case and the color of the cartridge label (see 2 in Figure 7 on
page 103), write-protect switch 4, and door (see 1 in Figure 9 on page 104). The
characteristics of the nine different data cartridge types and the cleaning cartridge
that can be used by operators with the 3592 drive are summarized in Table 33. The
main external components of the IBM 3592 tape cartridge are shown in Figure 7 on
page 103.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The capacity of the 3592 tape cartridge depends on the format used when writing
from BOT. Each tape drive model has different formatting capabilities. The J1A can
only read or write in Enterprise Format 1 (EFMT1). The E05 can only read or write
in EFMT1 or EFMT2. The E06/EU6 can read tapes formatted in EFMT1, EFMT2, or
EFMT3. However, the E06/EU6 can only write using EFMT2 or EFMT3. The E07
can read tapes formatted in EFMT2, EFMT3, or EFMT4. However, the E07 can only
write in EFMT3, or EFMT4. Furthermore, the E07 can neither read nor write using
type JA, JJ, JR, or JW cartridges.
All 3592 tape drives support cartridge reuse. The 3592 tape cartridges can be
reformatted to any tape format supported by the tape drive when writing from
BOT. When reformatting, all existing data on the cartridge is erased.
All compatible 3592 tape cartridge types can be used with the encryption function
of the 3592 Models E05, E06, and E07. Encrypted cartridges use a unique format,
Enterprise Encrypted Format 2 (EEFMT2) , Enterprise Encrypted Format 3
(EEFMT3), or Enterprise Encrypted Format 4 (EEFMT4).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
Table 33. Types of IBM 3592 tape cartridges

Text on
product
label and
type of
media1
100
Native capacity
Case color
E07
E06/EU6
E05
J1A
Label, door,
and
Part number
write-protect
switch color
|
|
|
||
|
||
|
|
|
|
Table 33. Types of IBM 3592 tape cartridges (continued)

640 GB
(596.04 GiB)
E06 format
Data, JA
Not
supported
|
|
|
|
|
||
|
||
|
|
Extended
Data, JB
|
|
|
|
|
Advanced
Data, JC
|
|
||
|
||
|
|
|
|
1600 GB
(1490.12 GiB)
E07 format
1000 GB
(931.32 GiB)
E06 format
4000 GB
(3725.29 GiB)
E07 format
Economy, JJ
Not
supported
|
|
||
|
||
|
|
|
|
Advanced
Economy, JK
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
E07 format
Not
supported
Not
supported
Black
Dark green
23R9830
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Black
Dark purple
46X7452
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
J1A format
Black
Light blue
24R0316
Not
supported
Black
Light purple
46X7453
60 GB
Platinum
(J1A format) (silvery gray)
Light blue
24R0317
300 GB
Platinum
(279.39 GiB)
(silvery gray)
J1A format
Dark blue
18P7538
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
E05 format
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
E05 format
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
J1A format
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
J1A format
Not
supported
Not
supported
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
E05 format
|
|
||
|
||
|
|
|
|
640 GB
(596.04 GiB)
E06 format
|
|
|
18P7534
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
J1A format
Not
supported
Dark blue
1 000 GB
(931.32 GiB)
|
|
|
WORM, JW
Black
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
J1A format
128 GB
(119.21 GiB)
E06 format
Economy
WORM, JR
300 GB (J1A
format)
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
J1A format
128 GB
(119.21 GiB)
E06 format
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
E05 format
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
E05 format
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
E05 format
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
J1A format
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
E05 format
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
J1A format
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
E05 format
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
J1A format
Chapter 3. Media
101
Table 33. Types of IBM 3592 tape cartridges (continued)
|
|
||
|
||
|
|
Extended
WORM, JX
|
|
|
|
|
Advanced
WORM, JY
|
|
|
Cleaning,
CLNxxxJA3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes:
1600 GB
(1490.12 GiB)
E07 format
1 000 GB
(931.32 GiB)
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)
Not
supported
Platinum
(silvery gray)
Dark green
23R9831
4000 GB
(3725.29 GiB)
E07 format
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Platinum
Dark purple
(silvery gray)
46X7454
N/A4
N/A
N/A
N/A
1000 GB
(931.32 GiB)
E06 format
Black
Gray
18P7535
1. This designation appears as the last two characters on standard bar code labels. In addition, for cleaning
cartridges, the first three characters of the volume serial number (VOLSER) are CLN.
2. The Data type cartridge can also be ordered in a 260 GB (242.14 GiB) segmented, capacity scaled format
providing 64.42 GB (60 GiB) of high-performance random access, and an additional 200 GB (186.26 GiB) of
capacity.
3. Where xxx equals three numerals.
4. N/A = not applicable.
Note: In addition to these cartridges, there is a "CE" cartridge for use by IBM
Service Representatives only. The VOLSER label for this cartridge begins with "CE"
followed by a space and three numerals, and ending with "JA" or "JK".
Cartridge external components

This topic describes cartridge external components.
The main external components, common to all types of 3592 tape cartridges are
shown in Figure 7 on page 103 and Figure 8 on page 104.
102
Figure 7. 3592 tape cartridge

1
2
Cartridge case
IBM product label
3
4
Cartridge bar code label

Write-protect selector
In tape libraries, the library vision system identifies the types of cartridges during
an inventory operation. The vision system reads a volume serial number (VOLSER)
3, which appears on the label on the edge of the cartridge. The VOLSER contains
from one to six characters, which are left-justified on the label. If fewer than six
characters are used, spaces are added. The media type is indicated by seventh and
eighth characters. The different cartridge type codes are shown in the "Type"
column of Table 33 on page 100.
If you are attaching VOLSER labels to cartridges that do not have pre-attached
labels, place the label entirely within the label recessed area on the cartridge. See
3 in Figure 7 as an example of proper placement. The label must be flat to within
0.5 mm (0.02 in.) over the length of the label and have no folds, missing pieces,
tears, or any extraneous markings. Failure to follow these placement requirements
will result in degraded readability.
Each data cartridge includes a write-protect selector 4 which can be set to
prevent data from being over-written or erased from the tape by the tape drive. To
write-enable a cartridge, slide the selector to the left (see 1 in Figure 8 on page
104), which exposes a square hole, to permit data to be written to and erased from
the cartridge. To write-protect a cartridge, slide the selector to the right 2, which
covers the hole, preventing data to be written to or erased from the cartridge.
Chapter 3. Media
103
Figure 8. Write-protect selector

1 Write-enabled
2 Write-protected
When you insert a cartridge into the drive, a threading mechanism pulls the tape
leader pin and the attached tape out of the cartridge, across the drive head, and
onto a non-removeable take-up reel. The cartridge door (1 in Figure 9) protects
the tape from contamination when the cartridge is out of the drive. The only time
you should manually retract this door is to check for proper tape pin position .
Figure 9. Data cartridge door
Cartridge memory
This topic describes the cartridge memory (CM) of the 3592 tape cartridge.
Each 3592 data cartridge contains a passive, contactless, silicon storage device
called CM. This CM holds information about the cartridge and the media in the
cartridge, and holds statistics about the media in the cartridge. The cartridge and
media information is stored in a protected, read-only area of the CM. This
information is read by the CM reader in the drive, by using a contactless,
radio-frequency interface, when the cartridge is loaded into the drive. The media
performance statistics are stored in an unprotected, read/write area of the CM.
These statistics are updated by the CM reader just before the cartridge is unloaded.
The media performance statistics are maintained by the Statistical Analysis and
Reporting System (SARS) portion of the drive microcode. Each cleaning cartridge
also contains a CM, which tracks the number of cleaning uses.
Write-once, read-many
These topics describe the write-once, read-many (WORM) tape cartridge and
microcode controls.
104
Some records retention and data security applications require the WORM function
of tape data storage. The 3592 tape drives, when used in conjunction with WORM
media, could serve as a replacement to the IBM 3995 Optical Library where long
term records retention is required.
WORM function is accomplished on the 3592 by a combination of a special WORM
tape cartridge and microcode controls in the drive. All 3592 drives with the
appropriate microcode version installed are capable of reading and writing WORM
cartridges.
Note: Virtual tape subsystems (TS7700 Virtualization Engine) do not support
capacity scaling or segmentation.
Write-once, read-many tape cartridge characteristics

This topic describes the write-once, read-many (WORM) tape cartridge.
The following lists characteristics of WORM cartridges:
v WORM format pervades the entirety of every WORM cartridge. The WORM
tape media is formatted to give every block on a WORM cartridge write-once,
read-many protection. Additionally, the cartridge memory (CM) has a WORM
indicator byte in the cartridge type field. Both of these conditions must be true
for the drive to work with a WORM cartridge. If one condition is true and the
other is false, an ATTN DRV - Invalid Cartridge message will post.
v Each WORM cartridge is identified using a World-wide Unique Cartridge
Identifier (WWCID), which is permanent and locked, providing another level of
security for data that must be maintained. This permanent locked information is
stored in both the cartridge CM and on the tape itself, and can also be
associated with the unique barcode volume serial (VOLSER). WORM cartridges
can be audited using the WWCID and the write mount count.
|
v WORM cartridges are labeled with a 'JR,' 'JW,' 'JX' , or 'JY' and they are
color-coded to distinguish them from re-writable cartridges (the color-coding is
distinguishable by people with any of the three major varieties color blindness).
v The WORM cartridge is tamper-proof (see Write-once, read-many microcode
controls).
v WORM cartridges can only be read (or appended) on WORM enabled 3592
drives. Non-WORM enabled drives will not be able to take any action with a
WORM cartridge other than to unload it.
v A WORM cartridge can never be made non-WORM.
v A non-WORM cartridge cannot be made WORM.
v Written user data can never be modified or erased. Destruction of the data
requires destruction of the media and its usability (heat, crushing, physical
shredding, or magnetic fields sufficient to destroy all formatting required to ever
read or write the cartridge again).
Write-once, read-many microcode controls

This topic describes the write-once, read-many (WORM) microcode controls.
When the drive senses that a cartridge is a WORM cartridge, the microcode
prohibits the changing or altering of user data already written on the tape. The
microcode keeps track of the last appendable point on the tape by means of an
overwrite-protection pointer stored in the cartridge memory (CM). Statistical
Analysis and Reporting System (SARS) data can be written and updated on
WORM tapes because the SARS data is not in the user area of the tape.
Chapter 3. Media
105
Note: When a WORM cartridge is loaded and positioned at a nonappendable

point on a drive attached to a controller, the controller gives good status to a write
type command if the data being written is exactly the same as what is already
recorded on the media at the same location. However, the tape is not actually
written. The tape position is after the block with the apparent overwrite and all
data following is still valid on tape. When positioned at a nonappendable point
on a WORM cartridge, the microcode reports overwrite errors only if attempts are
made to write conflicting data. The scenario for this apparent overwrite is as
follows: The host issues a write type command to the controller and the tape is at
a nonappendable point. The controller attemps to write the WORM cartridge but
the drive gives an overwrite error. The controller then reads the block and
compares it to the block received from the host. If the block is exactly the same
then the controller gives good status to the host and leaves the tape positioned
after the block which was apparently overwritten. If the block varies in data or size
then the controller repositions the tape in front of the block just read and reports
the overwrite error to the host. This process is not optimal for performance
considerations.
Capacity scaling and segmentation

This section describes how the 3592 tape drives use capacity scaling and
segmentation to place data in a designated section of tape to speed access and
manage efficient capacity.
The 3592 tape drives support capacity scaling for tape cartridges of media types
JA, JB, and JC over a broad range of capacities. The effect of capacity scaling is to
contain data in a specified fraction of the tape, yielding faster locate and read
times. Alternatively, you can purchase economy tapes (the JJ or JK media type) to
achieve this faster performance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Performance scaling limits the data written to the first 20% of the cartridge and
when using the performance segmentation option, the overall capacity of the
cartridge is limited to 86.6% of the total capacity. The fast access segment occupies
the first 20% of the cartridge, followed by the slower access segment. For example,
with the Model E06 tape drive operating in EFMT3 format, the 3592 Extended Data
Tape Cartridge (type JB) can be scaled to 200 GB (186.26 GiB). And using
performance segmentation, the 1000 GB (931.32 GiB) Extended Data cartridge can
be segmented into a 200 GB (186.26 GiB) fast access segment, and 666 GB (620.26
GiB) slower access segment. Segmentation is only available within a specified
range of capacity scaling settings.
|
|
Capacity scaling is not supported for economy (JJ, JK) or write-once, read-many
(WORM) tapes (JW, JX, JY, and JR). For information about implementing
segmentation and capacity scaling, refer to the README files that pertain to your
device driver on the web at: http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral.
Customers using z/OS can exploit the capacity scaling capability of the 3592 drive.
A data class parameter determines whether a tape is to be scaled. OPEN
processing will scale a tape when the associated data class requests it and the tape
is being written from load point (DISP=NEW, file sequence 1). On a subsequent
reading of a performance scaled tape, the data will be entirely contained in the
first 20% of the tape, yielding very fast locate and read times.
DFSMShsm and DFSMSdfp OAM can exploit this new feature, as well as other
applications that use standard Open/Close/EOV processing. Refer to z/OS DFSMS
106
Software Support for IBM System Storage TS1140, TS1130, and TS1120 Tape Drives
(3592), SC26-7514, for more information about software support for the 3592 drive.
For more technical information regarding WORM, capacity scaling, and
segmentation, see also the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3592 SCSI
Reference.
Cartridges pre-scaled for 60 GB (55.88 GiB) or 100 GB (93.13 GiB) capacity are also
available for order with the 3599 Tape Media method. These pre-scaled cartridges
can be ordered (and labeled) for a specific VOLSER range. This allows capacity
scaling to be exploited by an application that permits media pools to be defined by
VOLSER range. For information on which Independent Software Vendors (ISV)
support capacity scaling by command or with the pre-scaled cartridges using the
3592 tape drives, refer to the following publication: http://www-03.ibm.com/
systems/resources/systems_storage_tape_pdf_compatibility_ts1120_isv_matrix.pdf .
Note: Virtual tape subsystems (TS7700 Virtualization Engine) do not support
capacity scaling or segmentation.
Cleaning cartridges
To help prevent errors caused by debris, it is important to clean the tape path, and
to manually clean the outsides of all data cartridges when first installing them in
the library. Cleaning of the tape path in each drive is normally an automated
procedure, and rarely requires manual intervention. This works automatically only
if the appropriate cleaning cartridges (IBM part 18P7535) are installed in the
library, and they still have remaining uses available. A 3592 cleaning cartridge is
shipped with the first drive in each installation, and additional cleaning cartridges
are available through IBM. The cleaning cartridge contains a Cartridge Memory
(CM) device, which automatically keeps track of the number of times it has been
used. Cleaning cartridges need to be replaced after 50 uses. The 3592 cleaning
cartridges are not interchangeable with 3590 cleaning cartridges, so you must have
both types of cleaning cartridges if you have both types of drives in your
environment.
Attention: Insert only clean and undamaged cleaning cartridges into a tape
system. Do not use a grease pencil on the label.
The physical characteristics of the 3592 cleaning cartridge can be used to
distinguish it from 3592 data cartridges. The product label on the top of the
cartridge is white, with the word "cleaning" printed on it. In place of the
write-protect switch, there is a non-moveable light gray block (see 1 in Figure 10
on page 108). If you order cleaning cartridges with pre-attached labels, the first
three characters of the volume serial number (VOLSER) 2 are CLN. The cartridge
door (see 1 in Figure 11 on page 108) is also light gray.
.
Chapter 3. Media
107
a14m0096
1
Figure 10. Cleaning cartridge identifying characteristics
1 Light gray non-moveable block
2 Cleaning cartridge sample label
a14m0107
Figure 11. Cleaning cartridge door
Cartridge care and handling

This section describes the care and handling of the IBM 3592 Tape Cartridge.
Handling the cartridges

Attention: Do not insert a damaged tape cartridge into your tape
drive. A damaged cartridge can interfere with the reliability of a drive
and may void the warranties of the drive and the cartridge. Before
inserting a tape cartridge, inspect the cartridge case, cartridge door, and
write-protect switch for breaks.
Incorrect handling or an incorrect environment can damage the IBM 3592 Tape
Cartridges and the magnetic tape. To avoid damage to your tape cartridges and to
ensure the continued high reliability of your TS1120 and later tape drives use the
following guidelines:
Provide training
v Post procedures that describe proper media handling in places where people
gather.
v Ensure that anyone who handles tape has been properly trained in handling and
shipping procedures. This includes operators, users, programmers, archival
services, and shipping personnel.
v Ensure that any service or contract personnel who perform archiving are
properly trained in media-handling procedures.
v Include media-handling procedures as part of any services contract.
v Define and make personnel aware of data recovery procedures.
108
Ensure proper packaging

v When you ship a cartridge, ship it in its original or better packaging.
v Use only shipping containers that securely hold the cartridges in place during
transportation. This can be in a well-packaged cardboard box or other container.
One such container can be procured from Perm-A-Store at the following web
address: www.turtlecase.com.
v If you ship the cartridge in a cardboard box or a box of a sturdy material, ensure
the following:
Place the cartridge in polyethylene plastic wrap or bags to protect it from
dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
Pack the cartridge snugly; do not allow it to move around.
Double-box the cartridge (place it inside a box, then place that box inside the
shipping box) and add padding between the two boxes.
v Never ship a cartridge in a commercial shipping envelope. Always place it in a
box or package.
Provide proper acclimation and environmental conditions

v Before you use a cartridge, let it acclimate to the normal operating environment
for a minimum of 24 hours. If you see condensation on the cartridge, wait an
additional hour.
v Ensure that all surfaces of a cartridge are dry before inserting it.
v Do not expose the cartridge to moisture or direct sunlight.
v Do not expose recorded or blank cartridges to stray magnetic fields of greater
than 350 oersteds (for example, terminals, motors, video equipment, X-ray
equipment, or fields that exist near high-current cables or power supplies). Such
exposure can cause the loss of recorded data or make the blank cartridge
unusable.
v Maintain the conditions that are described in Environmental specifications for
tape cartridges on page 110.
Perform a thorough inspection

After purchasing a cartridge and before using it, perform the following steps:
v Inspect the cartridge's packaging to determine potential rough handling.
v When inspecting a cartridge, open only the cartridge door. Do not open any
other part of the cartridge case. The upper and lower parts of the case are held
together with screws; separating them destroys the usefulness of the cartridge.
v Inspect the cartridge for damage before using or storing it.
v Check that the leader pin is properly seated.
v If you suspect that the cartridge has been mishandled but it appears usable,
copy any data onto a good cartridge immediately for possible data recovery.
Discard the mishandled cartridge.
Handle the cartridge carefully

v Do not drop the cartridge. If the cartridge drops, slide the cartridge door back
and ensure that the leader pin is properly seated.
v Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge. Handling the tape can damage
the tape's surface or edges, which may interfere with read or write reliability.
Pulling on tape that is outside the cartridge can damage the tape and the brake
mechanism in the cartridge.
v Do not stack more than six cartridges. Although 3590 tapes can be stacked with
3592 tapes, be cautious about mixing the different types of cartridges, since they
are not interchangeable, and can be used only with their respective drives.
Chapter 3. Media
109
v Do not degauss a cartridge that you intend to reuse. Degaussing makes the tape
unusable.
Environmental specifications for tape cartridges

Before you use a tape cartridge, acclimate it to the operating environment for 24
hours or the time necessary to prevent condensation in the drive (the time will
vary, depending on the environmental extremes to which the cartridge was
exposed).
The best storage container for the cartridges (until they are opened) is the original
shipping container. The plastic wrapping prevents dirt from accumulating on the
cartridges and partially protects them from humidity changes.
Table 34 lists the environmental conditions for operating and storing IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Cartridges.
Table 34. Environment for operating and storing the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape
Cartridge
Environmental Specifications
Environmental
Factor
Operational Storage
Archival Storage
16 to 32C
16 to 25C
(60 to 90F)
(61 to 77F)
20 to 80%
20 to 50%
26C
26C
(79F)
(79F)
Temperature
Relative humidity
(non-condensing)
Wet bulb maximum
temperature
Magnetic field
Stray magnetic field at any point on tape not to exceed 350 Oe.
Note:
1. Operational storage is defined as media that is stored, but also used in a drive during
storage at least once every six months.
2. Archival storage is defined as media that is stored, and used in a drive during storage
less frequently than once every six months.
Cartridge quality and library maintenance

The IBM tape cartridge provides high performance and reliability with IBM
magnetic tape cartridge drives when the cartridge is properly handled and stored.
Repeated handling or inadvertent mishandling can damage the physical parts of
the cartridge and make it unusable.
The magnetic tape inside the cartridge is made of highly durable materials.
However, the tape wears after repeated cycles in the tape system. Eventually, such
wear can cause an increase in tape errors.
Track the error data available by monitoring both the cartridge and cartridge
library performance. By monitoring error data, you can identify and replace
cartridges that are no longer acceptable for continued use.
Proper maintenance of your cartridge library helps to keep IBM magnetic tape
cartridge systems operating in a reliable and efficient manner.
110
Media supplies
The topics in this section describe planning considerations for media supplies.
This section provides information on different ways of ordering media supplies,
including feature codes and part numbers for ordering media supplies for 3592
tape drives. Selected media supplies can be ordered using feature codes when
purchasing a 3592 drive. This is the "pack-in" method of ordering, and the media
will be shipped with the hardware order. Not all media types are available with
this method. The 3599 Tape Media method is available for ordering all types of
data and cleaning cartridges. This method is typically used for ordering larger
quantities, and for ordering initialized and/or pre-labeled cartridges. Media
supplies can also be ordered using part numbers, through IBM-authorized
distributors.
Feature Code descriptions ("pack-in")

This topic describes media feature codes.
Note: FC 8802, FC 8820, FC 9590 will no longer be marketed by IBM beginning in
January 2005. See 3599 media supplies on page 112 to order 3592 media.
Table 35 lists the media features, which can be used to order media when ordering
a 3592 drive. Only the 300 GB (279.39 GiB) Data cartridges and the Cleaning
cartridges can be ordered using this method. For all other media types, you must
use the 3599 Tape Media method, or order by part number through an
IBM-authorized distributor.
Table 35. Media features ("pack-in")
Feature Code
Description
8802
One IBM 3592 Cleaning cartridge
8820
Twenty IBM 3592 Data cartridges 300 GB (279.39 GiB) only
9590
No data cartridges
Feature Code definitions

The topics in this section describe the feature codes.
Cleaner Cartridge (FC 8802)

This topic describes the Cleaner Cartridge (FC 8802).
Note: FC 8802 will no longer be marketed by IBM beginning in January 2005.
This feature provides a 3592 cleaning cartridge for 3592 tape drives. Maximum:
five. Plant or field installation.
Twenty 3592 Data Cartridges (FC 8820)

This topic describes Feature Code 8820.
Note: FC 8820 will no longer be marketed by IBM beginning in January 2005.
This feature provides twenty 300 GB Data cartridges for 3592 tape drives.
Maximum: five. Plant installation only.
Chapter 3. Media
111
3599 media supplies

This topic describes 3599 media supplies.
Customers can order media using the 3599 Tape Media method. This provides the
ability to order unlabeled, pre-labeled, initialized, and bulk-packaged tape data
cartridges in a wide variety of combinations and cleaning cartridges for the 3592
tape drive. Orders may be placed by calling IBM Americas at 1-800-IBM-CALL
(1-800-426-2255). The following cartridge types are available:
v Standard Data cartridges (JA):
300 GB (279.39 GiB) EFMT1 format
Other format not supported
v Extended Data cartridges (JB):

v Advanced Data cartridges (JC):
Other formats not supported
v Economy Data cartridges (JJ):
|
|
|

v Advanced Economy Data cartridges (JK):
|
|
|

v Economy WORM (write-once, read-many) cartridges (JR):
v Standard WORM cartridges (JW):

v Extended WORM cartridges (JX):
v Advanced WORM cartridges (JY):
112
Segmentation and capacity scaling options are available on the 300 GB (279.39 GiB)
Data cartridge for a 60 GB (55.88 GiB) fast access capability, and a 260 GB (242.14
GiB) segmented tape with 60 GB (55.88 GiB) of fast access, and 200 GB (186.26 GiB)
of additional capacity.
With the 3599 Tape Media method of ordering, model numbers are used to identify
the cartridge types, and feature code combinations are used to specify the
quantities, labeling, and initialization options. Table 36 shows a few examples of
ordering options for each cartridge type. Note that additional feature codes are
required to completely specify all desired characteristics of the cartridges.
3599 media feature descriptions

This topic describes the 3599 media features.
|
||
||
||
|
|
|
|
|
Table 36. Descriptions of 3599 tape media features

3599 Model
011
Media ID/
Feature
Code
JA/9030
Feature Code for Labeling,

Initialization, and Quantity
1
Regular
RFID
1020
1021
|
|
|
|
||
012
JA/9030
2020
Format
2021
9082
640 GB
(596.05 GiB)
9081
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
9080
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
N/A3
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
|
|
|
||
013
JA/9030
3020
N/A
N/A
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
|
|
|
||
Individual
Cartridge
Capacity2, 5
014
JB/9032
4020
4021
9084
9082
|
|
|
Description
20-pack 3592 Data
cartridges, labeled and
initialized
20-pack 3592 Data

cartridges, labeled, not
initialized
20-pack 3592 Data

cartridges, not labeled and
not initialized
1600 GB
20-pack 3592 Extended
(1490.12 GiB) Data cartridges, labeled
and initialized
1000 GB
(931.32 GiB)
9081
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)
|
|
|
015
JB/9032
5020
5021
N/A
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)

Data cartridges, labeled,
not initialized
|
|
|
016
JB/9032
6020
N/A
N/A
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)

Data cartridges, not
labeled and not initialized
|
|
|
420
JC/9035
4211
4221
9084
4 TB
(3.64 TiB)
20-pack 3592 Advanced

Data cartridges, labeled
and initialized
|
|
|
520
JC/9035
5221
5231
N/A
4 TB
(3.64 TiB)

Data cartridges, labeled,
not initialized
Chapter 3. Media
113
|
||
||
||
Table 36. Descriptions of 3599 tape media features (continued)

3599 Model
Media ID/
Feature
Code

Regular
RFID1
Format
Individual
Cartridge
Capacity2, 5
|
|
|
620
JC/9035
6200
N/A
N/A
4 TB
(3.64 TiB)
|
|
|
|
|
E11
JJ/9050
1120
1121
9082
128 GB
(119.21 GiB)
9081
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
9080
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
|
|
Description
Data cartridges, not
20-pack 3592 Economy
initialized
|
|
|
E12
JJ/9050
1220
1221
N/A
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)

initialized
|
|
|
E13
JJ/9050
1320
N/A
N/A
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)

not initialized
|
|
|
430
JK/9052
4300
4310
9084
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)

Economy cartridges,
labeled and initialized
|
|
|
530
JK/9052
5300
5310
N/A
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)

Economy cartridges,
labeled, not initialized
|
|
|
630
JK/9052
6300
N/A
N/A
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)

Economy cartridges, not
|
|
|
|
|
0214
JW/9040
2120
2121
9082
640 GB
(596.05 GiB)
9081
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
20-pack 3592 WORM

initialized
9080
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
N/A
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
|
|
0224
|
|
||
JW/9040
2220
2221
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
|
0234
|
|
||
JW/9040
2320
N/A
N/A
500 GB
(465.66 GiB)
300 GB
(279.39 GiB)
|
0244
|
|
||
JX/9044
2420
2421
9082
1000 GB
(931.32 GiB)
9081
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)
N/A
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)
|
0254
|
|
|
114
JX/9044
2520
2521
20-pack 3592 WORM

initialized
20-pack 3592 WORM

not initialized

WORM cartridges, labeled
and initialized

WORM cartridges, labeled,
not initialized
|
||
||
||
Table 36. Descriptions of 3599 tape media features (continued)

3599 Model
Media ID/
Feature
Code

Regular
RFID1
Format
Individual
Cartridge
Capacity2, 5
Description
|
|
|
0264
JX/9044
2620
N/A
N/A
700 GB
(651.93 GiB)

WORM cartridges, not
|
|
|
440
JY/9046
4400
4410
9084
4 TB
(3.64 TiB)

and initialized
|
|
|
540
JY/9046
5400
5410
N/A
4 TB
(3.64 TiB)

not initialized
|
|
|
640
JY/9046
6400
N/A
N/A
4 TB
(3.64 TiB)

|
|
|
|
|
E214
JR/9042
3120
3121
9082
128 GB
(119.21 GiB)
9081
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)

and initialized
9080
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
N/A
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
|
|
|
|
||
E224
JR/9042
3220
3221
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)
|
|
|
||
E234
JR/9042
3320
N/A
N/A
100 GB
(93.13 GiB)
60 GB
(58.88 GiB)

not initialized

|
|
|
017
JA
7005
N/A
N/A
cleaning, 50
uses
5-pack 3592 Cleaning

Cartridges, with media
identification labels
|
|
|
017
JA
7006
N/A
N/A
cleaning, 50
uses
5-pack 3592 Cleaning

Cartridges without media
identification labels
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Notes:
1. Radio frequency identification labels
2. For more details about individual cartridge capacities, see Table 33 on page 100.
3. N/A = Not applicable
4. This product is no longer available for order by this method. Refer to Ordering media supplies by part
number to order this media type.
5. For cartridges that are not initialized, the actual cartridge capacity is dependent on the format used to write the
cartridge.
Ordering media supplies by part number

This topic describes ordering media supplies by part number.
Table 37 on page 116 and Table 38 on page 116 list the data cartridges and media
supplies that you can order for the 3592 tape drives.
Chapter 3. Media
115
You can use one of the following methods to order the cartridges and media
supplies shown in Table 37 and Table 38 by part number:
v Order online or through an IBM-authorized distributor (for the closest
distributor or to order online, see http://www.ibm.com/storage/media)
v If you do not have Internet access, order from any authorized IBM business
partner or your IBM sales representative.
v Call 1-888-IBM-MEDIA
Table 37. 3592 media supplies for the 3592 tape drive
Supply Item1
|
|
|
|
Part Number
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Data (JA)
E06 format: 640 GB (596.04 GiB)

E05 format: 500 GB (465.66 GiB)
J1A format: 300 GB (279.39 GiB)
18P7534
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended

Data (JB)
E07 format: 1600 GB (1490.12 GiB)

E06 format: 1000 GB (931.32 GiB)
E05 format: 700 GB (651.93 GiB)
23R9830
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Advanced

Data (JC)
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Economy
(JJ)
|
|
Capacity2

Economy (JK)
E07 format: 4000 GB (3725.29 GiB)

E06 format: 128 GB (119.21 GiB)
E05 format: 100 GB (93.13 GiB)
E07 format: 500 GB (465.66 GiB)
46X7452
24R0316
46X7453
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Economy

WORM (write-once, read-many) (JR)
E06 format: 128 GB (119.21 GiB)

E05 format: 100 GB (93.13 GiB)
24R0317
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 WORM

(JW)
E06 format: 640 GB (596.04 GiB)

E05 format: 500 GB (465.66 GiB)
18P7538
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Extended

WORM (JX)
E07 format: 1600 GB (1490.12 GiB)

E06 format: 1000 GB (931.32 GiB)
E05 format: 700 GB (651.93 GiB)
23R9831

WORM (JY)
E07 format: 4000 GB (3725.29 GiB)
IBM Tape Cartridge 3592 Cleaning
Cleaning, 50 uses
46X7454
18P7535
Notes:
1. Be sure to order bar code labels for all cleaning and data cartridges. Order volume serial (VOLSER) labels
separately.
2. Cartridge capacities vary depending on tape drive and format.
We recommend that you keep a lint-free cloth for wiping the outside of cartridges,
and the item listed in Table 38, to maintain your cartridges.
Table 38. Supplies for 3592 cartridge maintenance
Description
Leader Pin Reattachment Kit. This kit is for 3592
cartridges only. It contains the necessary tools to reattach
the leader pin to the tape. It includes the rewind tool,
which can be used to add tension to a tape if the leader
pin is displaced.
116
Part number
18P8887
Repair supplies
The topics in this section describe repair supplies.
Ordering bar code labels

This topic describes ordering bar code labels.
Bar code labels with VOLSERS are required for cartridges used within a library.
You can order these labels separately from the IBM Data Cartridges and Cleaning
Cartridges.
Attention: The IBM System Storage TS3400 and TS3500 tape libraries and the
IBM TotalStorage 3494 Tape Library are designed to work with bar code labels that
meet the specifications and requirements set forth in the Barcode Label
Specification for use with 3592 Tape Media. The label providers listed in Table 39
have demonstrated the ability to produce finished bar code labels that meet the
foregoing specifications and requirements. This information is provided for the
convenience of IBM tape library users only, and is not an endorsement or
recommendation of such providers. IBM is not responsible for the quality of bar
code labels procured from sources other than IBM. This information is applicable
to bar code labels actually printed by the listed companies. IBM has not reviewed
the quality of any labels produced by software or services offered by such
companies which allow end users to print labels on their own printing equipment.
You can order bar code labels directly from the authorized label suppliers in
Table 39.
|
|
Table 39. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels

In the Americas
In Europe and Asia
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Dataware
PO Box 740947
Houston, TX 77274
U.S.A.
Telephone: 800-426-4844 or 713-432-1023
Fax: 713-432-1385
http://www.datawarelabels.com/
Not applicable
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Tri-Optic
6800 West 117th Avenue
Broomfield, CO 80020
U.S.A.
Telephone: 888-438-8362 or 303-464-3508
Fax: 888-438-8363 or 303-666-2166
http://www.tri-optic.com
EDP Europe Limited

43 Redhills Road
South Woodham Ferrers
Chelmsford, Essex CM3 5UL
U.K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1245 322380
Fax: 44 (0) 1245 323484
http://www.edpeurope.com/media-labels.html
Chapter 3. Media
117
Table 39. Authorized suppliers of custom bar code labels (continued)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the Americas
1
Netc, L.L.C.
100 Corporate Drive
Trumbull, CT 06611
U.S.A.
Telephone: 203-372-6382
Fax: 203-372-0676
http://www.NetcLabels.com
Netc Europe Ltd

The Old Surgery
5a The Pavement
North Curry TA3 6LX
Somerset
U.K.
Telephone: 44 (0) 1823 491439
Fax: 44 (0)1823 491373
http://www.NetcLabels.co.uk
Netc Asia Pacific Pty Ltd1
PO Box 872
Cooroy QLD 4563
Australia
Telephone: 61 (0) 7 5442 6263
Fax: 61 (0) 7 5442 6522
http://www.NetcLabels.com.au
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In Europe and Asia

1
Note:
1. This is an authorized supplier for Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) labels.
118
Chapter 4. Site planning

This section describes various characteristics and specifications necessary for your
site planning.
Environmental specifications
This topic describes planning environmental specifications for 3592 drives.
The environments shown in Table 40 apply to the components of the tape
subsystem, and not to tape cartridges. Measurements should be taken at the front
of the drive. The maximum allowed operational altitude of 2134 m (7000 ft.)
applies to the 3592 tape drives and controllers.
Table 40. 3592 tape drive environmental specifications
Condition
Temperature
Relative Humidity
(non-condensing)
Maximum Wet Bulb
Operating
16 to 32C (60.8 to
89.6F)
20% to 80%
26C (78.8F)
Recommended
Operating
20 to 25C (68 to 77
F)
40% to 50%
23C (73.4F)
Non-operating*
10 to 43C (50 to
109.4F)
10% to 90%
26C (78.8F)
Storage*
1 to 60C (33.8 to
140F)
10% to 90%
non-condensing
Shipping*
-40 to 60C (-40 to

140F)
10% to 90%
26C (78.8F)
*Excluding tape cartridges. See Environmental specifications for tape cartridges on page
110 for more information on the environmental conditions recommended for tape
cartridges.
Table 41. 3592 Model J70 controller environmental specifications
Operating Temperature
16 to 32 C (60.8 to 89.6 F)
Relative Humidity
20% to 80% non-condensing (limited by

media)
Wet Bulb Temperature
23 C (73.4 F)
Cooling requirements
This topic describes the cooling requirements for 3592 drives.
There are no additional external cooling requirements for the 3592 tape drives or
controllers if ambient environment is within limits described in Table 40 and
Table 41. Do not obstruct air inlets or exhaust of cooling fans.
Acoustic specifications
This topic describes the acoustic specifications for 3592 drives.
119
Table 42 shows the acoustic specifications for the 3592 tape drives and controllers.
Table 42. Acoustic specifications
Model
<LpA>m
LWAd
Operating (bels)
Idling (bels)
Operating (dB)
Idling (dB)
3592 tape drive
6.3
6.2
49
48
3592 controller
6.4
6.4
49.8
49.8
Notes:
v For definitions of levels, refer to IBM General Information Manual: Installation
Manual-Physical Planning
v LWAd - is the declared upper limit sound power level.
v <LpA>m - is the mean value of the A-weighted sound pressure at the one-meter
position.
Cabling information
This topic describes planning considerations for cabling.
For host system cable attachment planning information, see Chapter 6, Device
attachment planning, on page 145 and Controller cable features on page 90 for
various cable feature definitions and requirements.
To locate IBM resources to assist you in determining cabling needs, see 3592 tape
drive features on page 31.
3592 power characteristics

This topic describes power characteristics.
A rack or frame, with connections to an ac source, supplies ac power to the 3592
dc power supply.
The 3592 devices accept a variety of supply voltages and frequencies. The voltage
and frequency range is from 100 - 240 V ac (nominal) and 50 - 60 Hz (nominal)
respectively. The device adjusts itself automatically for proper operation with any
combination of these voltages and frequencies.
This equipment design is connectable to an impedance-terminated neutral power
system.
Power specifications
This topic describes power specifications.
120
Table 43 shows the power specifications for the 3592 tape drives and the
controllers.
Table 43. Input voltages
|
|
Model
50 Hz 0.5 Hz
60 Hz 0.5 Hz
Operating
Current
Nominal at
200 V ac
3592 tape
drive1
100 - 240 V ac
100 - 240 V ac
0.3 amps
50 amps
65 w2
3592 J70
controller
100 - 240 V ac
100 - 240 V ac
3.0 amps
200 amps
600 w
3592 C06
controller
100 - 240 V ac
100 - 240 V ac
3.0 amps
200 amps
1190 w
Note:
Inrush
Current
Typical
Power
Consumed
for single drive and single power supply 2 operating maximum continuous not
peak
Power cords
This topic describes power cords.
The power cords on the 3592 tape drives have a bifurcated (y-shaped) plug which
connects the tape drives' two redundant power supplies to one power receptacle in
the rack, library, or frame.
|
|
|
The 3592 controller connects to one or two power receptacles. It is recommended to

use two power cords and separate power supplies to power the 3592 C06
controller whether in a rack, library, or frame. The 3592 controller power supplies
operate from 100 to 127 V ac or 200 to 240 V ac, at 50 or 60 Hz.
121
3592 tape drive specifications

Note: 3592 tape drives are hot-swappable. Power is automatically disconnected
from a drive when it is pulled from its cradle in a rack or frame.
English measurements are shown in parentheses.
Table 44. 3592 tape drive specifications
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
mm
(in.)
Front
154.2
(6.071)
Side
Height
466.6
94.5
(18.37)
(3.72)
Service Clearances:
Refer to the rack installation for clearances.
Weight:
kg
(lb.)
5.7
(12 lbs. 9 oz.)
Heat Output:
.043 kw
(.147 kBTU /Hour)
Exhaust capacity:
0.34 m/min
(12 CFM)
Power Requirements:
See Table 43 on page 121
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller specifications

CAUTION:
To prevent a possible electrical shock when adding or removing any devices to or from
the system, ensure that the power cords for those devices are unplugged before the signal
cables are connected or disconnected. If possible, disconnect all power cords from the
existing system before you add or remove a device. (RSFTD203)
122
Table 45. TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller Specifications

SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Width: 442 mm (17.4 in.)
Depth: 573 mm (22.6 in.)
Height: 172 mm (6.8 in.)
442 mm
(17.4 in)
Service Clearances:
Refer to the frame or rack
installation for clearances.
573mm
(22.6 in)
Weight: 28.1 kg (62 lb.) without

mounting hardware. 39 kg (86 lb.)
with mounting hardware.
Heat Output:
0.63 kw (2046 BTU/hr)
a14m0168
Exhaust Capacity:
1.4 m/min
(50 CFM)
Power Requirements:
1190 Watts
Phases
1
Note: An appropriate internal line
cord is attached at the factory that
plugs into the rack, library, or
frame and takes advantage of its
external power cord.
123
TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller connections
Power Supply
(E2)
(T6)
Serial2
Serial1
1Gb Enet
USB0
Port1 1Gb Enet
Port2
(T8) (T9)
(C3)
(C4)
Slot 6
(T7)
(T1)
Slot 5
Slot 2
(C2)
Slot 3
Slot 1
(C1)
(T5)
(T2)
(C7-T3)
SPCN 0
Slot 4 PCIX DDR 266
Power Supply
(E1)
(C7-T1)
FSP Card HMC1 (C7-T2)
GX+ Slot (C7)
HMC2
(C21)
RIO0/IB0
(C21-T1)
(C5)
(C6)
6 PCI-X Slots
SPCN 1
USB1
Racklnd (C7-T4)
a14m0175
RIO1/IB1
(C21-T2)
Figure 12. TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller back panel
When the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller is installed, Ethernet ports T5 and T6 are
connected to the network. One or more of the six PCI adapter slots may be
populated with fiber optic cards, depending on the features installed.
The following ports are defined for service use only:
Serial ports (T1, T2)
USB ports (USB0, USB1)
Rack Indicator (T9)
FSP (C7) Ethernet ports (C7-T1, C7-T2)
FSP (C7) Serial ports (C7-T3, C7-T4)
GX+ Slot (C21) connections (covered by plate: C21-T1 and C21-T2)
Ethernet connector (located in operator panel on front of TS1120 (3592 C06)
Controller)
3592 Model J70 controller specifications

CAUTION:
To prevent a possible electrical shock when adding or removing any devices to or from
the system, ensure that the power cords for those devices are unplugged before the signal
cables are connected or disconnected. If possible, disconnect all power cords from the
existing system before you add or remove a device. (RSFTD203)
124
Table 46. 3592 Model J70 controller specifications
445
(17.5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions:
Width: 445 mm (17.5 in.)
Depth: 603 mm (23.8 in.)
Height: 222 mm (8.7 in.)
603
(23.8)
Service Clearances:
Refer to the frame or rack installation
for clearances.
Weight:
j70m0036
29 kg (63 lb.) without mounting

hardware
39 kg (86 lb.) with mounting hardware
Heat Output:
3592 J70 Controller
0.68 kw (2.05 kBTU/hr)
Exhaust Capacity:
1.4 m/min
(50 CFM)
Power Requirements:
kVA
Phases
0.68 (Maximum)
1
Note: An appropriate internal line cord

is attached at the factory that plugs into
the rack, library, or frame and takes
advantage of its external power cord.
3952 F05 Tape Frame specifications

To prevent a possible electrical shock when adding or removing any
devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cords for those
devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected or
disconnected. If possible, disconnect all power cords from the existing
system before you add or remove a device. (RSFTD203)
The weight of this assembly is such that it requires two or more persons
to facilitate safe handling.
125
Weight with one C06 controller: 279.5 kg (616

lb.)
Heat Output with one C06 controller: 0.63 kw
(2046 BTU/hr)
Airflow Rate with one C06 controller: 1.4
m/min (50 CFM)
Power Requirements with one C06 controller:
1190 Watts
Phases
1
Power Supply Requirements with C06:
Plug Type
R&S 3750
Receptacle Type
R&S 3753
Inline Connector
R&S 3933
a14m0169
Notes:
FRAME SPECIFICATIONS
English measurements are in parentheses.
Dimensions:
Width
644 mm (25.4 in.)
Depth
1102 mm (43.4 in.)
Height
1804 mm (71.0 in.)
v The weight includes the weights of the power

supply, one controller, and associated cables.
v Add 39 kg for each additional 3592 Model
C06 Controller and associated mounting
hardware.
v Add 10.4 kg for each additional Fibre channel
switch and associated mounting hardware.
v A 3952 Model F05 frame with one 3592 Model
C06 Controller with an overvoltage of 10%
above the 240 V maximum can have a
maximum leakage current of 7.0 ma.
v The appropriate line cord is attached at the
factory based on the destination country or
region.
When FC 5593 is installed, two additional routers are present in the 3952 F05 to
provide redundant out-of-band paths between the tape controller and the EKM.
3952 Model F05 Layout Specifications

Measurements are in millimeters. English measurements (in inches) are in
parentheses.
Use the tip plate when installing the 3592 Model C06 in the Model F05
frame.
126
Caster
Power cord exit
Cable exit area
a8300084
Leveling pad
Figure 13. Top View of 3952 Model F05 Frame Layout
127
128

These topics describe the necessary planning for the IBM 3592 TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System.
A full planning agenda includes the following:
v Host configuration for the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller
v Planning for the nondisruptive addition of drives on page 130
|
v
v
v
v
v
Planning
Planning
Planning
Planning
Planning
for
for
for
for
for
data encryption on TS1120 and later tape drives on page 130

supplies and equipment on page 135
operator training on page 136
drive cleaning on page 136
applications programming on page 137
Physical planning is a customer responsibility. Current levels of the open systems

device drivers should be obtained to ensure the 3592 tape drives are supported.
The 3590 Model 60 controller and 3494 Tape Library may require microcode
updates by the IBM Service Representative for the proper installation and
operation of attached 3592 tape drives.
Host configuration for the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller

Below is a sample IOCP deck which would be used by the host to install one 3590
Model A60 controller named 'LAUREL' and one TS1120 (C06) Controller named
'HARDY' with 3592 Model J1A tape drives attached to both:
*******************************************************************
* 3592
DRIVES: A60
*
FICON F4,F5 SW=20
*
ESCON 4D,4E SW=BB
*
LAUREL A60 SERNO 006
*******************************************************************
LAUREL CNTLUNIT CUNUMBR=0F41,PATH=(4D,4E,F4,F5),
UNITADD=((00,16)),LINK=(94,94,06,07),
UNIT=3590
TAPE0780 IODEVICE ADDRESS=(780,16),UNIT=3590,CUNUMBR=(0F41),
UNITADD=00
*******************************************************************
* 3592 DRIVES:
C06
*
FICON NATIVE EC,ED
*
ESCON 14,15,16,17
*
FICON FCV F2,F3,FE,FF (FICON-ESCON CONVERTER)
*
HARDY C06 SERNO 247
*******************************************************************
HARDY CNTLUNIT CUNUMBR=14C,PATH=(F2,F3,FE,FF,EC),
UNITADD=((00,16)),LINK=(06,0E,16,1E,32),
UNIT=3590
TAPE07C0 IODEVICE ADDRESS=(07C0,16),UNIT=3590,CUNUMBR=(14C),
UNITADD=00
Col 80
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notice that the above J1A IOCP deck sets 'UNIT' equal to '3590', just as you would
see in a 3590 IOCP deck. At this level, software ignores the differences between the
two drive types.
Also notice that for each controller, the following line appears:
129
UNITADD=((00,16)),LINK=(06,0E,16,1E,32),
This line specifies that each controller allows attachment for up to sixteen 3592
tape drives (sixteen is the maximum number of 3592 tape drives that can be
attached to a TS1120 (C06) Controller). It is recommended that you set 'UNITADD'
to allow attachment for up to the maximum number of 3592 tape drives you plan
to attach to each controller. See Planning for the nondisruptive addition of
drives for more planning information.
Planning for the nondisruptive addition of drives

This topic describes the non-disruptive addition of drives.
Functional Enhancement Field (FC0520) on page 63 updates the tape controller's
microcode to support the nondisruptive addition of tape drives to an installed
tape controller. In addition, the following steps must be completed during the
installation of a tape controller to allow for the nondisruptive addition of tape
drives to a tape controller:
v The 'UNITADD' value in the hosts's IOCP deck for the tape controller must be
set equal to the maximum number of drives you plan to add to the controller.
See Host configuration for the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller on page 129 for an
example of an IOCP deck with 'UNITADD=((00,16))', which allows up to sixteen
3592 tape drives to be added to the installed controller (sixteen is the maximum
number of 3592 tape drives that can be attached to a TS1120 (3592 C06)
Controller or 3592 Model J70 Controller). By setting the 'UNITADD' value to the
maximum number of 3592 tape drives you plan to install, the host assigns
addresses sequentially for all drives, and the non-disruptive addition of tape
drives is possible only when the tape drives' addresses have been assigned
sequentially.
v Record the 'UNITADD' value for later reference so that you can provide it to
IBM service representatives.
Refer to the IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3592 Operator Guide for more
information on the operator tasks.
|
Planning for data encryption on TS1120 and later tape drives
|
|
|
|
|
IBM currently supports encryption key management in its self-encrypting tape

storage solutions with three encryption key servers (EKSs). The following links
have information on downloading, installing, and using these products:
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform, available at
http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=ssg1S4000504
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The Encryption Key Manager does not support the TS1140 Tape Drive.
v Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager, available at http://www-01.ibm.com/software/
tivoli/products/key-lifecycle-mgr
v IBM Security Key Lifecycle Manager for z/OS, available at http://
www.ibm.com/software/tivoli/products/security-key-lifecycle-mgr-z
Note: Please contact your IBM Representative for additional information about
encryption on TS1120 and later tape drives.
130
Encryption Key Manager Setup Tasks

The following topics provide the setup tasks required for the IBM Encryption Key
Manager component for the Java platform.
Note: The following information is only for the IBM Encryption Key Manager
component for the Java platform. If you are using one of the other IBM supported
encryption key servers, refer to the appropriate product documentation. See
Planning for data encryption on TS1120 and later tape drives on page 130.
Before you can encrypt tapes, the Encryption Key Manager must first be
configured and running so that it can communicate with the encrypting tape
drives. The Encryption Key Manager need not be running while tape drives are
being installed, but it must be running in order to perform encryption.
These are the tasks you must perform before using the Encryption Key Manager.
See IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform Installation, Planning,
and User's Guide for details.
v Decide what system platforms to use as Encryption Key Manager servers.
v Upgrade the server operating system if necessary.
v Upgrade the Java Virtual Machine if necessary.
v Install Java Unrestricted Policy Files.
v Upgrade the Encryption Key Manager JAR. This can be found at the IBM
website http://www.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?&uid=ssg1S4000504 (or
visit http://www.ibm.com/servers/storage/support/tape/ts1120/
downloading.html and click downloads and look for IBM Encryption Key
Manager for the Java platform).
v Decide on keystore type.
v Create keys, certificates, and key groups.
v If necessary, import keys and certificates (See previous step).
v Define the configuration properties file.
v Define tape drives to the Encryption Key Manager or set
drive.acceptUnknownDrives configuration property value on.
v Start the Encryption Key Manager server.
v Start the command line interface client.
Planning for Application-Managed Tape Encryption

This topic provides the setup tasks required for application-managed tape
encryption.
In order to perform encryption the following is required:
|
v Encryption-capable TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives
Application-Managed Tape Encryption Setup Tasks

|
|
|
Any task not identified as an IBM service task is the responsibility of the customer.
1. Install and cable the TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drive (IBM service task).
v Update library firmware (3494, TS3500 where applicable)
v Update tape drive firmware (all tape drives in same library or environment)
2. Encryption-enable the TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drive. Refer to the IBM
System Storage TS3500 Tape Library Information Center at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/ts3500tl/v1r0/index.jsp for
131
configuring TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives on the TS3500. For TS1120 or
TS1130 tape drives on all others, this is an IBM service task.
3. Install appropriate IBM tape device driver level (Atape, for example) where
required by application.
4. Set up encryption policies. Refer to IBM Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX
Administrator's Guide.
5. Perform write/read operation to test encryption.

6. Verify encryption of the test volume by Autonomic Management Engine
(AME): issue
QUERY VOLUME FORMAT=DETAILED
Verify that Drive Encryption Key Manager is set to Tivoli Storage Manager.
Planning for System-Managed Tape Encryption

This topic presents the required setup tasks for system-managed tape encryption.
In order to perform system-managed encryption the following is required:
v Encryption-capable TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives.
v Keys and corresponding certificates.
v IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform.

v Routers and cables for out-of-band Encryption Key Manager-to-TS1120, TS1130,
or TS1140 tape drive path (System z platforms only).
|
|
Setup Tasks for System-Managed Tape Encryption on IBM

System z Platforms
v Update tape drive firmware (3592 Models E05, J1A in same environment)
v Update 3494, TS3500, and 3953 tape system library firmware (System z
platforms or 3953 in heterogeneous environment)
v Update 3592 Models C06, J70 Tape Controller firmware (System z platforms
or tape controllers in heterogeneous environment) (optional)
v Update TS7700 Virtualization Engine microcode.
2. Encryption-enable the TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drive. Refer to the IBM
configuring TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives on the TS3500. The 3494
Web Specialist can now be used to enable encryption on the TS1120 or TS1130
drive in a 3494 Tape Library. Refer to the IBM TotalStorage Automated Tape
Library (3494) Operator's Guide. For TS7700-attached drives, specify the
system-managed encryption method. For others, this is an IBM service task.
3. Install tape controller code update, Feature Code 5595 (IBM service task).
4. Install, cable, and configure routers to the Encryption Key Manager, Feature
Code 5593 (for out-of-band path to the Encryption Key Manageronly) (IBM
service task).
|
|
|
v Define Primary/Secondary Encryption Key Manager IP ports for the tape

controller.
5. Update z/OS and DFSMS host software with appropriate PTFs.
6. Install Feature Code 9900 License Key on the TS7700.
132
7. Set up encryption policies.

v Update DFSMS Data Class to specify encryption (recording format EE2) and
other optional parameters (media type, performance scaling, etc.) as
appropriate.
v Specify the key labels through the DD statement, data class or Encryption
Key Manager defaults.
v Update other DFSMS polices (as appropriate) to steer allocation to the
correct library.
v Encryption on the TS7700 VE is controlled on a storage pool basis. Use the
Maintenance Interface (MI) web interface for the TS7700 VE Pool
Encryption Settings panel (in the Configuration group) to specify the key
labels and modes to use for each storage pool.
|
|
Refer to IBM z/OS DFSMS Software Support for IBM System Storage TS1140,
TS1130, and TS1120 Tape Drives (3592).
8. For in-band key management use the IECIOSxx PARMLIB member or
SETIOS command to define Primary/Secondary Encryption Key Manager.
Also define the IOSAS OMVS segment to RACF.
9. Make the appropriate HCD changes.
10. Determine if coexistence support is needed.
11. Contact your tape management system or application vendor for any required
code changes and any installation exit changes that are needed.
12. Set up the system-managed encryption method. For 3494 or stand-alone
drives, have your IBM service representative update the drives. For TS3500,
update using the IBM System Storage Tape Library Specialist.
13. Schedule an IPL
14. Verify encryption:
For in-band path to the Encryption Key Manager:
a. Use the DISPLAY IOS,EKM command (with the VERIFY option) to verify the
in-band path to the Encryption Key Manager.
b. Verify that a job (or application) requesting encryption (through data class)
has its data encrypted.
For out-of-band path to the Encryption Key Manager:
a. Use RAS functions to verify (IBM service task) Encryption Key Manager
paths and encryption configuration.
Setup Tasks for System-Managed Tape Encryption on Open

Systems Platforms
|
1. Install and cable the TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives (IBM service task).
v Update tape drive firmware (all tape drives in same environment)
v Update 3494 and TS3500 Tape Library firmware, where applicable
|
|
|
2. Encryption-enable the TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives. Refer to the IBM
configuring TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives on the TS3500. The 3494 Web
Specialist can now be used to enable encryption on the TS1120 or TS1130 drive
in a 3494 Tape Library. Refer to IBM TotalStorage Automated Tape Library (3494)
Operator's Guide. For TS1120or TS1130 tape drives on others, this is an IBM
service task.
133
3. Update the IBM device driver to the latest level (http://www.ibm.com/

support/fixcentral/). Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's
Guide for details.
4. Update the Encryption Key Manager Proxy Config file with Encryption Key
Manager IP Addresses.
5. Update device attributes
v Use System Encryption FCP Proxy Manager.
v System Encryption for Write Commands at BOP.
Refer to the IBM Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide
6. Use tapeutil functions to verify Encryption Key Manager paths and encryption
configuration.
Planning for Library-Managed Tape Encryption

This topic provides the required setup tasks for library-managed encryption.
In order to perform encryption, the following items are required:
v Encryption-capable TS1120, TS1130, or TS1140 tape drives
v Keystore
IBM Encryption Key Manager component for the Java platform
Library-Managed Tape Encryption Tasks

v Update tape system library firmware (3494 or TS3500)

v Update tape drive firmware (all tape drives in same library)
v For TS1120 or TS1130 tape drives in a 3494 or TS3500, or TS1140 drives in a
TS3500, order Feature Code 9900 for Encryption Configuration (IBM service
task)
2. Use the IBM System Storage Tape Library Specialist to enable TS1120, TS1130,
or TS1140 tape drives and 3494 or TS3500 Tape Library for library-managed
tape encryption (refer to the appropriate tape library operator guide.)
v Add Encryption Key Manager IP addresses
v Specify key label
v Set up scratch encryption policy
3. Set up key mapping for ILEP (optional)
|
|
|
|
4. Use library diagnostic functions to verify Encryption Key Manager paths and
encryption configuration.
Tape Drive Installation Process for Encryption

Before the IBM service representative installs or upgrades TS1120 (3592 Model E05)
, TS1130 (3592 Model E06, EU6), or TS1140 (3592 Model E07) tape drives for
encryption, you must:
v Decide which method of encryption management to use (application-managed
encryption, system-managed encryption, or library-managed encryption).
v Install and configure the Encryption Key Manager.
134
Encryption Setup Procedure for IBM Service

|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: The TS1140 Tape Drive (3592 E07) is not supported in the 3494 Tape Library.
It is only supported in the 3584 (TS3500) Tape Library.
The following steps are performed by the IBM Service Representative:
1. Record the serial numbers of all TS1120 and later tape drives and provide these
to the customer (optional if customer plans to set the Encryption Key Manager
configuration to drive.acceptUnknownDrives=true for automatic addition of
tape drives to tape drive table).
2. Install the TS1120 and later tape drives.
a. If adding new TS1120 and later encryption-capable drives to an existing
frame, refer to 3494 Maintenance Information or 3584 Maintenance Information
for installation instructions. When installation is complete, continue at step
3.
b. If replacing current TS1120 and later drives with new ones, refer to 3494
Maintenance Information or 3584 Maintenance Information for drive FRU
replacement instructions. When replacement is complete, continue at step 3.
c. If upgrading current TS1120 and later drives, refer to Feature Code 5592 MES
Installation Instructions. When upgrade is complete, continue at step 3.
3. Configure the TS1120 and later tape drives for encryption.
a. If the TS1120 and later tape drives are installed in an Enterprise System and
connected to a 3592 C06 or J70, you must use system-managed encryption
only. If the drives are installed in a 3494 or stand-alone frame, go to step 4.
If the drives are installed in a 3584 library, configure and encryption-enable
the tape drives using the System Storage Tape Specialist web interface.
When the tape drives are configured, continue at step 5.
b. If the TS1120, or TS1130 tape drives are installed in a 3494 Open System, the
3494 Web Specialist can now be used to enable-encryption them. Refer to
IBM TotalStorage Automated Tape Library (3494) Operator's Guide. Then
continue at step 5.
c. If the TS1120 and later tape drives are installed in a 3584 Open System, the
customer configures and encryption-enables the tape drives using the
System Storage Tape Specialist web interface. When tape drives are
configured, continue at step 5.
4. Encryption-enable the tape drives by following the procedure for Setting Drive
Encryption in 3592 Maintenance Information. When the tape drives are
encryption-enabled, continue at step 6.
5. Use the System Storage Tape Specialist web interface to verify that the tape
drives are encryption-enabled. For example, select Manage Library > By
Logical Library > Select Library > Modify Encryption Method > GO.
6. If the tape drives are encryption-enabled for Enterprise Systems, follow the
3592 C06 or J70 Maintenance Information and Installation and Configuration Guide
to configure the controllers for encryption, then continue at step 7. If the tape
drives are installed in a rack, continue at step 8.
7. Run Library Verify.
8. Go to the End-Of-Call Procedures in the appropriate Maintenance Information.
Planning for supplies and equipment

The topics in this section describe planning considerations for supplies and
equipment.
135
3592 supplies
This topic describes 3592 supplies.
A data cartridge and cleaner cartridge are supplied with the first 3592 device
installed in a rack or 3494 frame. Refer to Media supplies on page 111 for
ordering additional media supplies to meet your needs. In addition to a sufficient
quantity of data cartridges, cleaning cartridges, and cartridge labels, the following
supplies are recommended:
v Lint-free cloth
v Leader Pin Replacement Kit (P/N 18P8887)
Cartridge weights
This topic describes planning considerations for cartridge weights.
Use cartridge weights for floor planning purposes only.
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 weight is approximately 239
grams (0.53 lb.)
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Economy Cartridge 3592 weight is approximately
178.2 grams (0.39 lb.)
v IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Extended Cartridge 3592 weight is approximately
250 grams (0.55 lb.)
v 3592 Cleaner cartridge weight is approximately 190.7 grams (0.42 lb.)
Planning for operator training

This topic provides a list of common operator tasks.
Typical operator tasks can include:
v Switching the tape system on or off
v Placing labels on the tape cartridge
v Setting or resetting the write-protect switch on the tape cartridge
v Initializing a tape volume
v Cleaning the drive with the cleaning cartridge
v Disposition of tape cartridges
v Analyzing problems
Refer to the IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives and TS1120 Controller Operator
Guide for more information on operator tasks.
|
|
Planning for drive cleaning

This topic provides information for cleaning a tape drive.
A 3592 cleaning cartridge is shipped with the first drive in each installation, and
additional cleaning cartridges are available through IBM. The cleaning cartridge
contains a Cartridge Memory (CM) device, which automatically keeps track of the
number of times it is used. Cleaning cartridges need to be replaced after 50 uses.
One cleaning cartridge per drive usually lasts three months. Adjust your needs
based on usage. The 3592 cleaning cartridges are not interchangeable with 3590
cleaning cartridges, so you must have both types of cleaning cartridges if you have
both types of drives in your library. Refer to the following sources for more
information about drive cleaning:
136
|
|
v To clean the 3592 tape drives, refer to the appropriate section in the IBM System
Storage TS1120, TS1130, TS1140 Tape Drives and TS1120 Controller Operator Guide.
v For information about automatic cleaning, refer to the appropriate section in
your tape librarys Operator Guide.
The following table lists cleaning times for the 3592 drives.
Table 47. Cleaning times for 3592 drives
3592 Drive
Clean Cycle Time (start of clean to end of unload)
Model J1A
3 minutes, 30 seconds
Model E05
Model E06/EU6
Model E07
Planning for applications programming

The topics in this section describe planning considerations for applications
programming.
The following considerations apply to tape programming unique to applications.
Data Security Erase

This topic describes the Data Security Erase command.
A Data Security Erase command issued to a controller will result in a SCSI Erase
command being issued to the drive with the Long bit set to B'1'.
Missing Interrupt Handler

This topic describes missing interrupt handlers.
Note: The 3590 tape drives, models B, E, and H are no longer available for
ordering but are covered for existing product support.
Most System z operating environments include a timer setting for input/output
(I/O) operations. A timer setting for I/O operations is known either as a missing
interrupt handler (MIH) or a missing interrupt time. If an I/O operation fails to
complete within the time allotted for it by the MIH setting, the MIH releases
critical resources, which the I/O operation might otherwise monopolize.
Table 48 shows the MIH value which you must set for either standard length
cartridges or extended length cartridges for your installation. For some
installations, you do not need to set the MIH, since it is automatically set for you.
'Auto Set' appears in Table 48 for installations which you should not set the MIH
value.
Table 48. Missing Interrupt Handler (MIH) Values
Emulation
Mode
|
3590 Mode
3592
Drives
3590 Model Drives

B
J1A, E05,
E06, E07
Auto Set
Auto Set
Auto Set
Auto Set
137
Table 48. Missing Interrupt Handler (MIH) Values (continued)

Emulation
Mode
|
3490 Mode
3592
Drives
3590 Model Drives

E
Standard
Length
MIH
Extended
Length
MIH
43
minutes
83
minutes
J1A, E05,
E06, E07
Standard Extended
Length
Length
MIH
MIH
Standard
Length
MIH
39
minutes
52
minutes
69
minutes
Extended Auto Set

Length
MIH
93
minutes
Note: If you use a mix of both standard and extended length cartridges, use the MIH
value listed under the 'Extended' column for your installation.
For those installations listed in Table 48 on page 137 which require setting the
MIH, the system administrator must set the MIH value via console command or
via a parameter file (such as PARMLIB in the case of z/OS, for example).
For installations that do not distinguish between 3592 Model E05, E06, EU6, E07, or
J1A tape drives, or 3590 Model B, Model E, and Model H tape drives, use the
longest time above depending on your usage of standard or extended length
cartridges.
Software tools
The topics in this section describe software tools.
Volume Mount Analyzer

This topic describes the volume mount analyzer.
Use the volume mount analyzer, available as a component of DFSMS software, to
plan for and optimize the 3592 tape installation. It provides reports on datasets by
size and frequency of use. These reports determine if tape is the best storage media
for the analyzed datasets. It also determines if its frequency of access warrants it
residing within a tape library.
Offboard data string search

This topic describes offboard data string searching.
|
|
Note: This topic only applies to 3592 models E05, E06, and E07 tape drives
installed in open systems.
The 3592 E05, E06, and E07 tape drives can search the data content of host records
for string matches. This new function is called offboard data string searching,
because the data search workload can be performed offboard from the host. This
feature is useful, for example, to find records on a tape that contain a particular
ASCII or EBCDIC character string. The tape drive can perform this search at
maximum data rate (250 MB/s for E07, 160 MB/s for E06, or 100 MB/s for native
E05) while it would take much longer for a host to read the data, buffer the data to
disk, then parse the actual data stream with host software routines. At a minimum,
the 3592 E05, E06, and E07 search logic can be used to return only records which
meet a smaller prerequisite search criteria for processing, then these records can be
parsed in more detail by the host software. In this manner the amount of data
transfer and host search times can be greatly reduced.
138
Two steps are required to perform an offboard data string search:

1. Program the desired compare strings and associated logic.
2. Invoke the string search and receive the results.
You can program the compare string search content and options using the Mode
Select command or the Send Diagnostic command. Refer to IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3592 SCSI Reference for the details of the programming fields.
The basic programming capabilities of the compare string are:
v All compares are performed within a host record and reset at record boundaries.
v An individual search string can be from 1 to 16 bytes in length.
v Each individual string has the capability to wildcard a bit position in all bytes of
a string or a byte position within the string.
v Up to 8 individual strings can be programmed (each string 1 to 16 bytes as
stated above). All active strings are compared in parallel to form a compound
string match.
v Any combination of AND, OR, and NOT logic can be used to qualify a
compound string match based on the comparison status of individual strings.
For example, if Strings 1- 3 are active, compound match criteria can be as
follows:
COMPOUND MATCH = ((STRING1 AND NOT STRING2) OR STRING3);
Multiple methods are available to invoke the search feature and receive results.
The two basic methods are:
Explicit searches
Explicit search methods use the Space, Read, or new Search command to
perform an immediate search from the current position. In this method, the
search can be programmed to halt at first match, return the first match
record, or return a list of matching records.
Snooping searches
Snooping search methods are where the search is being performed
concurrently to another operation, such as a write or read operation. Once
the search is initiated, snooping searches continue to be enabled. Check
conditions are generated when the programmed conditions are met (such
as match list full) to allow for host collection of data.
Other considerations
The topics in this section describe additional planning considerations.
Application-related features of the 3592 J70, 3590 A60, and

TS1120 (3592 C06) Controllers
Capacity utilization:
This topic describes planning considerations for capacity utilization.
Customers operating the ESCON or FICON attached 3590 system in 3490
emulation mode were previously limited to writing the maximal number of logical
blocks allowed by the 3490 architecture, which, for large capacity tapes and small
block sizes, can lead to an inability to fill an entire tape volume. With the capacity
and performance features installed and with the appropriate levels of z/OS, 3592
and 3590 drives operating in 3490 emulation mode may now address as many
logical blocks as drives operating in native 3592 or 3590 mode, permitting full
139
cartridge capacity exploitation regardless of block size or data compressibility. The

software interface that provides this capability is provided in the OPEN macro.
DFSMS will take direct advantage of this capability in its key applications, such as
DFSMShsm. Refer to the closing text for APAR OW49829 for more information on
implementing this feature.
Read performance:
This topic describes planning considerations for read performance.
The 3592 tape drives, the 3592 controllers, and 3590 Model A60 Controller provide
file-positioning interfaces that allow z/OS applications to access data based on file
number at the same fast-locate speed achieved when data is accessed by block
number. The Models C06 and J70 and the 3590 A60 interface is exploited by OPEN,
except in the case of ISO/ANSI Version 3 tapes, and it operates transparently to
the application. Applications that write many files to a tape will experience
significantly enhanced performance on subsequent mounts of the tape for
file-oriented access. Block oriented access performance also remains very high
speed.
Write performance:
This topic describes planning considerations for write performance.
The C06, J70, and A60 controllers provide functions which can substantially
improve the performance of applications that write many files on a single tape
volume. The controller functions coupled with z/OS support in OPEN / CLOSE /
EOV macros remove most of the delays associated with the writing of tape labels
for files (for Standard labeled tapes) and inter-file operations (for Standard labeled
and for unlabeled tapes). This support is available with no application changes.
Additional benefits for applications which write multiple files can be gained by
small application code changes which either take direct advantage of the features
of the Models C06, J70, and A60 controller or which take indirect advantage of
these features through the use of capabilities of the z/OS DCBE macro. Where
appropriate, the forced synchronization of buffered data to the tape medium
during the writing of filemarks may be bypassed, resulting in very substantial
application level performance improvements. Refer to the closing text for APAR
OW49829 for more information on implementing this feature.
Status bytes and sense bytes

This topic describes status and sense bytes.
The 3592 and 3590 drives perform most error recovery internally, without surfacing
any direct error condition to the attaching host. The error indications which are
surfaced for SCSI and FCP attached hosts are documented in the IBM TotalStorage
Enterprise Tape System 3592 SCSI Reference (GA32-0466) and IBM TotalStorage 3590
Tape Subsystem Hardware Reference Guide (GA32-0331) publications. For ESCON and
FICON attached hosts, much of the recovery which cannot be handled in the drive
is performed by the controller, such as the 3592 Model J70 or 3590 Model A60.
Error indications which must be surfaced by the controller are processed by the
host software error recovery programs.
Tape-write-immediate mode
This topic describes the tape-write-immediate mode.
140
When data is physically transferred to the tape medium it is always immediately

reread and verified. The writing of data is normally buffered, however, which
defers the physical transfer of the logical blocks to the tape until the buffer
conditions require the off-loading of the data or until a synchronizing command
requires the transfer. If immediate validation of a successful transfer of data to the
tape is required at the time that each logical block is written, then Tape Write
Immediate mode may be programmatically invoked. This results in block-by-block
synchronization and verification of successful transfer all the way to the medium,
but at a very substantial cost in application performance.
Data compression
This topic describes planning considerations for data compression.
3592 tape drives are capable of data compression. If software is also used to
compress or encrypt the data before sending it to the drive, the drive data
compression can still be left enabled.
Planning for data migration

This topic describes planning considerations for data migration.
Data migration is the movement of data to a new tape cartridge type during the
normal processing of jobs.
The following topics describe techniques to categorize a tape system, determine a
data movement schedule, balance tape drive requirements, and explore alternatives
to form a general migration strategy.
Most tape libraries comprise groups of tapes that are defined by their common
usage. Determining these usage groups is the first step in developing a migration
strategy.
Each group is unique because of special criteria that are applied to its use and
handling in a data processing environment. The criteria can include life cycle,
security requirements, special handling, or various application dependencies. See
Table 49 for a description of different tape categories and their characteristics.
For more information about migration issues, see z/OS DFSMS Software Support for
IBM System Storage TS1140, TS1130, and TS1120 Tape Drives (3592), SC26-7514, and
z/OS DFSMS Migration, GC26-7398.
Table 49. Tape characteristics by tape usage category
Tape Category
Tape Characteristics
v Contain records held for historical, legal, regulatory, or disaster
recovery purposes.
Archive
v Have a retention period usually more than a year and are often
stored off-site.
v Processing of these tapes can be done in locations other than the
site where they were created. This off-site processing can occur
as a part of a comprehensive disaster plan or for various legal or
regulatory requirements.
141
Table 49. Tape characteristics by tape usage category (continued)

Tape Category
Tape Characteristics
v Prepared for use in other locations.
Interchange
v May be used in other computer systems or for special purposes

like microfilm production.
v May be tapes prepared at another location to be used on the
local system, for example, tapes created on data collection
equipment.
v Created in normal backup jobs.
v Represents several generations stored in a system at any given
time.
Disk backup
v Used to recover files in the event of a program or system error

or other malfunction. The restore function is seldom used, but
when it is, the integrity of the copied data is usually critical.
v Files usually have a high turnover rate and may require
interchange with other sites.
v Contain transactions recorded against another dataset.
Journal
v Allow their companion datasets to be reconstructed by applying

the journal data to a previous version of the companion datasets.
v Used in data base and online systems applications.
Scratch
v Called the scratch pool, it contains no active data. Often a

regular flow of new, unused tapes entering a system to be used
for growth and replacement of old tapes. This may be important
in determining the number of tape cartridges to order.
v Used for the creation of new files during normal processing
when the data is to be kept at job step or job end.
v Created during periodic execution of an installation's application
programs.
Process
v Represent the highest volume of files in a system. For example,

multiple generations of a tape master file can be considered
process tapes.
v Range of criteria and time frames; most commonly is the daily,
weekly, and monthly processing cycle.
Managing multiple tape formats and lengths

This topic describes managing multiple tape formats and lengths.
|
|
|
|
|
For your migration strategy, include a consideration of multiple tape formats and
the choice of cartridge system tapes. Depending on the mix of IBM tape systems
and features available, consider the tape formats on which the tape system writes
data. Consider also whether or not mixed media and mixed recording formats are
present in the existing tape libraries.
|
|
|
|
A complete migration or conversion from 3490/3490E or 3590 created tape

cartridges involves copying all 3490 and 3590 cartridges to the IBM tape cartridge
3592 format. A partial conversion involves managing separate storage locations and
drive locations for the different media types and recording formats.
142
|
|
|
|
Migrated 3592 J1A volumes are readable only on Model J1A, E05, E06, and EU6
tape drives. Migrated 3592 E05 volumes are readable only on Model E05, E06, EU6,
and E07 tape drives. Migrated 3592 E06 volumes are readable only on Model E06,
EU6, and E07 tape drives.
|
|
|
|
Migrated JA, JJ, JR, and JW volumes are readable only on Model J1A, E05, E06,
and EU6 tape drives. Migrated JB and JX volumes are readable only on Model E05,
E06, EU6, and E07 tape drives. Migrated JC, JK, and JY volumes are readable only
on Model E07 tape drives.
Hardware configuration definitions (HCD)

This topic describes planning considerations for Hardware Configuration
Definitions (HCD).
There is no need to change the hardware configuration definitions. You may use
the same device addresses with the 3592 tape drive models that were used with
the 3590 Models. Some installed maintenance avoids the need to perform
input/output definition file (IODF) activate tasks. To perform the migration, ensure
you invoke the following procedure for each subsystem or set of subsystems
upgraded in a particular maintenance window:
v
v
v
v
v
Vary the 3590 drives off line.

Remove the 3592 device addresses from the IODF and activate it1.
Perform the upgrade.
Add the 3592 device addresses to the IODF and activate it1.
Vary the 3592 devices online to MVS.
Note: 1Application of maintenance cancels the requirement for these steps. Check
the PSP bucket.
JES3 considerations
This topic describes planning considerations for JES3.
For 3592 tape drives installed in a 3494 or 3584 tape library, update the JES3
definitions.
SMS definitions
This topic describes SMS definitions.
For 3592 tape drives installed inside a 3494 or 3584 tape library, the following
considerations apply. For detailed information, refer to the current level of the
DFSMS Object Access Method Planning, Installation, and Storage Administration Guide
for Tape Libraries.
v Define a new data class to direct new tape allocations to 3592 drives. Specify the
appropriate recording technology to direct new allocations. Also, modify the
ACS routines to assign the new data class.
StorageTek ACS-compatible frame considerations

This topic describes planning considerations for StoragetTek ACS-compatible
frames.
143
For more information on 3592 tape drives installed on a StorageTek ACS, refer also
to the IBM TotalStorage Silo Compatible Tape Frame 3592 Introduction, Planning, and
User's Guide.
For 3590 E tape drives used in 3490E emulation mode for DFSMShsm, there are
some major differences as compared to setup requirements with the B drives.
HSM does not allow mixed device types in an esoteric group. HSM considered the
3590 Model B as a UCB-type 3490E. Thus, it is possible to have esoteric groups
defined that manage mixed technology and media relationships. An example
would be 3592 drives in 3490E emulation mode and StorageTek 9490s with host
software component (HSC). However, with support for 3592, HSM recognizes the
actual underlying drive type as a 3592 model. It will not tolerate esoteric names
that mix these 3592 drives (even in 3490E emulation mode) with devices that are
actually type 3490E.
Refer to HSM considerations in the current level of the DFSMShsm publications.
Other migration considerations

This topic describes additional migration considerations.
Migrations can take place by directing new allocations to the 3592 drives and
letting old data sets expire on cartridges written on 3590 drives. There is no need
to copy the data sets unless the additional cartridge storage provided by the 3590
tape drives is required immediately.
144
Chapter 6. Device attachment planning

Fibre Channel attachment planning
This topic describes Fibre Channel attachment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each 3592 tape drive comes with dual-ported switched fabric Fibre Channel
attachments, for attachment to multiple servers or a single server with redundancy.
The 3592 Model J1A has 2 Gb dual-active ports, the 3592 E05 and E06 have 4 Gb
dual-active ports, and the 3592 E07 has 8 Gb dual-active ports. The 3592 J1A tape
drive can also attach to the TS1120 (3592 C06) controller, the 3592 J70 controller, or
the 3590 A60 controller for attachment to ESCON or FICON channels on IBM
System z servers. The 3592 E05 and E06 tape drives can attach to the 3592 C06 or
J70 but not to the 3590 A60 controller. The 3592 E07 tape drive can attach to the
3592 C06 controller. For a list of supported environments, see Chapter 1,
Introduction, on page 1. The Open Systems Device Driver (FC 9200) on the 3592
tape drive provides support for all Open Systems supported environments.
Host hardware and software considerations

This topic describes planning considerations for host hardware and software.
The 3592 tape drive is supported in a wide range of environments including
selected iSeries, AS/400, pSeries, RS/6000, xSeries, zSeries Linux, Sun, and
Hewlett Packard servers, as well as Intel-compatible servers running Linux or
Microsoft Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows Server 2003. For the latest
details on specific hardware, software, and Fibre Channel support for the 3592
refer to the following website: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/
drives/.
Other non-IBM systems

This topic describes planning considerations for other non-IBM systems.
Several non-IBM systems vendors support attachment of the 3592 tape drive. You
should check with the non-IBM system vendor for specifics on hardware and
software support requirements as any device drivers needed to support attachment
to these systems must be provided by the non-IBM vendor. FC 9213 should be
specified on the 3592 when this type of attachment is used.
SAN attachment
This topic describes SAN attachment.
Software requirements for attachment to various Fibre Channel fabric components
depends on the server and adapter being used. Refer to the list of supported
servers for software requirements for various configurations at the following
website: http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/drives/
Attention: Tape and disk over the same adapter is not advised due to
performance and stability concerns caused by the differing traffic profiles.
Native Fibre attachment

This topic describes native Fibre attachment.
145
The 3592 tape drive is supported by a variety of Fibre Channel Switches and Fibre
Channel Directors. The support is dependent on server, operating system, and host
bus adapter that is being used. For a current list of supported products or more
information on the support and prerequisites, refer to http://www-03.ibm.com/
systems/storage/tape/drives/.
FICON attachment
This topic describes planning considerations for FICON attachment.
For more information on the FICON Director support and prerequisites within a
SAN, refer to http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/z/hardware/connectivity/
index.html.
AIX High Availability Data Path Failover and Dynamic Load

Balancing
This topic describes AIX High Availability Data Path Failover and Dynamic Load
Balancing.
AIX High Availability Data Path Failover is designed to provide a failover
mechanism in the AIX Atape device driver, that enables you to configure multiple
redundant paths in a SAN environment with the 3592 tape drive. In the event of a
path or component failure, the failover mechanism is designed to automatically
provide error recovery to retry the current operation using an alternate,
preconfigured path without aborting the current job in progress. This allows you
flexibility in SAN configuration, availability and management.
A function in the AIX Atape device driver, Dynamic Load Balancing, is also
available for the 3592 tape drives used in an AIX SAN environment. The dynamic
load balancing support is designed to optimize resources for devices that have
physical connections to multiple Host Bus Adapters (HBA) in the same machine.
When an application opens a device that has multiple HBA paths configured, the
device driver determines which path has the HBA with the lowest usage, and
assigns that path to the application. The device driver is designed to dynamically
track the usage on each HBA as applications open and close devices, and balance
the number of applications using each HBA in the machine. This may help
optimize HBA resources and improves overall performance. For more information,
see the IBM TotalStorage Tape Device Drivers Installation and User's Guide, GC35-0154,
available at the following site: http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/
FICON attachment planning

This topic describes planning considerations for FICON attachment.
The 3592 may be attached in a FICON or FICON/FCP heterogeneous SAN as well
as in a pure FCP SAN. For more information on FICON attachment, see FICON
and ESCON attachment on page 148 and also refer to IBM Tape Solutions for
Storage Area Networks and FICON, SG24-5474.
This section describes the planning necessary for FICON attachment. The following
topics describe the planning:
v Configurations with FICON System Attachment
v FICON Host Attachment
Configurations with FICON system attachments

This topic describes planning considerations for configurations with FICON system
attachments.
146
The tape controllers attach to the FICON channels on a System z server.

For the TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, each 4 Gb FICON adapter (FC 3441, FC 3442,
and FC 3443) provides up to 128 logical attachments. For the 3592 J70 Controller,
each 2 Gb FICON adapter (FC 3434 and FC 3435) provides up to 128 logical
attachments. For A60 control units using 1 Gb FICON adapters on FICON
switches, each subsystem 1 Gb FICON adapter (FC 3432 and FC 3433) provides up
to 64 logical attachments. A given system may simultaneously attach a device
through both ESCON and FICON.
For information on controller cable features, see Controller cable features on
page 90.
Simultaneous accessibility for System z, through ESCON and FICON, requires
configuring the same device address for both path types.
Fiber Transport Services

The topics in this section describe planning considerations for Fiber Transport
Services.
Additional cables, fabric components, and cabling solutions:
This topic describes planning for additional cables, components, and solutions.
Conversion cables from SC Duplex to LC Duplex are available as features on the
z900 for customers currently using cables with SC Duplex Connectors that now
require attachment to fiber components with LC Duplex connections. Please refer
to the IBM 2064 sales manual for more information on these conversion kits.
The z800 and z990 servers do not offer any fiber conversion kits as product
features.
Fiber optic cables, cable planning, labeling, and installation are the responsibility of
the client for new installations and upgrades. Fiber optic conversion kits and Mode
Conditioning Patch (MCP) cables are not orderable as features on z990. Installation
Planning Representatives (IPRs) and System Service Representatives (SSRs) will not
perform the fiber optic cabling tasks without a services contract.
To better serve the cabling needs of z800, z900 and z990 systems, IBM Networking
Services has enhanced their fiber optic cabling services.
IBM Networking Integration and Deployment Services for System z fiber cabling
and for enterprise fiber cabling help to ensure IBM has a comprehensive set of
services for all clients, from product-level to enterprise-levelservices geared for
today and tomorrow. These services take into consideration the requirements for
all of the protocols/media types supported on System z , (such as ESCON, FICON,
Coupling Links, OSA) whether the focus is the data center, the Storage Area
Network (SAN), Local Area Network (LAN), or the end-to-end enterprise.
Visit the following web site for more information on these services:
http://www.ibm.com/services/networking/integration/index.html
Under the fiber optic cabling services umbrella there are three options to provide
individual fiber optic cables (jumper cables, conversion kits, MCP cables) for
connecting to z800, z900, or z990.
147
v Option 1 - Fiber optic jumper cabling package (available for z800 and z900
systems). IBM does the detailed planning. This option includes planning, new
cables, installation, and documentation. An analysis of the System z channel
configuration, I/O devices, and any existing fiber optic cabling is required to
determine the appropriate fiber optic cables.
v Option 2 - Fiber optic jumper cable migration and reuse for a System z upgrade
(new option). This option includes planning, reuse of existing cables, and
documentation. IBM organizes the existing fiber optic cables based upon the
z990 connection details. Relabeling, rerouting, and reconnection to the
appropriate z990 channels is performed. New cables are not offered as a part of
this option.
v Option 3 - Fiber optic jumper cables and installation. The client informs IBM
what is required as the client does the detailed planning. This service includes
new cables, installation, and documentation. Planning and identifying the
required cables are the client's responsibilities.
Options 1 and 2 can be combined within one statement of work to provide
complete upgrade coverage.
FICON and ESCON attachment

The TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and 3592 J70 Controller have up to four FICON
attachments (4 Gb for the C06, 2 Gb for the J70), twice the number that the IBM
TotalStorage Enterprise Tape Controller 3590 Model A60 offers. The C06 and J70
controllers also have up to eight ESCON attachments, or an intermix of ESCON
and FICON attachments. The C06 and J70 controllers can intermix ESCON, FICON
long-wavelength, or FICON short-wavelength attachments on the same controller.
A Dual ESCON Attachment for the C06 (FC 3440) or J70 (FC 3413) provides a
dual-ported ESCON host adapter. Up to four of these features can be ordered for a
total of up to eight ESCON port attachments. Each port can support up to 64
logical paths.
The number of FICON long-wavelength adapters on the TS1120 (3592 C06)
Controller is specified with feature FC 3442 or FC 3443 and on the 3592 J70
Controller with FC 3434 (FICON Attachment Long Wavelength). The number of
FICON short-wavelength adapters on the C06 is specified with feature FC 3441
and on the J70 with FC 3435 ( FICON Attachment Short Wavelength). Each FICON
attachment (features FC 3434, FC 3435, FC 3441, FC 3442, and FC 3443) can connect
up to 128 logical channels. The FICON attachment features and the ESCON
attachment features can be intermixed on a C06 and J70 but at least one of these
features must be specified. Permitted combinations of features FC 3413, FC 3434,
and FC 3435 are as follows:
Table 50. Permitted combinations of FICON/ESCON attachments
Number of Feature Allowed Number of
FC 3434 + FC 3435 or Feature FC 3413 or
FC 3441 + FC 3442 +
FC 3440
FC 3443
148
Number of FICON
Attachments
Number of ESCON
Attachments
3592 and 3590 tape control unit native FICON support

|
|
|
For information on IBM System z support for the controllers and 3592 tape drives
(z/OS, z/VM, z/VSE, and z/TPF), refer to the announcement material for the
tape drive as well as the 3592 Preventive Service Planning (PSP) bucket.
Fibre Channel attachment planning

This topic describes planning considerations for Fibre Channel attachment.
This section describes necessary planning for various Fibre Channel attachments to
non-System z environments. Planning includes the following topics:
v Multiple Fibre Channel ports
v Fibre Channel physical interface characteristics on page 150
v
v
v
v
Supported topologies on page 150

Address assignments on page 150
Fibre Channel Worldwide ID and LUN assignments on page 151
Removing, installing, or resetting a 3592 on an active Fibre Channel on page
151
v Sharing on a Storage Area Network on page 152
RS/6000 or pSeries environment for Fibre

This topic describes Fibre Channel attachment for RS/600 or pSeries.
3592 tape drives are supported on AIX 4.3.3 and later versions. Specific device
support for AIX is provided by specify number 9200, the Open Systems Device
Drivers, which is ordered on the 3592 drive. This support is also included in FC
9200 for the 3494 Tape Library. For more information on device drivers, go to Fix
Central, http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/.
AIX High Availability Data Path Failover and Dynamic Load Balancing support
through SAN connections is available through the AIX Atape device driver,
provided by the Open Systems Device Drivers (FC 9200), which is ordered on the
3592 tape drive. If you are adding these tape drives to a currently installed Model
C20 or 3494 Tape Library, you should obtain a new level of the device driver from
the Web site listed above. This capability allows you to configure multiple
redundant paths in a SAN environment to 3592 tape drives having Fibre Channel
Attachment. In the event of a path or component failure, the failover mechanism is
designed to automatically seek to retry the current operation using the alternate,
preconfigured path without aborting the current job in progress. This can provide
improved availability in your SAN configuration and management.
Tivoli Storage Manager provides 3592 support with highly automated, centrally
scheduled, policy-managed backup and archival facilities. These features protect
data in distributed environments that use AIX systems as servers.
Multiple Fibre Channel ports

This topic describes considerations for multiple Fibre Channel ports.
The 3592 tape drive has two independent Fibre Channel interfaces, or ports. Both
ports run the SCSI protocol with Fibre Channel tape support. Two ports allow
concurrent attachment of two independent Fibre Channel configurations to each
drive. One or both ports may be attached to a variety of Open Systems servers,
switches, hubs, and directors. See http://www.ibm.com/storage/ibmsan/products/
sanfabric.html for details.
149
Plug any unused ports.
Fibre Channel physical interface characteristics

This topic describes Fibre Channel physical interface characteristics.
The 3592 drive supports industry standard shortwave LC-Duplex fiber-optics
cables. This allows cable lengths of up to 500 meters with 50 micron core fiber.
For drive Fibre Channel cable feature codes, see Feature definitions3592 tape
drive standard features on page 44.
Supported topologies
This topic lists supported topologies.
The 3592 Fibre Channel supports Switched Fabric and Point-to-Point Loop
topologies.
Switched Fabric:
This topic describes switched fabric.
Two or more Fibre Channel end points interconnect through a switch. The Fibre
Channel architecture supports up to 256 ports through each switch.
Switches include a function called Zoning. This function allows the user to partition
the switch ports into port groups. It then assigns group access to other groups.
This prevents group interferences. See Sharing on a Storage Area Network on
page 152 for this function's potential needs.
Switched fabrics allow all of its ports simultaneous use of the full Fibre Channel
architecture bandwidth.
For more information on Fibre Channel fabric support, visit the web at:
http://ssddom02.storage.ibm.com/techsup/webnav.nsf/support/san
Point-to-point loop:
This topic describes Point-to-point Loop considerations.
Point-to-point loop is similar to point-to-point topology. Both have two Fibre
Channel end points connected together. The difference is in the protocol.
Therefore, when only two Fibre Channel end points connect together, either
protocol is usable. Both end points must, however, use the same protocol. The 3592
supports Point-to-Point Loop. SAN Data Gateway will utilize either protocol. Most
Fibre Channel adapters default to the loop protocol when not directly connected to
a fabric.
Address assignments
This topic describes planning considerations for address assignments.
The 3592 tape drives must have a fibre address to communicate over the Fibre
Channel interface. The 3592 allows both hard and soft addressing. Most fiber hosts
(initiators) support hard addressing, and do not support soft addressing. See your
device driver documentation for more information.
150
Selecting the hard addressing option enables you to also select the drivers
Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA). The higher the number, the lower the
priority. Most hosts will attempt the lowest AL_PA number (highest priority). The
drives should have a higher AL_PA (lower priority). Multiple drives connected in
an arbitrated loop require the drive closest to the host to have a lower AL_PA
number (higher priority) than the next drive. Follow this protocol throughout the
loop.
The soft address feature allows the drive to arbitrate the AL_PA number with other
fibre devices.
When sharing a drive between different systems, take caution to keep both hosts
from attempting to use the drive at the same time. For more information, see
Sharing on a Storage Area Network on page 152.
Fibre Channel Worldwide ID and LUN assignments

This topic describes planning considerations for Fibre Channel Worldwide ID and
LUN assignments.
Each fibre channel card on 3592 tape drives has four names (Node 0, Node 1, Port
0, and Port 1) that are hard coded into the electronics of the card by IBM
manufacturing. These names are similar to a serial number and are unique
throughout the world. Some customer fibre channel networks that have switches
with the "zoning" function will use these names, in addition to using the Port
Addresses for communications between the host and the drive.
When a 3592 tape drive is first installed in a rack or frame, the drive is configured
by the installer using the service panel. The World Wide (WWID) node names, port
names, and serial number are stored in Vital Product Data (VPD) and BVPD
(Backup VPD). If a replacement drive is installed, it will automatically inherit the
WWID, Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA), serial number, and other
configuration data for both fibre ports from the drive that was replaced. The
service representative will perform any necessary updates of the VPD when
installing a replacement drive.
The 3592 tape drive provides one Logical Unit Number (LUN) at LUN address 0.
Removing, installing, or resetting a 3592 on an active Fibre

Channel
This topic describes planning considerations for Fibre Channel.
An active Fibre Channel bus supports a 3592 attachment. This is due to the nature
of Storage Area Networks (SAN) and also applies when attaching directly to a
system.
An active Fibre Channel bus supports 3592 resetting and power cycling. The
preferred and safest method is to take all Fibre Channel ports offline before
resetting the drive.
When service representatives add or remove 3592 devices within a live system or
SAN, they will follow the guidelines below:
v The added or removed device must not be involved in bus activity. It must be
quiesced.
v Fibre Channel cables may then be removed from the 3592 interface connector.
v The 3592 device can then be removed from the rack or frame, if necessary.
151
v After all the changes are complete, a reconfiguration of all systems must be done
to update the configurations.
Sharing on a Storage Area Network

This topic describes sharing on a Storage Area Network (SAN).
With SAN components, the possibilities for connecting multiple systems and
multiple drives have increased. Not all software and systems are designed to share
drives. Check that the systems and software support this sharing before installing a
drive in a fashion that would allow two systems to see that drive.
If your software does not support sharing, be aware that Fibre Channel switches
have a zoning capability to form a SAN partition. Use this zoning to keep systems
that do not cooperate from seeing the same drives. You can remove partitioning
via zoning as software and system levels become available.
152
Chapter 7. Controller-attached emulation mode operational

considerations
|
|
This chapter provides an overview of considerations related to device-type

emulation with IBM 3592 tape drives. It helps you understand the kinds of
situations that require special attention or may potentially pose usage restrictions
with emulation mode operation. For a more detailed treatment of these
considerations, refer to: z/OS DFSMS Software Support for IBM System Storage
TS1140, TS1130, and TS1120 Tape Drives (3592), SC26-7514.
Note: For the discussions in this chapter, emulation only applies to
controller-attached environments.
General considerations for controller-attached emulation mode

operation
This topic describes operational considerations for controller-attached emulation
mode.
The TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller, 3592 J70 Controller, and 3590 Model A60
Controller permit the attached host to interact with the 3592 tape drives that use
either the native 3590 or 3490E emulation interfaces. Either a 3590 emulation or a
3490E emulation feature may be set by service personnel for any of these tape
controllers. All attached hosts in the I/O configuration require definition of control
unit and drives. The host must be defined with the unit type that matches the
device-type definition which is active on the control unit for that subsystem. 3592
Model E05, E06, EU6,E07, and J1A support is provided only as an emulation of
3590 Bxx or 3490 E (J1A only) support.
Note: WORM and Economy Cartridge functionality is supported in 3590
emulation, but not in 3490E emulation.
Emulation-mode operation requires understanding of characteristic differences. The
host perceives the drive as the emulated device type. However, the actual drive
and associated media have some characteristics that may be different from that of
the emulated device type. Generally, host programs use the 3592 tape drives in
emulation mode with no problems and with full exploitation of device and media
capabilities.
Attention: The actual drive recording format writes data on the 3592 media in
the Enterprise Tape 3592 format, regardless of device-type definition.
In 3494 and 3584 libraries, the controllerattached 3592 tape drives are always in
3590 emulation mode. The DFSMS/MVS SMS Tape support manages the recording
technology differences between the Model H and Model E and Model B drives.
DFSMS/MVS SMS tape support also tracks the recording density of the Storage
Management Subsystem (SMS) managed volumes. Thus, special attention to the
emulation mode considerations applies for 3592 tape drives in the following
environments:
v z/OS environment for drives that are not installed in IBM 3494 or 3584 libraries
153
v VM/ESA or VSE/ESA environments for drives either inside or outside 3494 or

3584 libraries
Library maintenance
This topic describes operational considerations for library maintenance.
The SD/2 library maintenance dot method is NOT valid in an environment
where the 3592 native drives report to Sys1.logrec in 3490 emulation mode. The
3480/3490 SD2 library maintenance algorithm was designed to use hardware and
the temporary error threshold that is only valid with real 3480/3490 drives. SARS
algorithms that are in the 3592 microcode contain required thresholds for 3592
drives.
If 3592 drives are reporting to SD/2 in 3490 emulation mode, the service
representative should change the SD/2 tape configuration entry for the affected
drives. This is accomplished by unchecking (turning off) the library entry on all
subsystems reporting in 3490 emulation mode.
Drive allocation/selection
This topic describes operational considerations for drive allocation and selection.
With tape drives that emulate another device type, the unit type becomes
ambiguous when there are actual drives of the same type that are host attached.
For example, any 3592 drive that is in 3490E-emulation mode has the same unit
type as an actual 3490E drive. A 3592 drive that is in 3590-emulation mode has the
same unit type as an actual 3590 Model B (in 3590 mode). Application software
maintains the relationships between pieces of media and the subset of drives on
which they can be mounted. In turn, the software must influence the selection of
an appropriate tape drive.
z/OS considerations (MVS/ESA)

This topic describes the operational considerations for z/OS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The different IBM tape devices can coexist in a heterogeneous environment with
other tape drive technologies. In an IBM tape library environment (automated or
manual), the system-managed tape library support can be used to manage device
allocation to an appropriate device. Allocations are managed to an appropriate
device based on the media interchange parameters specified in data class. Then in
the stand-alone (non-system managed environment), the requirement is placed on
the installation to manage and separate, as appropriate, the different drive
technologies and capabilities using user-defined esoterics.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to this, in the system-managed tape library environment, all drives

under the same control unit must have the same recording format capabilities and
report under the same ERDS physical identifier (EPI). This ensures that all of the
devices under the same control unit are homogeneous and that each device under
the same control unit is capable of handling the allocation request. Then, in the
stand-alone (non-system managed environment), though a mix of drives is allowed
by the control unit, the recommendation is to have homogeneous devices under
the same control unit for easier separation and management.
For more information see:
154
|
|
|
v Section on Data Facility Storage Management Subsystem (DFSMS) in the z/OS

V1R12.0 Information Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/zos/
v1r12/index.jsp
|
|
|
|
v z/OS DFSMS Object Access Method Planning, Installation, and Storage Administration
Guide for Tape Libraries, SC35-0427
v Other publications on DFSMS for System z are listed here, http://www03.ibm.com/systems/z/os/zos/bkserv/r10pdf/#dfsms
VM/ESA and z/VM considerations

This topic describes operation considerations for VM/ESA.
If 3590 Model H, Model E, and Model B are added in 3490E emulation mode, the
ASSGN JCL statements that specifies 3490 H or E cannot work properly. The
same applies if either Model H, Model E, or Model B is added when there are also
actual 3490E drives present. If Model H, Model E, and Model B are added in 3592
mode, then ASSGN JCL statements that specify 3592 cannot work properly.
VSE/ESA considerations
This topic describes operation considerations for VSE/ESA.
If 3590 Model H, Model E, and Model B are added in 3490E emulation mode, the
ASSGN JCL statements that specifies 3490 H or E cannot work properly. The
same applies if either Model H, Model E, or Model B is added when there are also
actual 3490E drives present. If Model H, Model E, and Model B are added in 3592
mode, then ASSGN JCL statements that specify 3592 cannot work properly.
Media capacity exploitation

This topic describes operational considerations for media capcaity exploitation.
A majority of applications that write data on tape are not sensitive to unit type in
internal processing used to determine end-of-volume. However, some applications
(for example, DFSMShsm) use unit type as a factor in calculating the capacity for a
particular piece of media. Check the 3590 PSP bucket for maintenance required for
IBM applications. Contact independent software vendors to verify that other
software products will exploit the full tape capacity when drives are in emulation
mode. With 3490E-emulation mode, another factor with the potential to affect full
capacity utilization is the 22-bit blockid that is used with 3490 interfaces. With
small block sizes, the full capacity of the tape is not used before the subsystem
encounters logical end-of-volume.
Tapes written with DFSMShsm using the extended capacity capability can only be
read on tape devices that support this capability. Devices supporting this extended
capacity include:
v 3590 tape drives in 3490 emulation mode attached to Model A60 Controllers that
have this new hardware enhancement and are attached to a system running
DFSMS/MVS Version 1 Release 5 or above with all applicable maintenance
applied
v 3590 B, E, and H Model tape drives that are not in 3490 emulation mode if the
tapes are first redefined as native 3590 via the DFSMShsm ADDVOL command
by a system that supports this new extended capacity
Chapter 7. Controller-attached emulation mode operational considerations
155
MVS/ESA considerations
This topic describes operational considerations for MVS/ESA.
OAM
This topic describes OAM enhancement.
An OAM enhancement will allow full 3592 cartridge capacity exploitation when
3592 drives are attached with the 3490E emulation feature.
VM/ESA and z/VM considerations

This topic describes operation considerations for VM/ESA.
VM/ESA commands and functions for writing tape data can make full use of 3592
media capacity. Specifying the largest possible block size when issuing CMS
commands ensures optimum use of media capacity and promotes the best
exploitation of 3592 performance.
VSE/ESA considerations
This topic describes operational considerations for VSE/ESA.
Typically, applications use the physical end-of-volume to determine that a tape is
full. Applications fully use capacity of media, regardless of emulation mode or
track density.
Catalog considerations
The topics in this section describes operational considerations catalogs.
Emulated device types

This topic describes operational considerations for emulated device types.
Inventories and catalogs that track the generic unit name of the device on which
data sets are written reflect the emulated device type. In the event that the
emulation mode of installed drives changes, the volumes themselves may need to
be inventoried again. Application catalogs and inventories may require manual
update to reflect the new generic unit type. Thus, effective management of 3592
cartridges includes dedicating a volume serial numbers range for 3592 cartridges
only. The emulated generic unit type in catalogs should also be reviewed in the
context of resource availability at disaster recovery facilities.
z/OS considerations (MVS/ESA)

This topic describes operational considerations for z/OS.
With TSM/MVS, data written on the medium, as well as in the product inventory,
identifies the cartridge as the emulated type (3490E or 3590). A read-compatibility
capability allows cartridges that are written in 3490E emulation mode and marked
as 3490E to be read on a 3590-mode drive.
Media interchangeability
This topic describes operational considerations for media interchangeability.
156
|
|
Data is always written on the 3592 media in the recording format of the actual
drive. 3592 tape drive media is written in the Enterprise Tape 3592 format: either
EFMT1 for the 3592 E05 and J1A tape drive, EFMT2 for the 3592 E05 Tape Drive
(or EEFMT2 for encrypted data), EFMT3 for the 3592 E06 Tape Drive (EEFMT3 for
encrypted data), or EFMT4 for the 3592 E07 Tape Drive (EEFMT4 for encrypted
data) regardless of device-type definition. Keep in mind that an application may
write metadata on the media to identify the cartridge with a specific unit type.
With emulation mode, this will be the emulated unit type. Also remember that
with a 3490E-emulation mode drive, reading a tape written on a 3592-mode device
could be constrained. It could be limited by the 22-bit blockid limit if the block
count written in 3592-mode is greater than the maximum count supported by 22
bits (4,194,303).
3490E-emulation compared to actual 3490E

This topic describes 3490E-emulation.
A 3592 Model J1A Tape Drive in 3490E-emulation mode has the following
behavioral differences when compared to an actual 3490E.
|
|
|
Note: 3490E emulation mode is only supported with the 3592 Model J1A Tape
Drive. The 3592 J1A Tape Drives are no longer available for ordering but are
covered for existing product support.
v The Block ID, returned from the 3490 Axx with the 3490E emulation host
feature, does not provide wrap, segment, and format-mode indicators in bits
09.
The wrap and segment notations in 3490E media format cannot be presented in
a meaningful context for 3590 or 3592 media. The 3590 drive as part of the 32-bit
block ID interprets a non-zero value in any of these bits. Tapes written on drives
that are attached in emulation mode must be readable in the future by 3590
drives that are attached in 3590 mode. To ensure readability, the Axx presents
the wrap, segment, and format-mode bits in emulation mode to the host as 0.
Thus, using wrap and segment fields to sense the approaching physical
end-of-tape is not effective. Applications and products which utilize wrap,
segment, or format-mode bit settings as returned from the tape subsystem may
experience unpredictable results.
The A60 controller offers the option of using 3592 block ID architecture when the
subsystem is in 3490E emulation mode. See Application-related features of the
3592 J70, 3590 A60, and TS1120 (3592 C06) Controllers on page 139 for more
details.
v The Erase gap command is functionally a No-Op.
There are technology differences between the 3490E and 3592 media formats.
The 3490E Erase Gap channel command word is effectively a No-Op, but it
causes synchronization of the drive buffers.
v DDR swap to another drive may fail in certain cases that would be successful
with actual 3490E drives.
Differences between 3490E and 3590 handling of buffered data during certain
error scenarios have the potential to result in unsuccessful completion of DDR
swap during error recovery.
v Error reports may be inconsistent with 3490E.
Not all error scenarios that are possible with a 3590 A60 control unit with the
3490E emulation feature are parallel to an IBM 3490E control unit error and vice
versa. Thus, the error reported may require contextual interpretation.
Chapter 7. Controller-attached emulation mode operational considerations
157
ERA Code 3C
This error code reports data lost in connection with a Manual Unload.
ERA Code 2E, Not Capable
This error code report an attempt to load a cartridge type other 3592.
ERA Code 2F, Limited Shared Access Violation
This error code repeats when a second host attempts tape-motion commands
in the middle of a first host's active use of a tape volume.
ERA Code 48, Unsolicited Informational Data
An error encountered in the 3590 A60 Control Unit generates ERA Code 48.
Also when a 3590 service information message (SIM) or 3590 media
information message (MIM) has been logged.
v A 3590 A60 subsystem is not installable in a 3494 library in 3490E emulation
mode.
The 3590 A60 control unit with the emulation feature provides a standalone 3590
tape subsystem configuration or integration of 3590 tape subsystem in
StorageTek libraries.
v Operator actions for standalone tape utilities may have some variations when
compared to those for 3490E.
There are differences between 3490E and 3590 tape unit controls. For example,
there is no manual rewind function on a 3590. So, an operator must perform a
manual unload and then reload the cartridge to restart a stand alone operation.
v Recovering data beyond the logical end-of-data (EOD) mark requires a
different technique.
Sometimes unusual circumstances create a need to recover data located beyond
the logical end-of-data mark of a 3590 cartridge. For example, a volume has been
scratched for reuse. Subsequently, a need arises to read old data from an area
not yet rewritten on the tape.
In such situations, some differences in technique and error handling will be
experienced as compared to performing a comparable operation on an actual
3490E. The essential distinction lies in the respective format characteristics of
3490E and 3590 media. With 3490E, it is possible to refer to a physical location
on tape through wrap and segment designations. With 3590, only logical
reference (to Block ID) is possible in specifying relative locations on the media.
Spacing or reading beyond the logical end-of-data (EOD) mark on a 3590
cartridge initially results in an end-of-data-encountered error. A subsequent
record sequence error occurs when there is spacing or reading beyond the
logical end-of-data mark upon encountering the first out-of-sequence block ID.
This error may recur if there are additional EOD marks and subsequent old data
fragments.
The native 3590 command interfaces provide options to ignore sequence errors.
Thus, recovery of data can be accomplished without encountering record
sequence errors with SCSI, ESCON, or FICON, attachment of drives as a 3590
device type.
Overwritten data, beyond the last-recorded logical EOD, cannot be recovered
locally whether in 3490E-emulation or 3590 mode. Data written in 128-track
format, and overwritten in 256-track format (or vice versa) beyond the
last-recorded logical EOD, cannot be recovered locally.
158
Appendix A. Host reporting

Statistical Analysis and Reporting System
The Statistical Analysis and Reporting System (SARS) assists in determining
whether read and write errors are caused by the media (tape) or the hardware in
the drive. The 3592 microcode contains a Volume SARS (VSARS) algorithm and a
Hardware SARS (HSARS) algorithm to analyze errors. SARS algorithms report
messages through SIMs and MIMs.
Algorithms are executed in the 3592 just before a tape is unloaded. To distinguish
error patterns and trends, the SARS volume algorithms require the tape to be
mounted on different drives while the SARS hardware algorithms require different
volumes to be mounted on one drive. As degraded hardware passes through
predefined error thresholds, cleaning and service repair messages or error codes
are presented. Similarly, if tape volumes continue to perform poorly on different
drives, re-write or discard-media messages are presented.
The SARS reporting of Service Information Message (SIM) and Media Information
Message (MIM) functions can be disabled if host software does not support SIMs
and MIMs.
Service and Media Information Messages (SIMs and MIMs)

SIM and MIM functions are primary factors for improved product availability.
v A SIM alerts you when an abnormal operational condition in the 3592 requires
service attention. Information in the SIM identifies the affected drive, the failing
component and severity of its fault condition, and the expected operational
impact of the pending service action. This information helps the user to initiate
and expedite appropriate recovery and service procedures so normal operation is
restored with maximum efficiency and minimal disruption.
A SIM contains the machine type, machine serial number, and Field Replaceable
Unit (FRU) which allows the dispatch of the appropriate service personnel and
the replacement parts required to correct the machine fault. This procedure helps
improve service response time and helps reduce the time required for machine
repair.
v A MIM identifies problems with the media (tape) and the volume number of the
bad cartridge. This allows the customer to do maintenance within the tape
library and to prevent unnecessary service calls when the fault is media.
You can select, depending on your software, the severities you wish to see. For
example, you may only want to see the acute SIM/MIM, or prefer to see all SIMs
and MIMs sent to the host. SIM/MIM filtering by severity can be done through
configuration options. The four severity codes are listed below:
v Severity 0 (FID4) code means the device requires service, but normal drive
function is not affected.
v Severity 1 (FID3) code indicates moderate severity.
v Severity 2 (FID2) code indicates serious severity.
v Severity 3 (FID1) code indicates acute severity.
159
A MIM specifies what is wrong with the cartridge that is indicated. The three MIM
severity codes are listed below:
v Severity 1 indicates moderate severity.
v Severity 2 indicates serious severity.
v Severity 3 indicates acute severity.
SIMs and MIMs can be reported multiple times. A configuration option allows
reporting the same SIM/MIM more than once. The time between repeat
SIMs/MIMs is eight hours. For example, if the configuration option is set to two, a
SIM will be reported when an error occurs, it will be repeated again eight hours
later, and, then again, eight hours after that message. The default is to not repeat
SIMs/MIMs.
SIM/MIM presentation
SIMs and MIMs reporting varies for different systems. Refer to the Statistical
Analysis and Reporting System User Guide which can be accessed on the web at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/tape/library.html. This book is only
available online, and cannot be ordered as a printed version.
There are specific SIM and MIM presentations for the following systems:
System
Presentation
System z
IEA480E and IEA486E messages, as well as EREP reports
z/VM (VM/ESA)
HCP6359I and HCP6357I messages, as well as EREP reports
z/VSE (VSE/ESA)
OP64I, OP65I, and OP20 messages, as well as EREP reports
TPF
CEFR0354I, CEFR0355W, CEFR0356W, CEFR0357E, CEFR0347W,

CDFR0348W, and CDFR0349E messages, as well as EREP reports
TSM (formerly ADSM)

ANR8972E, ANR8830E, and ANR8831W messages
AIX
SIM/MIM messages are logged to EREP reports
HP
When enabled, SIM and MIM messages are logged to /var/adm/atdd/

atdd_d.log
SUN
When enabled, SIM and MIM messages are logged to /var/adm/messages
Linux Via taped DAEMON, SIM/ and MIM messages are logged to /var/log
with file names of the form <drive serial #>.<time stamp>.simmim
160
Appendix B. Accessibility
Accessibility features help users who have a disability, such as restricted mobility
or limited vision, to use information technology products successfully.
Accessibility features
These are the major accessibility features associated with the IBM System Storage
3592 tape drives and TS1120 Controller documentation:
v You can use screen-reader software and a digital speech synthesizer to hear what
is displayed on the screen. PDF documents have been tested using Adobe
Reader version 7.0. HTML documents have been tested using JAWS version 9.0
v This product uses standard Windows navigation keys
Keyboard navigation
You can use keys or key combinations to perform operations and initiate menu
actions that can also be done through mouse actions. You can navigate the IBM
System Storage 3592 tape drives and TS1120 Controller information from the keyboard
by using the shortcut keys for your browser or screen-reader software. See your
browser or screen-reader software Help for a list of shortcut keys that it supports.
IBM and accessibility

See the IBM Human Ability and Accessibility Center for more information about
the commitment that IBM has to accessibility.
161
162
Notices
The information provided by this media supports the products and services
described with consideration for the conditions described herein.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may
be used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this
publication at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web
sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM
product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may
vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level
systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on
generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been
163
estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document
should verify the applicable data for their specific environment.
Information concerning non-IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of
those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources.
IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of
performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-IBM products.
Questions on the capabilities of non-IBM products should be addressed to the
suppliers of those products.
All statements regarding IBM's future direction or intent are subject to change or
withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objectives only.
This information is for planning purposes only. The information herein is subject to
change before the products described become available.
This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business
operations. To illustrate them as completely as possible, the examples include the
names of individuals, companies, brands, and products. All of these names are
fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business
enterprise is entirely coincidental.
Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both:
v
v
v
v
v
AIX
Enterprise Storage Server
eServer
FICON
i5/OS
v iSeries
v IBM
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
pSeries
S/390
System Storage
System z
TotalStorage
z/OS
z/VM
v zSeries
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of
International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,
or both. If these and other IBM trademarked terms are marked on their first
occurrence in this information with a trademark symbol ((R) or (TM)), these
symbols indicate U.S. registered or common law trademarks owned by IBM at the
time this information was published. Such trademarks may also be registered or
common law trademarks in other countries. A current list of IBM trademarks is
available on the Web at "Copyright and trademark information" at
http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.
164
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States,
and/or other countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the
United States, other countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
Intel, Intel logo, Intel Inside, Intel Inside logo, Intel Centrino, Intel Centrino logo,
Celeron, Intel Xeon, Intel SpeedStep, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States
and other countries.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks
of others.
Electronic emission notices

This section contains the electronic emission notices or statements for the United
States and other countries.
Federal Communications Commission statement

This explains the Federal Communications Commission's (FCC) statement.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instruction manual, might cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at
his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors, or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device might not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that
might cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada compliance statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Notices
165
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conform la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of European Union
(EU) Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a
non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM
option cards.
Attention: This is an EN 55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to
take adequate measures.
Responsible Manufacturer:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
914-499-1900
European community contact:
IBM Deutschland GmbH
IBM Technical Regulations, Department M456
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product
might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take
adequate measures.
Germany Electromagnetic compatibility directive

Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie
zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie
2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische
Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022
Klasse A ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
EN 55022 Klasse A Gerte mssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:
"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Strungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafr
aufzukommen."
166
Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische

Vertrglichkeit von Gerten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
von Gerten (EMVG)." Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die
elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG
Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) fr Gerte der Klasse A
Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren.
Verantwortlich fr die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk,New York 10504
Tel: 914-499-1900
Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:

IBM Deutschland GmbH
Technical Regulations, Abteilung M456
IBM-Allee 1, 71139 Ehningen, Germany
Generelle Informationen:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse
A.
People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission

statement
Taiwan Class A compliance statement
Notices
167
Taiwan contact information

This topic contains the product service contact information for Taiwan.
f2c00790
IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Information:

IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan
Tel: 0800-016-888
Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) Class

A Statement
jjieta1
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries

Association (JEITA) Statement (less than or equal to 20 A per
phase)
Korean Communications Commission (KCC) Class A

Statement
168
rusemi
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement
Notices
169
170
Glossary
This glossary defines the special terms,
abbreviations, and acronyms used in this
publication and other related publications. If you
do not find the term you are looking for, see the
IBM Glossary of Computing Terms located at the
following website: http://www.ibm.com/
software/globalization/terminology/index.jsp.
A
access method
A technique for moving data between
processor storage and input/output
devices.
ACF
See Automated Cartridge Facility
ACS
Automatic Cartridge System
ADSM
See TSM
AES
Advanced Encryption Standard. A block

cipher adopted as an encryption standard
by the US government.
Advanced Interactive Executive

IBM's implementation of the UNIX
operating system. The RS/6000 and
pSeries, among others, run the AIX
operating system.
AEN
Asynchronous event notification is the

ability of a device to initiate
communications with attached hosts.
AIX
See Advanced Interactive Executive
ALPA Arbitrated Loop Physical Address

alphanumeric
Pertaining to a character set that contains
letters, numerals, and possibly other
characters, such as punctuation marks.
APAR authorized program analysis report
archiving
The storage of backup files and associated
journals, usually for a given period.
arbitrated loop
see Fibre Channel arbitrated loop (FC-AL)
archiving application
The retention of records, in
machine-readable form, for historical
purposes.
automatic cartridge facility (ACF)

An optional feature for the 3590 tape
drive. It allows both the automatic
loading and unloading of tape cartridges.
automatic mode
A mode of operation that can be selected
on the ACF cartridge loader. This mode
allows the automatic feeding and loading
of tape cartridges requiring no operator
action.
B
BVPD Backup Vital Product Data
backhitch
Magnetic tape that makes a slight
backward motion just prior to moving
forward.
backup and recovery application
The short-term retention of records used
for restoring essential business and
system files when vital data has been lost
because of program or system errors or
malfunctions.
bar code
A code representing characters by sets of
parallel bars of varying widths and
separation which are read optically by
transverse scanning.
bar code label
A specially coded label that can be affixed
to a tape cartridge and which enables a
device to identify the cartridge and its
volume serial number. The bar code label
must be affixed to a tape cartridge to
enable the library to identify the cartridge
and its volume serial number.
| beginning of tape (BOT)
|
The location on a magnetic tape that
|
indicates the beginning of the permissible
|
recording area.
bit
A binary digit that may have the value of

either 0 or 1.
block
A collection of contiguous records

recorded as a unit. Blocks are separated
by inter-block gaps, and each block may
contain one or more records.
171
| BOT
BOV
CM
beginning of volume
command
A control signal that initiates an action or
the beginning of a sequence of actions.
See also channel command.
BRMS Backup Recovery and Media Services

browser
A client program that initiates requests to
a web server and displays the information
that the server returns.
BTLS
Basic Tape Library Support
buffer A routine or temporary storage location

used to compensate for a difference in
rate of flow of data, or time of occurrence
of events, when transferring data from
one device to another.
byte
A binary number containing exactly eight

bits.
control unit (CU)

A device that controls input and output
operations of one or more devices.
control unit function
A device that contains the functional logic
for controlling the input and output
operations at one or more devices.
conversion
The process of changing from one method
of data processing to another or from one
data-processing system to another.
CPU
capacity
See media capacity.
capacity scaling
A logical method of reducing the overall
length of media available for write and
read operations, providing faster
data-access times.
cartridge loader
A standard function for the tape drive. It
allows the automatic loading of tape
cartridges.
certificate
A digital document that binds a public
key to the identity of the certificate
owner, thereby enabling the certificate
owner to be authenticated.
channel
A device to device connection between
the processing unit and the I/O control
unit.
channel command
An instruction that directs a data channel,
control unit, or device to perform an
operation or set of operations.
channel path
The physical path between the channel
and the control unit. Synonymous with
channel.
cleaning cartridge
A tape cartridge that is used to clean the
heads of a tape drive. Contrast with data
cartridge.
172
Cartridge Memory
beginning of tape
data
central processing unit
Any representations such as characters or

analog quantities to which meaning is, or
might be, assigned.
database
A set of data, consisting of at least one
file, sufficient for a given purpose or for a
given data-processing system.
data cartridge
A tape cartridge dedicated to storing data.
Contrast with cleaning cartridge.
data channel
A device that connects a processor and
main storage with the I/O control unit.
Synonymous with input/output channel
and I/O channel.
data compression
An algorithmic data-reduction technique
that encodes data from the host and
stores it in less space than un-encoded
data. The original data is recovered by an
inverse process called decompression.
data-compression ratio
The number of host data bytes divided by
the number of encoded bytes. It is
variable depending on the characteristics
of the data being processed. The more
random the data stream, the lower the
opportunity to achieve compression.
data transfer rate
The average number of bits, characters, or
blocks per unit time passing between
expressed in bits, bytes, characters, or

blocks per second, minute, or hour.
corresponding equipment in a data

transmission system. The rate is expressed
in bits, characters, or blocks per second,
minute, or hour.
EEFMT2
Enterprise Encryption Format 2 recording
technology. AES 256-bit encrypted data
written recorded at the performance and
capacity format used by the native 3592
Model E05.
dataset
The major unit of data storage and
retrieval, consisting of a collection of data
in one of several prescribed arrangements
and described by control information to
which the system has access.
DDR
Dynamic device reconfiguration
degauss
To make a magnetic tape nonmagnetic by
means of electrical coils carrying currents
that neutralize the magnetism of the tape.
DFSMS
Data Facility Storage Management
Subsystem
DK
EEFMT3
Enterprise Encryption Format 3recording
Model E06.
Data Key. An alphanumeric string used to

encrypt data.
|
|
|
|
|
|
EEFMT4
Enterprise Encryption Format 4 recording
Model E07 tape drive.
EFMT1
Enterprise Format 1 recording technology.
The performance and capacity format
used by the 3592 Model J1A tape drive
and the 3592 Model E05 tape drive when
emulating Model J1A tape drive to record
at increased density.
drive head
The component of a drive that records an
electrical signal onto magnetic tape, or
reads a signal from tape into an electrical
signal.
drive loaded
A condition of a tape drive in which a
tape cartridge has been inserted in the
drive, and the tape has been threaded to
the beginning-of-tape position. Also
known as a mount.
dump To write the contents of storage, or of a
part of storage, usually from an internal
storage to an external medium, for a
specific purpose such as to allow other
use of storage, as a safeguard against
faults or errors, or with debugging.
E
ECC
Error-correction code
EEDK Externally Encrypted Data Key. A Data

Key that has been encrypted (wrapped)
by a Key Encryption Key prior to being
stored in the data cartridge. See KEK.
effective data rate
The average number of bits, bytes,
characters, or blocks per unit time
transferred from a data source to a data
sink and accepted as valid. The rate is
EFMT2
used by the native 3592 Model E05 tape
drive to record at increased density.
EFMT3
|
|
|
|
|
EFMT4
EIA
A unit of measure established by the

Electronic Industries Alliance, equal to
44.45 mm (1.75 in).
EHPCT
extended high-performance cartridge tape
emulation
imitation of another device
Glossary
173
| Encryption Key Manager (EKM)

A Java application supplying public and
private keys and certificates for use in
encrypting and decrypting data on the
TS1120 and later tape drives.
| encryption key server (EKS)
|
A software application supplying public
|
and private keys and certificates for use
|
in encrypting and decrypting data on the
|
TS1120 and later tape drives.
enable
To provide the means or opportunity. The
modification of system, control unit, or
device action through the change of a
software module or a hardware switch
(circuit jumper) position.
EOD
end-of-data
EOV
end-of-volume
The point on a tape volume beyond
which writing of logical blocks or tape
marks is not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
encryrption-capable
A TS1120 and later tape drive that is
functionally able, but not yet set up by
IBM, to encrypt and decrypt data. All
TS1140 and TS1130 tape drives are
encryption-capable. All TS1120 tape drives
with Feature Code 5592 or 9592 are
encryption-capable.
|
|
|
encryrption-enabled
An encryption-capable TS1120 and later
tape drive that has been set up by IBM to
encrypt and decrypt data.
| Environmental Record Editing and Printing

| (EREP)
The program that formats and prepares
reports from the data contained in the
error recording data set.
error-recovery procedures (ERP)
Procedures designed to help isolate and,
where possible, to recover from errors in
equipment. The procedures are often used
with programs that record the statistics of
machine malfunctions.
ESA
expanded storage array
ESCON
Enterprise System Connection architecture
174
F
Fabric, Fibre Channel
An interconnection that receives
addressed information which, in turn,
routes the information to its appropriate
destination.
FC
feature code
Fibre Channel
A technology for transmitting data
between computer devices at a data rate
of up to 4 Gbps. It is especially suited for
attaching computer servers to shared
storage devices and for interconnecting
storage controllers and drives. Often the
term is used to refer to an optics cable
utilizing filaments to transmit data.
Fibre Channel arbitrated loop (FC-AL)
In this topology, two or more Fibre
Channel end points are interconnected
through a looped interface. Information is
routed through the loop to its destination.
Fibre Channel hub
In this topology, the hub provides ports
similar to switch ports and uses a Fibre
Channel arbitrated loop structure.
Fibre Channel switch (switched fabric)
In this topology, two or more end points
are interconnected through one or more
switches.
Fibre Channel topologies
Shared loop host and storage controllers
Fiber Connectivity (FICON)
A high-speed input/output (I/O)
interface for mainframe computer
connections to storage devices.
FICON
See Fiber Connectivity
FID
Failure ID
field replaceable unit (FRU)

An assembly that is replaced in its
entirety when any one of its components
fails. In some cases a field replaceable
unit may contain other field replaceable
units; for example, a brush and a brush
block that can be replaced individually or
as a single unit.
file
A set of related records, treated as a unit,

for example, in stock control, a file could
consist of a set of invoices.
file protected
Pertaining to a tape volume from which
data can be read only. Data cannot be
written on or erased from the tape. See
write-protect.
format
The arrangement or layout of data on a
data medium.
formatted tape volume
A tape volume that has been initialized
with certain formatting information (such
as servo tracks), which is required to exist
for the recording technique used on the
volume before any data can be recorded.
Depending on the format and medium,
formatting may or may not be required to
utilize the medium for data recording
purposes.
FRU
Field replaceable unit
FTP
File transfer protocol
FTP site
Any electronic repository of information
that uses the File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
for transferring files to and from servers.
Use of an FTP site generally requires a
user ID and possibly a password.
G
GB
Gigabyte; 1 000 000 000 bytes
GBIC See gigabit interface converter

gigabit interface converter (GBIC)
A device that converts data from electrical
signals to optical signals.
GiB
One gibibyte (GiB) = 230 bytes =

1,073,741,824 bytes.
H
HBA
Host Bus Adapter
HCD
hardware configuration definition
High Performance Tape Subsystem

An IBM tape subsystem using 3592 tape
drives and, in some configurations, a 3592
tape controller.
host
The controlling or highest-level system in

a data communication configuration.
Synonymous with server.
host system
A data-processing system that is used to
prepare programs and the operating
environments for use on another

computer or controller.
HPCT high-performance cartridge tape
HSC
host software component
I
immediate mode
In tape-write-immediate mode, channel
end and device end are presented
separately.
index
A function performed by the cartridge

loader that moves cartridges down the
input or output stack one cartridge
position. A cartridge loader can perform
multiple consecutive indexes.
initiator
A device that requests an I/O process to
be performed by another device (a target).
In many cases, an initiator can also be a
target. processing unit, that handles the
transfer of data between main storage
input/output channel
In a data-processing system, a functional
unit, controlled by the processing unit,
that handles the transfer of data between
main storage and peripheral equipment.
install To set up for use or service. The act of
adding a product, feature, or function to a
system or device either by a singular
change or by the addition of multiple
components or devices.
interchange
The ability to process (read or write) a
given tape volume on any one of a set of
tape devices that support the form factor
and recording format on the tape volume.
interchange application
The preparation of tapes for use on other
systems or devices, either local or remote,
or the use of tape data prepared by
another system.
interposer
An interposer is used to connect two
dissimilar cable or device connectors.
invoke
To petition for help or support. The
request for a feature or function to be
utilized in future processing activities by
using software or hardware commands.
I/O
input/output
Glossary
175
IODF input/output definition file

IPRs
Installation Planning Representatives
ISP
independent service provider
ISV
independent software vendors
J
job control language (JCL)
Problem-oriented language designed to
express statements in a job that are used
to identify the job or describe its
requirements to an operating system.
K
KB
Kilobyte; 1 000 bytes
KEK
Key Encrypting Key. An alphanumeric

string used to encrypt the Data Key. See
EEDK.
KiB
One kibibyte (KiB) = 210 bytes = 1,024

bytes.
keystore
A database of private keys and their
associated X.509 digital certificate chains
used to authenticate the corresponding
public keys.
L
label
A label is a control file that is associated

with a data file which provides volume
and file identification information. The
label is a software construct that appears
as any other file to the I/O subsystem.
LC
Lucent connector. A type of fibre cable

connector. See also SC, Standard
Connector.
LCD
See liquid crystal display
leader pin
A small metal rod attached to the end of
the magnetic tape. During tape
processing, the leader pin is grasped by a
threading mechanism, which pulls the pin
and the tape out of the cartridge, across
the drive head, and onto a take-up reel.
The head can then read or write data
from or to the tape.
LED
Common abbreviation for light-emitting

diode.
liquid crystal display (LCD)

A low-power display technology used in
computers and other I/O devices.
176
loader See cartridge loader

load point
The beginning of the recording area on
magnetic tape.
logical-backward direction
Tape movement is in the logical backward
direction when the tape position is
moving away from EOV and toward BOV.
Logical backwards is defined
independently of the physical forward or
physical backward directions.
logical block
A logical block is an independently
accessible unit of information created by
the program within a file. A logical block
may be either a data-logical block or a
mark-logical block.
logical end of tape
A point on the tape where written data
normally ends.
logical-forward direction
Tape movement is in the logical forward
direction when the tape position is
moving away from BOV and toward EOV.
Logical forward is defined independently
of the physical forward or physical
backward directions.
logical record
A logical record is a string of
concatenated data bytes that is passed
between an application program and a
control program or access method as the
result of an I/O request.
LUN
Logical Unit Number
logical-write protection
Logical-write protection is a function
provided by the device that allows a
program to write-protect a tape volume
through some device command.
Logical-write protection persists for the
duration of a tape mount or until
deactivated by the program.
long wave
A Fibre Channel cable that has a 1400 nm
wave length.
M
magnetic recording
A technique of storing data by selectively
magnetizing portions of a magnetizable
material.
magnetic tape
A tape with a magnetizable surface layer
on which data can be stored by magnetic
recording.
manual mode
on the cartridge loader. This mode allows
a single tape cartridge feed, performed by
the operator.
MB
Megabyte; 1 000 000 bytes
MB/s
megabytes per second
media capacity
The amount of data that can be contained
on storage media and expressed in bytes
of data.
|
|
|
|
megabytes per second (MB/s or MBps)

A measure of bandwidth on a data
transmission medium, where 1 MBps =
1 000 000 bytes per second.
microcode
A code, representing the instructions of an
instruction set, that is implemented in a
part of storage that is not
program-addressable.
microprocessor
An integrated circuit that accepts coded
instructions for operation; the instructions
may be entered, integrated, or stored
internally.
microprogram
A sequence of elementary instructions
that correspond to a specific computer
operation, that is maintained in special
storage, and whose execution is initiated
by the introduction of a computer
instruction into the instruction register of
a computer.
A group of micro instructions that when
executed perform a preplanned function.
migration
See conversion
MIM
Media information message
missing interrupt handler (MIH)

An MVS and MVS/XA facility that keeps
track of I/O interrupts, informing the
operator and keeping a record whenever
an unexpected interrupt fails to occur in a
preset time interval.
mount The act of making a tape volume

available for processing by a specific tape
device.
mounted
The state of a tape volume while it is
available for processing by a specific tape
device.
multiplexer channel
A channel designed to operate with a
number of I/O devices simultaneously.
N
native data capacity
The amount of data that can be stored
without data compression on a cartridge.
nonremovable media
Recording media that cannot be added to
or removed from a recording device.
O
Oe
Oersted. The unit of magnetic intensity in

the centimeter-gram-second system.
OEM
Original equipment manufacturer
operating environment
The temperature, relative humidity, and
wet bulb temperature of the room in
which the tape library routinely conducts
processing.
output stack
The part of the cartridge loader that
receives and holds processed cartridges.
P
partitions
One or more non-overlapped
mini-volumes, each with its own
beginning and ending points, contained
within a single physical tape volume.
physical-backward direction
Tape movement is in the physical
backward direction when the physical
tape is moving in the direction that is
defined as backward for the device
processing tape. Physical backward is
defined independently of the logical
forward or logical backward directions.
physical end of tape
A point on the tape beyond which the
tape is not permitted to move.
Glossary
177
physical-forward direction
Tape movement is in the physical forward
direction when the physical tape is
moving in the direction that is defined as
forward for the device processing tape.
Physical forward is defined independently
of the logical forward or logical backward
directions.
physical-write protection
A facility provided by the mechanical
housing of the tape volume that allows a
human being or robotics device to
write-protect a tape volume.
Physical-write protection persists until the
state of the facility on the tape volume is
changed.
POST Power On Self-Test. A series of diagnostic
tests which are run automatically each
time power is provided to the device.
PostScript
A standard specified by Adobe Systems,
Incorporated, that defines how text and
graphics are presented on printers and
display devices.
processing application
The execution of a systematic sequence of
operations performed on data to
accomplish a specific purpose.
PSP
product service planning
PTF
Program temporary fix
public/private keys
A cryptography system that uses two
keys: a public key known to everyone
and a private or secret key known only to
the recipient of the message. The public
and private keys are related in such a
way that only the public key can be used
to encrypt messages and only the
corresponding private key can be used to
decrypt them. Also known as asymmetric
keys.
single command that must be completed

before accepting another command from
the same host.
quiesce
To bring a device or system to a halt by a
rejection of new requests for work.
R
random access
Random access refers to the processing of
information on a volume in a manner that
requires the device to access
nonconsecutive storage locations on the
medium.
read-type commands
Any commands that cause data to be read
from tape.
record A collection of related data or words,
treated as a unit; for example, in stock
control, each invoice could constitute one
record.
recording density
The number of bits in a single linear track
measured per unit of length of the
recording medium.
rekey
relative humidity
The ratio of the amount of water vapor
actually present in the air to the greatest
amount possible at the same temperature.
removable media
Recording media that can be added to or
removed from a recording device.
RSA
Q
queuing
The ability of a device to accept multiple
commands; implementation is either
tagged or untagged. Tagged queuing
allows a device to accept multiple
commands from a host. Untagged
queuing allows a device to accept only a
The process of changing the asymmetric

Key Encrypting Key (KEK) that protects
the Data Key (DK) stored on an already
encrypted tape, thereby allowing different
entities access to the data.
Rivest-Shamir-Adleman algorithm. A
system for asymmetric, public-key
cryptography used for encryption and
authentication. It was invented in 1977 by
Ron Rivest, Adi Shamir, and Leonard
Adleman. The security of the system
depends on the difficulty of factoring the
product of two large prime numbers.
S
SAN
Storage Area Network
SAPR Solutions Assurance Product Review

SARS Statistical Analysis and Reporting System
178
SC
Standard connector used for fibre cables.

See also LC, Lucent Connector.
SCSI
Small computer system interface
SCSI device
A host adapter or a target controller that
can be attached to the SCSI bus.
SEK
Session Encrypted Key. A Data Key that

has been encrypted (wrapped) for secure
transfer between the encryption key
server and the TS1120 and later tape
drives. See SK.
server A functional unit that provides services to

one or more clients over a network.
Examples include a file server, a print
server, and a mail server. The pSeries,
iSeries, HP, and Sun are servers.
Synonymous with host.
sequential access
Refers to the processing of information on
a volume in a manner that requires the
device to access consecutive storage
locations (for example, logical blocks) on
the medium.
|
|
|
|
|
SK
Session Key. An alphanumeric string used

to encrypt the Data Key for secure
transfer between the encryption key
server and the TS1120 and later tape
drives. See SEK.
ship group
The group of supplies, cables, or
documentation that is shipped with the
machine.
shipping environment
The temperature, relative humidity rate,
and wet bulb temperature of the
environment to which the tape library is
exposed when being transferred from one
location to another.
short wave
A Fibre Channel cable that has an 850 nm
wave length.
SIM
Service information message
SPE
Small programming enhancement
special feature
A specific design addition to an IBM
product that is quoted in the IBM Sales
Manual and ordered separately.
SSR
IBM service support representative
standard function
The significant design elements of an IBM
product that are included as part of the
basic standard product.
subsystem
A secondary or subordinate system,
usually capable of operating
independently of, or asynchronously with,
a controlling system.
system mode
on the cartridge loader. This mode allows
the automatic feeding and loading of
premounted blank or scratch tape
cartridges in response to nonspecific
volume requests, while specific volume
requests require operator insertion of the
requested tape cartridge.
T
TapeAlert
A patented technology from
Hewlett-Packard that monitors the status
of a tape device and media, and detects
problems as they occur.
TapeAlert flags
Status and error messages that are
generated by the TapeAlert utility and
display on the host console. The messages
indicate the type of problem and tell how
to resolve it.
tape cartridge
A container holding magnetic tape that
can be processed without separating it
from the container.
tape device
A computer peripheral device that
supports reading or writing of a
removable recording medium called a
tape volume. A tape device has a model
number.
tape drive
A device that is used for moving
magnetic tape and includes the
mechanisms for writing and reading data
to and from the tape.
tape format
The tape format defines the way that
information is physical recorded and
arranged on a tape volume. It includes
the physical representation for all
Glossary
179
initialized with certain formatting

information (for example, servo tracks),
which is required to exist for the
recording technique used on the volume
before any data can be recorded.
Depending on the format and medium,
formatting may be required to utilize the
medium for data recording purposes.
constructs associated with the tape data

model as well as other constructs that are
format dependent.
tape library
A structure that provides for the storage
of tape volumes and facilitates the
movement of tape volumes between the
storage structure and the tape device.
tape mark
A tape mark is a mark logical block that
can be recorded on the medium under
program direction. Tape marks are used
by the program to delineate collections of
data logical blocks on a given volume.
tape mount
The operation associated with mounting a
tape volume on a tape device.
tape synchronous mode
The tape-synchronous mode transfers
records whose length is greater than the
limits defined for buffered records. The
device operates in the tape synchronous
mode, if the format being processed is
supported.
tape unit
A device that contains tape drives and
their associated power supplies and
electronics.
tape volume
The recording medium and associated
mechanical package that houses the
media used by a tape device. See also
volume.
uniform resource locator (URL)

The address of an item on the World
Wide Web. It includes the protocol
followed by the fully qualified domain
name (sometimes called the host name)
and the request. The web server typically
maps the request portion of the URL to a
path and file name. For example, if the
URL is http://www.storage.ibm.com/
tape/index.html, the protocol is http; the
fully qualified domain name is
www.storage.ibm.com; and the request is
/tape/index.html.
unique cartridge identifier (UCID)
See WWCID
URL
V
VOLSER
Volume serial number. The serial number
of the specific tape cartridge.
volume
A certain portion of data, together with its
data carrier, that can be handled
conveniently as a unit.
A data carrier that is mounted and
demounted as a unit, for example, a reel
of magnetic tape, a disk pack.
target A SCSI device that performs an operation

requested by the initiator. In many cases,
a target can also be an initiator.
TB
Terabyte; 1 000 000 000 000 bytes
terminator
A part used to end a channel or
connection on a computer system.
TPF
transaction processing facility
TSM
Tivoli Storage Manager
TSMC TotalStorage Master Console
U
Ultra
The ANSI SCSI standard allowing up to

40 MB/s transfers on a SCSI bus.
unformatted tape volume

A tape volume that has not been
180
See Uniform resource locator
volume identifier (volid)

An identifier that uniquely identifies a
tape volume within an installation. The
volume identifier may be shown on an
external label on the tape volume and
may also be recorded on an internal label
on the media itself. On some devices, the
same volid may be associated with
multiple units of media or the different
volids may be associated with the same
unit of medium.
VPD
Vital Product Data
W
World-wide Unique Cartridge Identifier
See WWCID
write-once, read-many (WORM)
A technology to allow data to be written
once to storage media. After that, data is
permanent and cannot be altered, but can
be read any number of times.
write protected
A tape volume is write protected if some
logical or physical mechanism causes the
device processing the tape volume to
prevent the program from writing on the
volume.
write-type commands
Any commands that cause data to be
written on tape or affect buffered write
data.
WWID
hardware component, such as the port
and node of a drive.
WWCID
cartridge.
Glossary
181
182
Index
Numerics
1.6 meter rack 4
1.8 meter rack 4
2 meter rack 4
3490E emulation comparison 157
3494 library installations
Field install 3592 E05 36
Field install 3592 J1A 36
field install of E06 36
field install of EU6 36
field merge 3592 E05 37
field merge 3592 E06 38
field merge 3592 EU6 38
field merge 3592 J1A 37
plant install 3592 E05 37
remove 3592 tape drive 37
Replace 3592 J1A with E05 36
replace J1A or E05 with E06 or
EU6 37
3494 Model D22 4
3494 Model L22 4
3584 library installations
field configuration of
encryption-capable 3592 E05 44
field install of encryption-capable 3592
E05 44
3590 Model A14 frame features 84
3592 cable features 90
2109 switch attachment 95
Fibre Channel drive cables 96
FICON cables
long-wavelength 93
short-wavelength 94
host system attachment 91
ESCON cable feature
definitions 91
ESCON cables 91
SCSI drive cables 95
3592 Model C20
air box drive cover 41
field install 3592 E05 tape drive 40
field install 3592 J1A 39
field install 3592 Model E06 40
field install 3592 Model EU6 40
install C20 drive shelf pair 39
remove 3592 Tape Drive 39
replace 3592 J1A/ E05 with E06/
EU6 41
replace 3592 Model J1A with Model
E05 40
3592 Model E05
description 2
subsystem description 2
3592 Model EU6 4
3592 rack installations
plant configuration of
encryption-capable 3592
E05/E06 46
3599 media
feature descriptions 113
3599 media supplies 112
3952 F05
feature descriptions 87
3952 F05 frame features 86
A
acclimating cartridge 109
acoustic specifications 120
active Fibre Channel 151
AIX Atape device driver
dynamic load balancing 146
high availability data path
failover 146
application software
support 28
application-managed encryption 14
applications programming 137
attachments 4
B
bar code label 103
ordering 117
suppliers 117
Base Numbering xxi
binary xxi
bulk rekey 18
C
C06 control unit features 48
additional Fibre Channel drive
attachment 58
Call Home 56
rack installation 50
remote support 56
service 56
TotalStorage Master Console 56, 57
cabling information 120
Call Home 23
capacity scaling 106
cartridge 99
acclimating 109, 110
capacity scaling 106
characteristics 100
cleaning cartridge 29
compatibility 29
components
cartridge door 104
case 102
labels 102
leader pin 104
write-protect selector 102
damaged 108
degaussing 104
Fast Access
pre-scaled 106
cartridge (continued)
Fast Access (continued)
support 106
form factor 2
handling 108
inspection 109
labels 103
ordering 111, 115
quality 110
types
CE 102
Cleaning 100
Data 100
Economy 100
Economy WORM 100
WORM 100
Cartridge Memory (CM) 104
CE cartridge 102
cleaning
procedures 107
characteristics 107
compatibility 29
description
3592 Cleaning Cartridge 102
number of uses 29
compression, data 141
computing environments 1
controller
3590 Model A60 21
3592 Model 06 21
3592 Model J70 21
C06
controls and indicators 22
description 21
operator interaction 22
comparisons 21
compatibility
3590 A60 22
3592 J70 22
C06 22
J70
controls and indicators 22
description 21
operator interaction 22
Model C06
power cords 121
power specifications 121
specifications 122
Model J70
power cords 121
power requirements 120
specifications 124
cooling requirements 119
cords, power 121
183
D
data cartridge 99
capacity 99
description 99
erasing 104
write-protect 103
data compression 141
data migration 141
data security erase 137
data storage xxi
degaussing 104
device attachment 145
cable planning 147
Fibre Channel attachment
planning 145, 149
address assignments 150
Fibre Channel physical interface
characteristics 150
multiple Fibre Channel ports 149
removing, installing, or resetting
an Active Fibre Channel 151
RS/600 or pSeries environment for
fibre 149
sharing on a SAN 152
supported topologies 150
Worldwide ID and LUN
assignments 151
FICON 146
FICON attachment planning 146
configurations 147
host hardware and software
considerations 145
non-IBM systems attachment 145
native fibre 146
SAN attachment 145
tape control unit native FICON
support 149
device characteristics
site planning
cabling information 120
cooling requirements 119
environmental considerations 119
power characteristics 120
power cords 121
device drivers
support 28
device-type emulation 153
drive
3592 Model J1A
description 2
adding 130
attachments 4
comparisons 2
head 99
IOCP deck 129
Model E05
cleaning 136
operator controls 7
specifications 122
Model E06
power cords 121
Model J1A
cleaning 136
compatibility 7
drive front components 7
184
drive (continued)
Model J1A (continued)
operator controls 7
power cords 121
specifications 122
Models E07, E06, E05, J1A
characteristics 5
drive features 31
drive feature definitions
3494 library drive installations 35
rack installations 42
Tape Frame Model C20 39
TS3400 Tape Library 32
TS3500 library installations 33
drive feature description
3494 library installations 46
3494 Tape Library 35
3592 Tape Drive 43
rack installations 41
TS3400 Tape Library 31
TS3500 library installations 32
tape cartridge "pack-in" feature
definitions
data cartridge 45
no data cartridge 46
drive installation features
E
EKM xviii
emulated device types 156
emulation mode operation 153
emulation modes 9
emulation, device type 153
encryption xviii
algorithms 19
application-managed 14
asymmetric encryption 19
data key 19
externally encrypted data key 19
key encrypting key 19
key management 12
key paths 16
key wrapping 19
keys 12, 19
library-managed 18
overview 11
planning 131, 132, 134
policy configuration 12
private key 19
public key 19
requirements 130
symmetric encryption 19
system-managed 15
Encryption Key Manager
description 12
encryption-capable tape drive 12
encryption-enabled tape drive 12
end of data (EOD), logical 158
Enterprise Tape Cartridge 3592 99
environmental notices xiii
ERA code 2C, permanent equipment

check 158
ERA code 2E, not capable 158
ERA code 48, unsolicited informational
data 158
erase function 137
EU6 4
external fabric support 23
F
Fabric 23
FC 1663 32, 33
FC 1674 33
FC 1675 33
FC 4676 36
FC 4677 36
FC 4678 37
FC 4684 42
FC 4685 32
FC 4772 37
FC 4830 39
FC 4831 39
FC 4832 39
FC 4833 40
FC 4835 40
FC 4836 40
FC 4837 40
FC 4840 41
FC 4841 41
FC 5592 44
FC 5596 44
FC 9596 46
FC 9674 37
FC 9676 37
FC 9677 35
FC 9678 37
FC 9679 41
FC 9680 34
FC 9683 34, 38
FC 9684 38
FC 9685 32
FC 9689 35
FC 9692 34
FC 9693 41
FC 9694 38
feature codes 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42
FC 1013 82
FC 1025 82
FC 1061 82
FC 2210 81, 83
FC 2710 75
FC 2711 75
FC 2712 75
FC 2713 76
FC 2714 56, 76
FC 2715 56, 76
FC 2719 57, 76
FC 2720 57, 76, 77
FC 3059 64, 78, 79, 81, 82, 83, 84, 96,
97
FC 3062 50, 58
FC 3413 64
FC 3413 to FC 3435 65
FC 3434 64
FC 3434 to FC 3435 65
FC 3435 64
feature codes (continued)

FC 3435 to FC 3434 65
FC 3440 50
FC 3441 50, 51
FC 3443 51
FC 3464 84
FC 3465 65, 83
FC 3474 82
FC 3475 66, 81
FC 3476 66, 83
FC 3477 66
FC 3478 51, 67
FC 3483 67, 83, 97
FC 3484 67, 97
FC 3485 67
FC 3486 59, 67, 78, 79, 80
FC 3487 59, 68, 79
FC 3488 51, 59, 68, 79
FC 3489 68
FC 3490 69
FC 3491 69
FC 3492 51, 60, 87
FC 3493 52, 87
FC 3494 52
FC 3495 52
FC 3510 66, 78, 82, 84
FC 3511 79, 83, 84
FC 3516 87
FC 3517 88
FC 4060 85
FC 4062 85
FC 4064 84
FC 4065 69, 84, 85
FC 4074 78, 79, 82, 83
FC 4075 59, 79, 82
FC 4084 69
FC 4085 70
FC 4641 52, 58, 70, 77, 81, 83, 85
FC 4673 36
FC 4674 36, 42
FC 4675 36
FC 4772 42
FC 4802 42
FC 4812 43
FC 4860 70
FC 4865 70
FC 4868 70
FC 4870 88
FC 4887 52, 70
FC 4888 59, 79, 82
FC 4889 59, 80
FC 4890 82
FC 4897 52, 59, 71
FC 5232 85
FC 5245 85
FC 5246 85
FC 5247 53
FC 5248 53
FC 5593 53, 71, 88
FC 5594 88
FC 5595 53, 71
FC 5813 84, 97
FC 5825 84, 97
FC 5861 84, 97
FC 5875 88
FC 5877 89
FC 5878 89

FC 5879 89
FC 5880 89
FC 5913 44, 78, 82, 84,
FC 5922 44, 78, 82, 84,
FC 5961 44, 78, 82, 84,
FC 6005 45, 97
FC 6013 45, 59, 78, 97
FC 6025 45, 59, 78, 97
FC 6061 45, 59, 78, 97
FC 6203 81, 83
FC 7315 89
FC 7316 89
FC 8802 45
FC 8820 45
FC 9000 45, 54, 71
FC 9014 54
FC 9059 71, 78, 79, 81,
95, 96
FC 9060 72, 85
FC 9062 85
FC 9210 45
FC 9211 45
FC 9212 45
FC 9213 45
FC 9215 45
FC 9400 46
FC 9476 72, 83
FC 9477 72
FC 9478 54
FC 9491 72
FC 9492 54, 89
FC 9493 54, 90
FC 9510 66, 78, 82, 84
FC 9511 78, 79, 82
FC 9590 46
FC 9595 54, 72
FC 9600 46
FC 9670 78, 79, 82
FC 9700 91, 93, 94
FC 9752 93
FC 9753 93
FC 9762 94
FC 9763 95
FC 9770 91
FC 9771 91
FC 9775 92
FC 9789 92
FC 9790 92
FC 9793 94
FC 9794 95
FC 9865 73
FC 9866 73
FC 9867 73
FC 9868 73
FC 9875 55, 73
FC 9876 73
FC 9877 73
FC 9885 55
FC 9886 55
FC 9888 55
FC 9889 55
FC 9895 74
FC 9896 74
FC 9906 56
FC 9959 90
FC 9966 90
97
97
97

FC0500 44
FC0520 50, 63
FC9059 78, 97
FC9205 81, 83
Features 31
fibre channel switch 22, 23, 54, 67, 72
fibre channel switch mount kit 67
Fibre Transport Services
cable planning options 147
FICON and ESCON attachment 148
FID 159
formats, managing multiple tape formats
and lengths 142
frame capacities with controllers
3494 Model D24 5
frame capacities without controllers 4
82, 83, 84, 85,
G
G xxi
Gi xxi
H
Host reporting
159
I
IBM 3592 Tape System support xviii
device drivers xviii
I/O connectivity xix
IBM tape storage publications xix
network integration and deployment
services xix
SAN fabric xix
vendor support xix
IBM online access
publications and information xvii
IBM storage media
support URL xviii
improved data recording capability 141
in-band key path 16
independent software vendors (ISV) 28
input voltages 121
installing active Fibre Channel 151
interrupts 137
introduction 1
J
J70 control unit features 60
3590 SCSI drive attachment 84
additional Fibre Channel drive
attachment 77
3494 library 85
3590 A14 attachment 85
rack attachment 85
SAN switch Model F16 81
SAN switch Model S16 83
Call Home 74
dual path attachment 85
rack installation 63
remote support 74
service 74
Index
185
J70 control unit features (continued)

TotalStorage Master Console 56, 75
K
K xxi
key paths
Ki xxi
16
L
library
vision system 103
library maintenance 154
library-managed encryption
18
M
M xxi
managing multiple tape formats and
lengths 142
media 99
media Feature Codes 111
feature definition 111
feature description 111
media interchangeability 157
media supplies 111, 115
metric xxi
Mi xxi
migration planning 141
MIM 160
definition 159
missing interrupts 137
Model EU6 4
modes
emulation 9
N
non-IBM support xix
Brocade xix
Cisco xix
not capable, ERA code 2E 158
notices
safety and environmental xiii
O
offboard data string search 138
operational considerations 153
3490E-emulation compared to actual
3490E 157
catalog considerations 156
emulated device types 156
z/OS considerations
(MVS/ESA) 156
drive allocation/selection 154
OS/390, z/OS considerations
(MVS/ESA) 154
VM/ESA considerations 155
VSE/ESA considerations 155
emulation mode operation 153
library maintenance 154
media capacity exploitation 155
MVS/ESA considerations 156
186
operational considerations (continued)

media capacity exploitation
(continued)
VM/ESA considerations 156
VSE/ESA considerations 156
media interchangeability 157
operator training 136
out-of-band key path 17
permanent equipment check, ERA code

2C 158
planning considerations 129
applications programming 137
capacity utilization 139
data compression 141
data security erase 137
missing interrupt handler 137
offboard data string search 138
other considerations 139
read performance 140
software tools 138
status bytes and sense bytes 140
tape-write-immediate mode 141
volume mount analyzer 138
write performance 140
drive cleaning 136
encryption 131, 134
application-managed 131
system-managed 132
HCD 143
IOCP deck 129
JES 143
library-managed 134
Non-disruptive addition of
drives 130
operator training 136
other migration considerations 144
planning for data migration 141
managing multiple tape formats
and lengths 142
SMS definitions 143
StorageTek ACS compatible frame
considerations 144
supplies 136
supplies and equipment 136
cartridge weights 136
point-to-point loop 150
proper packaging 109
publications
3494 Tape Library xvi
3584 Tape Library xvi
3590 Tape System xv
3592 Tape System xv
3953 Tape Frame/Library
Manager xv
AIX xvii
EKM publications xv
Fibre Channel xvi
FICON xvi
HP xix
IBM tape storage xix
iSeries/AS400 xvii
publications (continued)
Linux
Red Hat xix
SuSE xx
Microsoft Windows xx
other publications xvii
Redbooks xix
related software xvii
SGI systems xx
SUN xx
TS3400 Tape Library xv
zSeries xvi
R
rack capacities with controllers
1.6 meter rack 5
1.8 meter rack 5
2 meter rack 5
rack capacities without controllers 4
rack installations
3590 drive maximums
with controller 27
without controller 27
J1A drive maximums
with controller 27
without controller 27
plant configuration of
encryption-capable 3592
E05/E06 46
rekey 18
remote service alert 23
removing active Fibre Channel 151
requirements, software 153
resetting active Fibre Channel 151
S
safety notices xiii
SARS 159
scratch pool cartridges 142
sense bytes 140
service alert 23
SI xxi
SIM 160
definition 159
SIM/MIM 160
site planning 119
software publications xvii
software requirements 153
software support 27
software tools 138
specifications 119
site planning 119
standard features
3592 tape drive definitions 44
drive feature description
common to racks and frames 43
status bytes 140
supplies and equipment, planning 136
supported operating systems 1
Switch 67
switched Fabric 150
system-managed encryption 15
T
T
Ti xxi
tape cartridge
3590 compatibility 7
3592 compatibility 7
WORM
3592 Tape Cartridge 101
tape drive 4
3592 Model J1A
subsystem description 2
comparisons 2
Model E05
non-operating conditions 119
operating temperature 119
operator controls 7
recommended operating
conditions 119
relative humidity 119
shipping conditions 119
storage conditions 119
Model E06
Model J1A
compatibility 7
drive front components 7
environmental specifications 119
non-operating conditions 119
operating temperature 119
operator controls 7
recommended operating
conditions 119
relative humidity 119
Models E07, E06, E05, J1A
characteristics 5
software support 27
tape drive 3592 specifications 122
tape drive features
common standard features 44
tape system description
Call Home 23
controller 22
3590 Model A60 21
3592 Model 06 21
3592 Model J70 21
frames
3584 Model D22 25
3584 Model L22 25
3590 Model A14 26
3952 Model F05 23, 125
3953 Model F05 24
D22 25
D24 25
L22 25
TS3400 24
TS3500 Model D22 25
TS3500 Model L22 25
racks 27
tape drive
3592 Model J1A 2
Tivoli Key Lifecycle Manager xviii

training, operator 136
trouble alert 23
TS1120 2
TS3400 Tape Library
field install 3592 E05/E06 32
field install of 3592 E05/E06 32
field install of 3592 E06 32
plant install of 3592 E05 32
removal 3592 tape drive 32
removal of 3592 tape drive 32
TS3500 library installations
field configuration of
encryption-capable 3592 E05 44
field install of encryption-capable 3592
E05 44
TS3500 Tape Library
field install of 3592 35
field install of 3592 tape drive 33
plant install of 3592 35
plant install of 3592 E06 34, 38
removal 3592 tape drive 33
removal of 3592 tape drive 33
U
units
xxi
V
VOLSER
characters 103
label placement 103
volume mount analyzer 138
Volume serial number 103
W
WORM
microcode requirements 105
tape cartridge format 105
Write Once, Read Many (WORM)
write-protect 103
write-validity-check option 141
105
Index
187
188

GA32-0555-05

Ibm 3592-c06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ibm 3592-c06

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ibm 3592-c06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives

and TS1120 Controller

Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM System Storage 3592 Tape Drives

Introduction and Planning Guide

Read this first

What's new in this edition (July 2011)

Copyright IBM Corp. 2011

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

Copyright IBM Corp. 2011

TS1120 (3592 C06) Controller and 3592 J70

Chapter 2. Standard Features . . . . . 31

Controller cable features . . . . . .

Chapter 4. Site planning . . . . . . . 119

Chapter 5. Planning considerations

Host configuration for the TS1120 (3592 C06)

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

Managing multiple tape formats and lengths

Chapter 6. Device attachment

Appendix A. Host reporting . . . . . 159

Appendix B. Accessibility . . . . . . 161

Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference

Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

3592 tape drive. . . . . . . . . . .

Copyright IBM Corp. 2011

3592 tape cartridge. . . . . . . . .

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

Comparison of decimal and binary units and

Copyright IBM Corp. 2011

Common feature codes for 3592 tape drives

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

Safety and environmental notices

This product contains a Class II laser. Do not stare into the

Copyright IBM Corp. 2011

If the symbol is...

Sample caution notices follow:

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

About this publication

IBM 3953 Tape System publications

IBM System Storage 3592 tape drives and controller

IBM Encryption key management publications

IBM 3590 TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System publications

IBM System Storage TS3400 Tape Library publication

Copyright IBM Corp. 2011

IBM System Storage TS3500 Tape Library publications

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Automated Tape Library (3494)

IBM System z publications

IBM Fibre Channel publications

IBM FICON and Fibre Channel publications

v FICON Planning and Implementation Guide, SG24-6497, IBM Redbooks

3592 Introduction and Planning Guide

Related software publications

v z/OS DFSMS: Introduction, SC26-7397

IBM online access

For additional information about IBM System z, see:

IBM pSeries-RS/6000, AIX information

IBM iSeries and AS/400 information

IBM Storage media support

IBM TotalStorage Enterprise Tape System 3592 support